Skip to main content

Full text of "Where the buffalo roamed : the story of Western Canada told for the young"

See other formats


WHERE  THE  1 

'  BUFFALO' 
vROAMEDr 


•  •••         mm. 

•••   •  '        •  ••• 

■  ••  «•••*«•• 
••  •      .   •  •• 
...  .    •  «  •'  • 

•    •  9    • 


ft     «•  ;  • 


BT  EX.MA^SM 


■M 
If 


OF 


m 


~j  \ 


<!      £ 


ffl 


*~ 

£ 

m" 

l-H 

01 

£ 

w 

£ 

£> 

cS 

ti 

Ph 

>, 

w 

,£ 

•->, 

o 

be 

W 

.2 

w 

_a 

J/ 

'5 

r/> 

a 

1 

CC 

<i     2 


WHERE  THE 
BUFFALO  ROAMED 

The  Story    of    Western    Canada    Told    for    the    Young 


BY 

E.  L.  MARSH 


WITIIDRA" 


With  Introduction  by 

R.  G.  MacBETH,  M.A. 

Author  of    "The  Selkirk  Settlers  in  Real 
Life,"  and  "  The  Making  of  the  Canadian  West. 

With  Illustrations  from  Paintings  by  PAUL  KANE, 
and  from  photographs  and  drawings. 


TORONTO 

WILLIAM  BRIGGS 

1908 


'. 


50 


Q 


Copyright.  Canada,  1908, 
by  WILLIAM  BRIGGS 


WITH 


INTRODUCTION. 


A  bequest  has  come  to  me  from  the  Publisher  to 
write  an  introduction  to  Miss  Marsh's  book,  "Where 
the  Buffalo  Koamed."  The  title  of  the  book  leads  one 
to  expect  large  elements  of  romance,  pathos  and  tragedy, 
and  this  expectation  will  not  be  disappointed. 

We  have  here  the  history  of  the  Great  New  West  of 
Canada,  in  the  form  of  a  series  of  sketches.  They  begin 
with  the  fascinating  chapter  which  describes  the  coun- 
try when  it  was  a  land  primeval  in  which  there  lived 

in  solitary  grandeur  the  lordly  Indian — 

i 
"  Free  as  when  Nature  first  made  man, 
Ere  the  base  laws  of  servitude  began." 

With  the  Indian,  in  a  sort  of  comradeship,  there  dwelt 
in  that  land  the  buffalo  and  the  deer,  and  all  the  tribes 
of  the  animal  world  whose  haunts  had  not  yet  been 
broken  into  by  the  crack  of  the  white  man's  rifle,  and 
whose  lives  were  not  spent  in  constant  effort  to  elude 
the  cruelty  of  men  who  hunt  the  innocent  for  sport. 

Here  and  there  throughout  the  book  we  find  touches 
that  reveal  to  us  the  lover  of  nature  and  the  friend  of 
the  dumb  creatures  of  God.     This  special  feature  has 


iv  INTRODUCTION 

no  doubt  entered  into  the  work  out  of  the  heart  of  the 
writer  of  the  book ;  but  it  is  a  particularly  good  feature 
in  view  of  the  fact  that  the  work  is  written  primarily 
for  children  and  young  people.  History  is  an  absorb- 
ing study  for  most  of  us,  but  for  children  who  have  not 
yet  been  seized  with  the  importance  of  it,  there  is  need 
for  putting  historical  facts  into  an  attractive  form.  A 
story  always  appeals  to  them,  and  they  are  naturally 
sympathetic  towards  animals;  hence,  a  book  that  con- 
tains these  features  will  convey  to  them  abundant  infor- 
mation under  its  sugar-coating  of  narrative  and  descrip- 
tion. In  all  this  Miss  Marsh  has  succeeded  so  well  that 
even  grown-up  children  who  are  anxious  to  get  hold  of 
the  history  of  the  West  will  find  in  her  book  great 
pleasure  and  profit. 

The  book  is,  of  course,  of  special  interest  to  me 
because  it  takes  me  delightfully  over  familiar  ground. 
The  West  is  the  land  of  my  birth,  and  from  childhood  I 
knew  the  life  which  Miss  Marsh  so  well  depicts.  The 
story  of  the  earliest  explorers  comes  to  me  as  one  which 
I  have  frequently  read  in  other  works,  but  the  leading 
features  in  the  old  life  of  the  West  and  the  period  of 
transition  to  the  new  life  are  within  my  own  ken.  My 
father  was  one  of  the  famous  band  known  as  the  Selkirk 
Settlers,  concerning  whose  amazing  difficulties  and  final 
triumph  Miss  Marsh  writes,  perhaps,  the  best  of  all 
her  chapters.  Here  and  there  I  can  see  evidences  that 
the  authoress  was  not  part  of  the  life  she  depicts,  but 


INTRODUCTION"  v 

on  that  account  her  uniform  correctness  is  the  more 
surprising.  It  must  be  the  result  of  protracted  and 
painstaking  study  in  connection  with  the  subject. 

The  kind  of  life  described  in  these  chapters  can 
never  be  reproduced  in  actuality,  for  the  West  is  the 
last  corner  of  the  habitable  earth  where  such  scenes 
were  possible.  The  heroism  of  explorers  like  Radisson, 
Verendrye,  Hearne,  Mackenzie,  and  the  rest,  can  have 
no  duplicate,  because  communication  and  travel  have 
been  made  easy  by  the  progress  of  science  and  inven- 
tion. The  Arcadia  of  the  Selkirk  Settlement  on  the  Red 
River  can  never  again  be  found  in  the  world,  because 
the  isolation  in  which  it  existed  would  now  be  impos- 
sible, even  though  the  lofty  character  of  the  settlers  is 
capable  of  imitation. 

There  are  no  limits  to  be  placed  upon  Western  possi- 
bilities now.  To  me  it  seems  that  the  Canadian  West, 
for  weal  or  woe,  will  be  the  largest  national  factor  in 
the  future  destiny  of  the  world,  and  it  is  hoped  that  the 
youth  of  our  land  will  acquaint  themselves  with  the 
genesis  and  development  of  its  wonderful  history. 


R.  G.  MacBeth. 


November  10,  1908. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.    No  Man's  Land    --'-'-  -  11 

II.    Henry  Hudson     -        -                 -  -  15 

III.  The  Finding  of  the  West  -  20 

IV.  Radisson  and  Groseilliers  in  the  North- 

West      -                                   -  -  26 

V.    The  Founding  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Com- 
pany                                 -  -  33 

VI.    Pierre  de  la  Verendrye     -  -  37 

VII.    Samuel  Hearne    -        -  49 

VIII.    The  Discovery  of  the  Mackenzie  River   -  61 

IX.    Alexander  Mackenzie  Crosses  the  Conti- 
nent               -         -  70 
X.    Explorers  on  the  Pacific  -        -  -79 
XI.    The  Selkirk  Settlers   '  -         -  92 
XII.    Two  Explorers  and  an  Artist  -  -  110 

XIII.  Early  Days  in  British  Columbia  -  126 

XIV.  The  Fur-Traders          -                 -  -  142 
XV.    The  Missionaries  -  149 

XVI.    Trouble  at  Red  River  -  163 

XVII.    The  White  Man's  Progress  -         -  174 

XVIII.    Treaties  with  the  Indians  -  184 

XIX.    The  Saskatchewan  Rebellion     -  -  193 

XX.    A     Journey      through    the     North-West 

To-day   -  -  216 
vii 


NOTE  OF  THANKS 


Author  and  publisher  unite  in  grateful  acknowledgment  of 
assistance  rendered  in  securing  illustrations  for  this  volume. 
Especially  do  they  thank  E.  B.  Osier,  Esq.,  M.P.,  for  per- 
mission to  reproduce  a  number  of  valuable  paintings  by  Paul 
Kane,  the  celebrated  Canadian  artist  ;  Mr.  Edmund  Morris, 
son  of  the  late  Hon.  Alex.  Morris,  for  the  painting  of  the 
scene  at  Fort  Carlton  in  1876,  when  the  Treaty  with  the  Indians 
was  signed  ;  Mr.  J.  Watson  Bain,  B.Sc,  for  material  from  the 
splendid  library  of  Canadiana  accumulated  by  his  father,  the 
late  Librarian  of  the  Toronto  Public  Library  ;  and  Mr.  M.  O. 
Hammond,  of  the  Toronto  Globe,  and  the  publishers  of  the 
Canadian  Magazine,  for  interesting  photographs  lent  for 
reproduction. 


IX 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


PAGE 

Half-Breeds  Running   Buffalo  Frontispiece 

Baby  Moose                                                     -  12 

A  Beaver  Dam  -                  -  12 

Landing  of  Henri  Hudson's  Ship,  the  "  Half-Moon"  18 

Fort  Prince  of  Wales      -----  18 

The  Lake  of  the  Woods  -                          -        -  40 

Indian  Trappers                   -                 -                          -  40 

Group  of  Indian  Children        -                          -         -  56 

Group  of  Eskimo  Children                                           -  56 

Seven  Famous  Explorers  -                                            -  78 

Paul  Kane                             ......  120 

Flathead  Woman  and  Child     -                          -         -  124 

Return  of  Indian  War  Party                    -         -         -  132 

Visit  to  an  Indian  Encampment                          -         -  1 44 

A  Fur  Brigade           -                 -         -                 -        -  144 

Seven  Famous  Missionaries        -                 -                 -  154 

The  Red  River  Settlement 163 

Poundmaker's  Last  Buffalo  Corral          -        -        -  178 

Signing  of  the  Indian  Treaty  at  Fort  Carlton,  1876  188 

Half- Breeds  Travelling   -         -         -         -         -         -  193 

The  Surrender  of  Poundmaker                 -        -        -  210 
Cree  Indians  Travelling            -        -        -        -        -216 

An  Historic  Red  River  Cart  -                  ...  224 

Troopers  of  the  North-West  Mounted  Police       -  224 

x 


Where  the  Buffalo  Roamed. 


CHAPTEE  I. 
No  Man's  Land. 

There  was  a  time  when  the  Indians  and  the  wild 
animals  had  a  great  country  all  to  themselves.  They 
had  millions  of  acres  of  land,  covered  with  long  grass 
and  beautiful  flowers,  stretching  out  far  beyond  the 
sight.  They  had  huge  mountain  ranges,  with  peaks 
so  high  that  they  reached  up  to  the  clouds  and  were 
always  tipped  with  snow.  They  had  great  lakes  and 
mighty  rivers,  little  ponds  of  water-lilies,  and  rippling 
streams.  Thousands  and  thousands  of  square  miles 
were  theirs,  and  over  all  that  vast  region  they  might 
roam  at  their  will. 

The  busy  beavers  could  cut  down  the  trees  wherever 
they  chose,  and  build  their  log  houses  out  in  the  water, 
plaster  them  with  mud  and  carpet  them  with  moss. 
They  could  build  dams  to  keep  the  water  back  and  to 
make  ponds  for  whole  villages  of  their  houses.  There 
were  baby  badgers  rubbing  their  heads  against  the  trees 
in  fun.    There  were  families  of  little  otters  sliding  down 

11 


12   WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

steep  banks.     There  were  splashing  muskrats,  sly  foxes, 
and  long-eared  bunnies. 

In  that  land  lived  the  pretty  deer  and  the  ugly  moose. 
It  was  also  the  home  of  such  countless  thousands  of 
buffaloes  that  when  they  set  out  for  a  run  over  their 
prairie  playground — larger  than  from  one  end  of  Eng- 
land to  the  other — the  earth  trembled,  the  dust  rose  in 
clouds,  and  the  sound  of  their  running  was  like  thunder. 
This  did  not  frighten  the  other  animals.  They  knew 
it  was  only  the  buffaloes  taking  exercise,  but  they  were 
careful  to  keep  out  of  the  way.  There  were  also  bears 
and  wolves  in  that  country.  Far  in  the  north,  where 
there  is  plenty  of  snow  and  ice,  lived  the  white  bear 
and  the  soft-coated  seal  that  you  have  all  seen  in  pictures. 

Though  there  were  so  many  animals  in  that  land,  not 
one  had  ever  seen  a  steel  trap  or  heard  the  sound  of  a 
gun.  The  Indians  would  hunt  the  animals  for  food 
and  clothing  for  themselves,  but  they  knew  nothing  of 
other  countries,  so  furs  were  not  sent  away ;  and  as  they 
had  only  bows  and  arrows  to  hunt  with,  the  animals 
did  not  have  to  hide  all  the  time,  like  the  wild  animals 
we  hear  of  now. 

The  Indians  were  dark-colored  people,  quick  and 
active,  strong  and  brave.  They  had  bright,  black  eyes 
that  could  see  ever  so  far,  and  ears  that  could  hear 
clearly  sounds  that  you  would  never  notice.  They  knew 
more  of  the  woods  and  the  animals  than  the  white  men 
have  ever  learned.  They  wore  feathers  in  their  hair 
instead  of  hats,  were  dressed  in  clothing  of  soft,  warm 
skins,  and  for  houses  had  log  huts  or  cozy  wigwams 
made  out  of  poles  and  skins.  The  Indian  babies  had 
the  branches  of  the  trees  for  cradles  and  were  rocked 


'fop*- 


BABY  MOOSE. 


%xt 


:-, 


J^H  ■ 


A  BEAVER  DAM. 


NO  MAN'S  LAND  13 

by  the  winds.  They  needed  no  one  to  sing  them  to 
sleep,  because  with  them  this  prettiest  of  all  lullabies 
came  true : 

"  Rock-a-by  baby  in  the  tree  top, 
When  the  wind  blows  the  cradle  will  rock, 
When  the  bough  breaks  the  cradle  will  fall, 
Down  comes  baby,  cradle  and  all." 

In  the  evenings  the  Indians  would  gather  about  the 
wigwam  fires,  listening  to  the  winds  rustling  among 
the  trees  or  the  prairie  grasses,  and  to  the  night-calls  of 
the  animals.  They  believed  that  some  of  these  rustling 
sounds  were  spirits  talking  to  them — the  good  spirits 
that  guided  and  cared  for  them. 

They  built  their  wigwams  here  and  there  in  the  great 
country,  and  moved  them  whenever  they  wished.  There 
were  no  laws  to  say  they  must  stay  here  or  go  there, 
no  white  people  to  build  big  houses  in  straight  rows,  no 
trains  that  shrieked  or  boats  that  whistled.  None  of 
the  white  man's  things  were  there.  On  the  lakes  and 
rivers  were  only  the  silent  canoes  of  the  Indians,  and 
no  sounds  were  heard  but  the  voices  of  the  wild  fowl 
or  the  splish-splash  when  some  animal  dived  after  a 
fish  or  plunged  in  for  a  swim.  This  may  sound  like  a 
fairy  story,  but  it  is  all  true. 

When  the  white  man  first  went  to  that  country  he 
thought  it  very  dreary  and  lonely.  He  called  it  the 
"  Great  Lone  Land  "  and  "  No  Man's  Land."  But  he 
was  glad  to  take  away  some  of  the  pretty  fur  coats  the 
wild  animals  wore.  For  years  the  white  man  thought 
of  it  only  as  a  country  where  he  could  get  warm  furs  in 
plenty.  To-day  that  great  country  is  neither  a  "  Great 
2 


14       WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

Lone  Land  "  nor  "  No  Man's  Land."  The  Indians  and 
the  wild  animals  no  longer  have  it  to  themselves. 
People  from  almost  every  country  under  the  sun  have 
made  it  their  home.  Towns  and  cities  have  been 
built,  railways  run  from  place  to  place,  and  where  the 
buffaloes'  playground  used  to  be  are  vast  stretches  of 
rich  harvest-fields. 

That  country  is  our  Canadian  North-West. 

But  what  made  this  great  change,  and  how  did  it 
come  about  ?  Did  the  Indians  move  their  wigwams 
away  to  make  room  for  the  white  man's  houses  ?  And 
what  did  the  buffalo,  the  beaver  and  the  moose  think 
of  it  all  ?  And  how  did  the  white  man  find  his  way 
there  in  the  first  place  ?  Every  change  has  a  story, 
and  one  of  the  best  stories  ever  told  is  of  this  great 
country.  So  let  us,  begin  at  the  beginning.  You  cannot 
know  the  end,  for  "  the  end  is  not  yet,"  but  you  shall 
read  of  wonderful  things  which  have  happened  up  to 
the  present  day. 


CHAPTER  II. 

Henry    Hudson. 

In  the  years  gone  by,  before  the  white  men  made  their 
way  to  the  North-West  or  had  travelled  far  into  the 
New  World,  as  they  called  the  newly-discovered  country 
of  America,  they  thought  that  this  great  continent  was 
only  a  narrow  strip  of  land.  They  felt  sure  there  must 
be  a  water  passage  leading  through  the  land  to  the  sea 
beyond,  and  they  wanted  to  find  it  so  that  they  might 
sail  through  America  to  this  western  sea.  Such  a 
passage  would  give  the  trading  vessels  from  Europe  a 
shorter  route  to  India  and  China  than  the  one  they  had 
at  that  time,  which  was  around  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope, 
to  the  south  of  Africa. 

Explorers  had  no  idea  then  that  in  the  North-West 
was  a  greater  country  than  the  Canada  they  knew.  It 
never  occurred  to  them  that  Indians  and  the  wild  ani- 
mals could  have  such  a  great  land  all  to  themselves. 
But  though  these  travellers  came  to  more  lakes  and 
rivers,  more  hills  and  plains,  more  Indians  and  animals, 
they  found  no  sea.  They  could  get  deeper  and  deeper 
into  the  New  World,  but  they  could  not  get  across  it. 

One  great  explorer,  named  Henry  Hudson,  sailed 
along  the  coast  of  North  America  in  a  boat  called  the 
Half  Moon,  searching  for  this  north-west  passage. 
After  sailing  into  a  number  of  inlets,  which  he  found 
to  be  only  bays,  and  so  did  not  lead  to  the  Western  Sea, 

15 


16       WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

he  went  home  again.  He  was  not  discouraged  by  this 
failure,  but  made  up  his  mind  that  the  water  passage 
must  be  farther  north  than  he  had  sailed. 

It  was  about  this  time  that  Henry  Hudson  had  two 
dreams ;  one  came  to  him  when  he  was  asleep  at  night, 
and  the  other  when  he  was  wide  awake,  in  broad  day- 
light. In  his  night  dream  he  saw  a  ship,  that  had  been 
returning  through  the  northern  passage,  wrecked,  and 
the  goods  it  carried  from  the  rich,  warm  countries  drift- 
ing about  in  the  homes  of  the  seals  and  the  polar  bears. 
The  bears  were  burning  their  tongues  on  the  .spices,  and 
the  seals  were  getting  tangled  up  in  the  silks.  In  his 
day  dream  the  ship  was  not  wrecked,  but  came  safely 
through  the  polar  sea  full  sail  from  India.  The 
commander  of  that  ship  was  himself! 

It  was  the  day  dream  Henry  Hudson  said  he  would 
make  come  true.  He  declared  that  he  would  now  dis- 
cover something  worth  while.  Then  he  set  out  with  his 
son  in  a  new  boat,  which  he  called  the  Discovery. 

Crossing  the  Atlantic,  he  sailed  northward  through 
a  narrow  strait,  and  entered  that  great  bay  in  the  north 
which  is  named  for  him.  On  the  shores  of  this  bay  he 
and  his  men  spent  the  cold,  dreary  winter.  When  they 
found  their  ship  completely  frozen  in,  and  knew  they 
must  stay  there  for  many  months,  they  began  to  won- 
der how  long  their  food  would  last.  They  had  no  idea 
whether  they  would  be  able  to  get  any  game,  nor  did 
they  have  any  idea  how  long  and  terribly  cold  the  winter 
would  be.  In  speaking  of  this  time  one  man  wrote: 
"  But  now  we  were  in,  it  behoved  us  to  have  a  care  of 
what  we  had,  for  that  we  were  sure  of,  but  what  we 
had  not  was  uncertain."     Of  the  cold  he  said :  "  To 


HENRY  HUDSON  17 

speak  of  all  our  trouble  in  this  time  of  winter  (which 
was  so  cold  that  it  lamed  most  of  our  company,  and  I 
myself  do  yet  feel  it)  would  be  too  tedious." 

It  happened,  however,  that  through  the  coldest 
weather  they  had  food,  for  beautiful  white  ptarmigan 
stayed  about  in  such  numbers  that  the  men  said  they 
killed  "  above  an  hundred  dozen."  Before  the  spring 
the  ptarmigan  flew  away,  and  swans,  geese  and  ducks 
came.  Hudson  hoped  these  birds  would  nest  there,  so 
that  the  men  would  have  food  while  waiting  for  the  ice 
to  break  up.  But  the  birds  were  going  to  spend  the 
summer  farther  north,  and  were  soon  away  again. 
Then  the  hard  times  came,  and  it  was  all  the  men  could 
do  to  keep  from  starving.  Often  they  would  go  ashore 
to  hunt  for  frogs,  which  they  were  very  glad  to  get 
(though  they  called  them  loathsome  as  toads).  When 
no  frogs  were  to  be  had  they  gathered  moss,  which  they 
boiled  and  tried  to  eat. 

Before  the  ice  melted  away,  an  Indian  crossed  over  to 
the  ship — probably,  as  one  of  the  men  said,  "  to  see 
and  be  seen."  The  lonely  men  gladly  welcomed  him  to 
their  ship,  for  he  was  the  first  Indian  they  had  met  with 
in  all  this  time.  Though  he  could  not  speak  their  lan- 
guage, they  understood  him  by  the  signs  he  made. 
Hudson  gave  him  a  knife,  a  looking-glass,  and  some 
buttons.  He  was  delighted  with  the  presents,  and  after 
a  long  look  at  himself  in  the  looking-glass,  made  signs 
that  when  he  had  slept  (his  way  of  saying  the  next  day) 
he  would  come  again. 

True  to  his  word,  the  Indian  came  the  next  day,  this 
time  drawing  a  sled  on  which  he  had  two  deerskins 
and  two  beaverskins.     The  white  men  watched  him  to 


18       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

see  what  he  would  do.  He  pulled  the  things  which 
Hudson  had  given  him  out  of  a  bag  or  pocket  under  his 
arm,  and  then  laid  the  knife  on  one  beaverskin  and  the 
glass  and  buttons  on  the  other.  This  was  to  show  that 
the  skins  were  in  return  for  the  presents.  Then  he  gave 
the  beaverskins  to  Hudson  and  put  his  own  things  back 
where  they  were  before.  Hudson  traded  him  a  hatchet 
for  the  deerskins.  Before  the  Indian  left  he  made 
signs  that  his  people  lived  some  distance  to  the  south, 
and  that  after  a  certain  number  of  "  sleeps  "  he  would 
come  back  and  bring  others  with  him.  But  the  white 
men  never  saw  him  again. 

At  last  the  long,  cold  winter  came  to  an  end,  and  the 
ship  was  released  from  the  ice  which  had  so  long  impris- 
oned her.  The  men  were  tired  of  the  North  and  wanted 
to  go  home,  but  Hudson  told  them  that  after  having 
come  so  far  he  could  not  think  of  turning  back  without 
searching  for  the  passage  he  had  set  out  to  find.  At  this 
the  men  broke  out  in  a  rage,  and  said  if  he  would  not 
go  home  they  would  go  without  him.  And  they  did  so. 
They  put  Henry  Hudson,  his  son,  and  a  few  of  the 
sailors  who  were  ill,  adrift  in  a  small  open  boat.  Then 
they  sailed  away,  and  left  them  at  the  mercy  of  the  cold 
Arctic  winds  and  the  wild  northern  waves. 

The  men  who  did  this  wicked  act  had  a  miserable 
time  before  their  vessel  reached  home.  Many  of  them 
died.  Some  kept  themselves  alive  by  eating  the  skins 
that  had  been  left  from  the  birds  they  had  shot  and 
eaten  long  before,  and  sea-weed  fried  in  candle  ends.  ^ 
The  few  who  did  reach  home  were  so  ill  and  spent  with 
hunger  that  people  pitied  them  even  in  spite  of  their 
crime. 


LANDING  OF  HENRY  HUDSON'S  SHIP,  THE  "HALF  MOON." 


t 


H6. 


. 


FORT   PRINCE   OF    WALES. 


HENRY  HUDSON  19 

Poor  Henry  Hudson  was  never  heard  of  afterwards. 
We  only  know  that  his  grave  is  somewhere  under  the 
waves  or  on  the  shore  of  the  great  bay  that  is  named, 
for  him.     Hudson  Bay  is  both  his  monument  and  his 
tomb. 

"  Open  the  Bay  which  Hudson — doubly  crowned 
By  fame — to  science  and  to  history  gave. 
This  was  his  limit,  this  his  utmost  bound — 
Here,  all  unwittingly,  he  sailed  and  found, 
At  once,  a  path  of  empire  and  a  grave. 

"  Open  the  Bay!     What  cared  that  seaman  grim, 
For  towering  iceberg  or  the  crashing  floe? 
He  sped  at  noonday  or  at  midnight  dim, 
A  man!  and,  hence,  there  was  a  way  for  him, 
And  where  he  went  a  thousand  ships  can  go." 

— Charles  Mair. 


CHAPTER  III. 
The  Finding  of  the  West. 

After  Hudson's  voyage,  men  still  searched  for  a 
water  passage  through  the  new  continent.  Besides  the 
explorers,  the  good  missionaries  were  following  the 
Indians  farther  back  into  the  country.  Father  Jogues 
had  a  mission  as  far  west  as  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  and  a 
man  called  Jean  Nicolet,  who  was  not  a  missionary,  had 
gone  through  the  Straits  of  Mackinaw.  But  what  was 
beyond  that  no  white  man  knew.  The  Indians  and  the 
animals  still  had  the  great  North- West  all  to  themselves. 
But  they  were  not  to  have  it  alone  much  longer.  Pierre 
Radisson,  the  first  white  man  to  enter  their  country, 
was  at  this  time  a  boy  living  at  Three  Rivers,  a  place 
between  Montreal  and  Quebec.  He  was  born  in  France, 
in  the  little  seaport  town  of  St.  Malo,  but  his  father 
moved  to  Canada  while  he  was  still  a  boy. 

Pierre  was  happy  in  the  new  country,  for  he  loved 
adventure  and  was  not  afraid  of  danger.  There  was 
plenty  of  danger  then.  The  Iroquois  Indians  had  been 
at  war  with  the  Hurons  and  Algonquins  for  years. 
Because  the  French  helped  the  Hurons  and  Algonquins 
fight  against  the  Iroquois,  this  great  tribe  declared  they 
would  have  their  revenge,  and  were  now  trying  to  kill 
all  the  white  people,  as  well  as  their  Indian  enemies. 
It  was  not  a  peaceful  time  for  the  young  Pierre  to  live 
in  Canada.    All  this  does  not  concern  the  history  of  the 

20 


THE   FINDING  OF   THE  WEST  21 

North-West,  but  it  will  make  you  better  acquainted 
with  the  man  who  was  to  find  it. 

Many  times  the  young  people  at  Three  Rivers  were 
told  not  to  venture  outside  the  fort,  for  the  Iroquois 
were  in  hiding  all  about,  ready  to  capture  any  stray 
Frenchman.  In  spite  of  this  warning,  one  fine  day 
Pierre  went  out  with  two  of  his  friends  to  hunt.  Before 
they  had  gone  far  they  met  a  settler  who  told  them 
that  he  had  seen  hundreds  of  heads  out  among  the  hills, 
and  warned  them  not  to  go  on.  Upon  hearing  this  the 
two  friends  turned  back,  but  Pierre  went  on  alone.  All 
through  his  life  he  was  just  the  same,  going  on  and 
on  and  on,  no  matter  what  the  dangers  were. 

He  had  good  fortune  with  his  hunting  that  day,  and 
at  last  he  started  back  with  a  string  of  wild  ducks  and 
geese  over  his  shoulders.  Near  the  place  where  he  had 
left  his  companions  he  sat  down  to  rest.  Then  the  brave 
hunter  began  to  have  strange  nervous  feelings,  and 
though  he  saw  nothing,  it  seemed  to  him  that  he  was 
not  alone.  To  reassure  himself  that  there  was  no  dan- 
ger, and  to  shake  off  this  nervous  feeling,  he  began  to 
shoot  at  the  wild  fowl.  "  Surely,"  he  thought,  "  there 
can  be  no  one  about,  or  ducks  would  not  come  down  to 
the  water."  Moving  on  for  a  better  shot,  he  stumbled 
over  something.  To  his  horror  and  amazement  he  saw 
that  it  was  the  dead  body  of  one  of  his  companions. 

Pierre  Radisson  knew  too  well  what  had  happened. 
He  tried  to  hide,  but  the  dark  heads  of  the  Iroquois 
seemed  in  an  instant  to  surround  him.  They  had  been 
hiding  among  the  rushes  and  behind  the  trees  watching 
for  him.  They  captured  him;  but  spared  his  life  because 
he  was  so  brave  that  they  wanted  him  to  be  one  of  them- 


22       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

selves.  They  adopted  him  into  one  of  their  families. 
The j  dressed  him  up  in  their  own  way,  painted  his  face, 
and  put  feathers  in  his  hair;  then,  when  they  thought 
they  had  made  him  look  very  grand,  they  gave  him  a 
looking-glass  that  he  too  might  admire  himself.  Poor 
Radisson  said  afterward  that  he  looked  "  all  in  a  pickle." 
But  he  was  pleased  when  they  gave  him  firearms,  for 
nowhere  could  he  learn  to  be  a  great  hunter  better  than 
with  the  Indians. 

For  over  a  year  he  was  with  them.  During  that  time 
he  became  wise  in  the  ways  of  the  Indians  and  learned 
to  love  the  wilderness.  Often  when  he  lay  asleep  beside 
the  camp-fire  he  would  dream  of  journeying  through 
new  lands  where  no  white  man  had  been  before.  When, 
at  last,  he  got  away  from  the  Indians,  he  fled  to  New 
York,  took  a  boat  for  France,  and  from  there  sailed 
back  to  Three  Rivers. 

While  Pierre  was  away  his  eldest  sister,  Marguerite, 
married  a  man  named  Groseilliers,  who,  like  himself, 
wished  to  explore  unknown  lands.  Groseilliers  told  him 
that  some  Indians  had  been  at  Three  Rivers  and  had 
told  the  white  men  of  a  wide  country  beyond  the  Great 
Lakes  that  was  rich  in  furs.  They  also  told  them  that 
away  to  the  north  of  this  country  was  salt  water.  Sixty 
canoes  of  Frenchmen  had  set  out  to  find  this  land,  but 
they  became  discouraged  and  turned  back.  Groseilliers, 
with  one  of  the  priests,  had  gone  farther  and  heard 
more  from  the  Indians  about  this  country.  He  now 
wanted  Radisson  to  go  with  him  to  find  that  land. 
Radisson  was  delighted  at  the  prospect,  and,  though  he 
had  been  home  only  a  few  weeks,  wanted  to  start  at 
once,  and  said  he  "  longed  to  see  himself  in  a  boat." 


THE   FINDING  OF  THE  WEST  23 

The  brave  men  soon  had  a  chance  to  set  out  for  the 
unknown  land.  It  happened  that  about  this  time  (the 
summer  of  1658)  some  Algonquins  from  far  away  came 
down  to  Three  Rivers  to  trade  their  furs.  Thinking 
it  a  good  chance  to  be  guided  to  the  distant  country, 
Radisson,  Groseilliers,  and  quite  a  party  of  their  coun- 
trymen, started  back  with  them.  The  trip  was  so  dan- 
gerous that  Radisson  and  Groseilliers  were  the  only 
white  men  to  go  all  the  way. 

The  Algonquins  had  traded  their  furs  for  guns,  the 
first  they  had  ever  possessed,  and  were  so  delighted  with 
them  that  they  were  continually  firing  them  off.  Radis- 
son said,  "  Don't  do  so  much  shooting,  or  the  Iroquois 
will  hear  you;  and,  above  all  things,  keep  the  canoes 
together,  so  that  if  we  are  attacked  we  can  defend  our- 
selves." The  Indians  would  not  listen.  Before  they 
had  gone  far  an  Indian  came  out  of  the  woods  and 
shouted  to  them.  He  called  them  brothers,  and  said, 
"  I  would  save  you ;  your  enemies  are  spread  up  and 
down.  They  have  heard  your  noise,  and  wait  for  you. 
Keep  your  hatchets  sharp,  build  a  fort,  and  make  haste !" 

The  foolish  Algonquins  would  not  take  warning,  for 
had  they  not  their  new  guns  ?  Because  Radisson  and 
Groseilliers  told  them  that  even  with  their  guns  they 
needed  to  be  careful  when  such  crowds  of  Iroquois  were 
about,  they  said  these  men  were  "  timid  squaws."  They 
called  the  Indian  who  warned  them  a  hen  and  a  dog. 
In  spite  of  their  bravado,  however,  they  showed  some 
caution.  They  did  not  land  that  night,  but  tied  their 
canoes  among  the  rushes  in  the  river,  where  they  were 
safely  hidden. 

In  the  morning  they  set  out  before  daylight,  while 


24       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

there  was  still  a  fog  to  hide  them.  As  they  glided  on, 
the  sound  of  rushing  water  told  them  that  they  had 
come  to  a  waterfall.  A  still  more  alarming  sound 
reached  their  ears.  It  was  the  war-cry  of  the  Iroquois 
and  the  crash  of  their  guns.  This  frightened  them  so 
that  they  hardly  knew  what  they  were  doing.  They  ran 
into  the  woods  and,  as  Radisson  says,  "got  themselves 
all  in  a  heap  like  ducks  that  see  the  eagle  come  to  them." 
All  day  they  remained  in  hiding.  When  darkness  came 
they  crept  back  to  their  canoes.  The  Indians  were  now 
thoroughly  frightened  and  declared  they  would  make  a 
dash  past  the  falls,  but  that  they  could  not  help  the 
white  men  nor  carry  any  of  their  things. 

By  this  time  the  young  Frenchmen  who  were  with 
Radisson  and  Groseilliers,  knowing  they  would  not  be 
able  to  keep  up,  decided  to  turn  back.  These  two  said 
they  would  finish  the  journey  or  die  by  the  way. 

Once  past  this  band  of  Iroquois  they  travelled  only 
at  night,  lying  hidden  under  the  trees  during  the  day. 
As  they  were  afraid  to  let  their  guns  be  heard,  they 
dare  not  shoot  at  the  wild  fowl,  but  lived  on  boiled  moss 
and  berries.  It  was  well  for  the  bear  in  the  berry  patch 
that  they  dare  not  fire  at  him.  In  spite  of  the  slow 
work  of  paddling  up  stream  and  portaging  their  canoes, 
they  reached  Lake  Nipissing  in  good  time.  Then  they 
passed  down  French  River  to  Georgian  Bay,  made  their 
way  around  its  northern  shores,  past  Manitoulin  Island, 
on  through  the  Straits  of  Mackinaw,  and  up  Lake 
Michigan,  exploring  the  country  to  the  south. 

The  next  year  (1659)  they  turned  northward  and 
during  the  winter  travelled  day  after  day  on  snowshoes 
over  the  crisp,  hard  snow.     On  this  journey  they  heard 


THE   FINDING  OF   THE  WEST  25 

some  wonderful  news.  The  Indians  they  met  told  them 
about  a  great  bay  in  the  north,  and  from  their  descrip- 
tion the  Frenchmen  knew  it  must  be  the  one  Henry 
Hudson  had  discovered.  They  heard  whereabouts  it 
was,  and  learned  for  a  certainty  that  one  could  get  to 
it  from  Canada  by  land. 

In  the  spring  of  the  following  year  they  were  ready 
to  go  back  with  some  fine  furs  and  carrying  news  of  the 
great  country  they  had  found.  But  the  Indians  had 
reasons  for  not  wishing  to  guide  them  back.  They 
wanted  the  white  men  to  stay  with  them,  because  they 
had  done  so  much  for  them;  and  besides,  the  Indians 
were  afraid  to  take  the  journey,  for  they  had  heard  the 
Iroquois  were  lying  in  wait  for  them.  One  old  chief 
made  a  speech  in  which  he  said : 

"Brothers,  the  Iroquois  will  destroy  you  and  carry 
you  away  captive.  Will  you  have  the  brethren  that 
love  you  slain?  Stay  till  next  year;  then  you  may 
go  freely." 

Radisson  took  a  beaverskin  that  one  of  the  Indians 
had  on  his  shoulder,  and  throwing  it  at  the  chief,  replied 
in  this  way : 

"How  can  you  defend  yourselves  without  getting 
arms  from  the  French  ?  If  you  try  to  fight  the  Iroquois 
with  beaver  pelts  instead  of  guns  you  will  make  your 
children  slaves.  But  do  as  you  like ;  we  can  get  along 
without  you." 

That  speech  settled  the  matter.  The  Indians  were 
too  proud  to  stand  such  talk,  so  they  guided  the  white 
men  back. 


CHAPTER  IV. 
Radisson  and  Groseilliers  in  the  North- West. 

Upon  the  return  of  the  two  daring  explorers  the 
greatest  interest  was  taken  in  their  journey.  Everyone 
wanted  to  know  whether  they  had  heard  anything  of 
the  North-west  Passage  or  the  Western  Sea.  But  they 
were  careful  not  to  tell  what  they  had  heard  of  the  great- 
bay,  for  fear  someone  would  start  off  and  get  there 
before  them  and  have  all  the  glory  of  finding  it. 

In  spite  of  their  care  people  did  hear  about  it. 
Radisson  was  surprised  when  some  men  told  him  they 
were  preparing  to  start  for  the  great  bay  in  the  north 
and  asked  him  to  go  along  as  guide.  The  man  who  had 
braved  the  dangers  of  a  first  journey  into  that  unknown 
land,  and  had  found  the  way,  declined  to  act  as  a  guide 
for  others.  Then  he  talked  with  Groseilliers,  and  they 
made  up  their  minds  to  be  off  at  once  and  get  there 
before  the  others. 

Now,  there  was  one  difficulty  in  the  way.  At  this 
time  no  one  in  Canada  was  allowed  to  trade  in  furs 
without  a  license,  that  is,  permission  from  the  Gover- 
nor. When  Radisson  and  Groseilliers  asked  for  a 
license  the  Governor  refused  to  grant  it  unless  they 
would  agree  to  give  him  half  the  furs  and  take  two  of 
his  servants  along  to  see  that  he  received  his  full  share. 

The  men  who  were  going  to  take  this  long  journey 
and  risk  their  lives  in  making  great  discoveries  for  their 

26 


RADISSON  AND  GROSEILLIERS         27 

country  were  indignant.  Radisson  says:  "We  made 
the  Governor  slight  answer,  and  told  him  that  for  our 
part  we  knew  what  we  were,  discoverers  before  gover- 
nors. If  the  wild  men  came  down  the  way  for  them 
as  for  us,  we  should  be  glad  to  have  the  honor  of  his 
company,  but  not  that  of  his  servants,  and  that  we  were 
both  masters  and  servants." 

The  Governor  was  angry,  and  said  they  should  not 
go.  He  forbade  them  to  leave  Three  Rivers.  They  sent 
him  word  that  they  would  go,  and  then  stole  away  in 
the  night.  Meanwhile,  the  Indians  who  were  going  to 
guide  them  grew  tired  of  waiting  and  went  on.  Radis- 
son and  Groseilliers  had  to  paddle  day  and  night  to 
catch  up  with  them. 

Then  the  real  hardships  of  the  journey  began.  More 
than  once  they  drove  away  lurking  bands  of  Iroquois. 
Game  was  so  scarce  that  sometimes  they  nearly  starved. 
But  the  Indians,  Radisson  tells  us,  were  "as  kind  as 
Christians."  Often,  while  gathering  berries  along  the 
shore,  some  of  them  would  call  to  him  to  come  and 
share  in  a  good  place  they  had  found.  Once,  in  a 
time  of  great  scarcity,  an  Indian  in  the  boat  with 
Radisson,  seeing  a  beaver  put  its  head  above  the 
water,  jumped  in,  went  down  to  the  bottom  after  it,  and 
brought  it  up  in  his  arms.  He  was  much  too  hungry 
to  fear  being  bitten. 

In  October  they  came  to  Lake  Superior,  where  they 
had  plenty  of  fish  and  game.  After  having  some  good 
meals  beside  their  camp-fires  on  the  beach,  they  coasted 
round  the  south  shore  to  the  west,  and  from  the  west 
to  the  north. 

When  journeying  north-west  from  the  lake  they  met 


28   WHEKE  THE  BUFFALO  EOAMED 

some  Indians  of  the  Cree  tribe,  who  lived  in  the  North- 
West.  These  Indians  were  delighted  to  see  them,  and 
at  once  invited  the  white  strangers  to  visit  them.  When 
Radisson  and  Groseilliers  accepted  the  invitation,  the 
Crees  went  away  to  bring  some  of  their  people  back  to 
carry  the  strangers'  baggage  and  conduct  them  to  their 
village.  As  the  Indians  had  a  long  journey  home,  the 
white  men  built  a  little  fort  to  rest  in  while  they  waited 
for  their  return.  It  is  not  supposed  that  this  fort  was 
within  the  Canadian  North-West,  but  the  North-West 
Indians  came  to  it.  It  was  the  place  where  they  first 
traded  with  the  white  man.  The  queer  little  beginning 
of  what  was  to  become  a  great  fur  trade  was  just  a  tiny 
log  hut  beside  a  river,  with  a  bright  fire  burning  in  the 
middle,  log  beds  on  one  side,  and  a  log  table  on  the  other. 

You  may  rest  assured  that  when  you  are  in  the  land 
of  the  Indians,  though  you  see  no  signs  of  them,  they 
know  where  you  are  and  what  you  are  doing.  So  they 
learned  the  little  hut  was  there  and  came  to  visit  it. 
But  the  visits  were  always  friendly  ones,  made  to 
welcome  the  strangers. 

Before  long  they  were  coming  so  often  and  staying 
so  late  that  the  white  men  could  not  sleep.  Radisson 
put  a  stop  to  that.  He  was  wise  enough  to  know  that 
if  he  could  impress  them  with  the  greatness  of  the 
white  man  he  would  keep  them  at  a  respectful  distance. 
What  he  did  do  was  to  cut  birch  bark  in  narrow  strips 
and  roll  gunpowder  in  it  at  regular  distances;  then 
stretch  it  round  the  hut  and  set  it  on  fire.  When  the 
Indians  saw  the  circle  of  fire,  with  one  little  explosion 
after  another,  they  were  amazed.  They  declared  the 
white  men  were  wonderful  beings,  and  were  careful  not 


RADISSON  AND  GROSEILLIERS         29 

to  offend  them,  nor  to  come  oftener  than  they  were 
wanted.  So  Radisson  and  Groseilliers  lived  there  in 
peace  until  the  Crees  came  back  to  take  them  to  their 
homes. 

The  Crees  looked  up  to  the  explorers  as  if  they  were 
gods.  They  shouted  and  danced  for  them,  carried  all 
their  things,  and  were  blissfully  happy  if  they  got  a 
brass  awl,  a  ring,  or  a  needle.  The  first  white  men  to 
travel  in  the  North-West  were,  as  Radisson  said, 
"  Csesars  with  none  to  contradict  them."  When  nearing 
the  Cree  village  with  their  white  visitors,  the  Indians 
sent  their  swiftest  runners  on  to  tell  that  they  were 
coming.  In  the  morning  they  entered  the  village  in 
grand  style. 

The  Indians  were  so  pleased  with  their  white  visitors 
and  the  presents  they  received  from  them  that  they  got 
down  on  the  ground  to  show  that  they  would  be  their 
slaves.  Some  even  threw  themselves  backwards  upon 
the  ground,  which  was  their  way  of  showing  friendship 
and  welcome.  Afterwards  they  gave  a  grand  feast  and 
danced  for  their  guests. 

Living  in  the  land  of  the  Indians  was  very  pleasant 
for  a  time,  but  when  winter  came  Radisson  and  Groseil- 
liers saw  some  of  the  red  man's  troubles.  As  the  season 
advanced  the  snow  began  to  fall.  Clouds  of  great  white 
flakes  came  down,  changing  the  daylight  into  darkness. 
The  wild  creatures  hurried  away  to  their  shelters  and 
not  a  living  thing  could  be  found.  The  Indian  hunters 
came  home  empty-handed. 

According  to  the  Indian  custom  in  days  of  famine, 
all  the  food  was  now  kept  for  the  men,  that  they  might 
have  strength  to  hunt.     The  women  and  children  were 


30       WHEEE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

eating  only  dried  skins.  As  time  passed  and  no  trace 
of  game  could  be  found,  the  skins,  or  soup  made  out  of 
bark,  was  all  they  had  for  anyone.  To  keep  from  starv- 
ing they  even  boiled  the  bones  that  had  been  left  from 
the  time  of  plenty.  As  the  ground  was  frozen,  and 
covered  with  five  or  six  feet  of  snow,  it  was  only  with 
the  greatest  difficulty  that  they  could  get  roots. 

When  the  spring  came  and  the  snow  and  ice  melted, 
the  animals  came  out  again,  and  food  was  plentiful. 
Then  the  white  men  prepared  to  travel  on.  After  they 
had  made  a  visit  to  the  Indians  a  little  to  the  south,  the 
Crees  offered  to  take  them  to  the  great  bay  of  the  north, 
which  Radisson  and  G-roseilliers  had  come  to  find. 
Radisson  had  sprained  his  ankle,  but  he  was  a  true 
explorer  and  would  not  stop  on  that  account.  For  two 
days  he  limped  along  with  the  others.  Then,  as  he 
could  keep  up  no  longer,  they  gave  him  a  little  food 
and  went  on  without  him. 

Groseilliers  was  hunting  at  the  time,  and  did  not  know 
that  his  companion  was  left  behind.  For  a  few  more 
days  poor  Radisson  crept  along  on  the  trail  of  the  others. 
When,  at  last,  he  came  to  an  empty  wigwam,  he  was  so 
weary  and  ill  that  he  built  a  little  fire  and  went  to  sleep. 
A  great  light  and  a  crackling  noise  awakened  him.  The 
wigwam  was  on  fire.  He  threw  out  his  snowshoes, 
crawled  out  himself,  and  watched  it  burn  to  the  ground. 
He  had  no  shelter  now,  and  was  cold  and  hungry,  and 
his  foot  was  so  sore  that  he  could  not  walk.  Far  away 
there  were  sounds — the  baying  of  wolves,  he  felt  sure — 
and  there  in  the  cold  and  darkness  he  wondered  how 
much  longer  he  would  have  to  live.  But  the  brave 
explorer  was  being  cared  for.    When  Groseilliers  joined 


RADISSON  AND   GROSEILLIERS         31 

; 
the  others  after  his  hunting  and  learned  what  had  hap- 
pened to  his  comrade,  he  sent  Indians  back  for  him. 
The  sounds  that  Radisson  took  to  be  the  howling  of 
wolves  were  the  shouts  of  these  Indians.  They  soon 
found  him  and  took  him  safely  on  to  the  others. 

After  a  time  they  came  to  rivers  that  flowed  north 
to  the  great  bay,  and  travelled  by  canoe  again.  But  so 
far  north  were  they  now  that  they  found  the  rivers  still 
full  of  floating  ice.  Radisson  wrote  of  this  canoe  trip, 
'  We  were  in  danger  to  perish  a  thousand  times  from 
ice  jam." 

Whether  or  not  these  explorers  really  spent  the  sum- 
mer on  the  shores  of  the  Hudson  Bay  is  still  a  disputed 
point.  But  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  they  were  the 
first  white  men  to  find  the  way  to  it  overland  and  to  sail 
on  the  rivers  that  emptied  into  that  great  bay. 

They  could  tell  many  curious  stories  of  the  Indians 
they  found  far  in  the  north.  One  of  these  stories  was 
about  an  Indian  to  whom  they  showed  the  image  of  the 
flight  of  Joseph  and  the  Virgin  Mary  with  the  child 
Jesus.  The  Indian  at  once  began  to  weep  and  tear  his 
hair.  He  said  that  the  white  men  must  know  every- 
thing, for  that  was  his  wife  and  child  who  had  been 
taken  away  by  another  tribe  four  years  before.  Point- 
ing to  Joseph,  he  said,  "  There  am  I  with  my  long  robe, 
seeking  for  my  wife  and  child." 

In  the  spring  of  1663  the  explorers  started  for  home. 
They  reached  there  with  rich  furs  just  at  a  time  when 
the  Governor  needed  money.  He  cared  nothing  for  the 
hardships  and  dangers  they  had  met  with  in  finding 
new  lands  where  there  was  a  wealth  of  furs  for  their 
country,  nor  for  what  Radisson  had  endured  when  he 


32   WHEKE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

tramped  for  days  with  a  sprained  ankle  to  find  a  great 
bay.  Nor  did  he  care  that  many  a  time  they  had  almost 
starved.  But  he  did  care  about  the  money  their  canoe- 
loads  of  furs  would  bring,  and  to  get  that  money  he 
fined  the  explorers  because  they  had  slipped  away  in 
the  night  without  his  permission.  The  fine  amounted 
to  almost  as  much  as  the  value  of  the  furs  they  had 
brought  back,  and  they  were  left  poor  men.  He  gave 
them  no  honor  for  their  service  to  the  country,  but 
instead  tried  his  best  to  bring  disgrace  upon  them. 


CHAPTER  V. 
The  Founding  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company. 

Radisson  and  Groseilliers,  as  you  have  seen,  were 
unjustly  treated  in  New  France.  They  therefore 
resolved  to  cross  the  ocean  and  seek  justice  in  Old 
France.  But  Old  France  would  pay  no  attention  to 
them.  Then  an  Englishman,  who  saw  how  unfairly 
they  had  been  used,  said,  "  Have  no  more  to  do  with 
your  own  country,  but  come  to  England.  You  will  be 
better  treated  there."  After  trying  in  vain  to  make 
some  arrangement  in  France  by  which  they  could  go 
back  to  Hudson  Bay  and  trade,  they  decided  to  take 
the  Englishman's  advice.  They  went  to  England,  just 
three  years  after  their  return  from  the  north. 

Upon  their  arrival  in  the  city  of  London,  Radisson 
and  Groseilliers  were  kindly  received  by  King  Charles. 
He  was  much  interested  in  what  they  told  him  of  the 
Hudson  Bay  fur  trade,  but  he  was  busy  with  a  war 
just  then  and  they  were  kept  waiting.  However,  he  had 
a  cousin,  Prince  Rupert,  who  wanted  to  make  some 
money  and  who  talked  much  with  the  French  explorers 
of  the  wealth  which  they  said  was  to  be  gained  from 
the  beaverskins  of  the  New  World. 

Prince  Rupert's  interest  had  so  much  influence  that 
by  the  spring  of  1668  a  company  of  men  advanced 
money  enough  to  send  two  ships  to  the  Hudson  Bay. 
Radisson  sailed  in  one  and  Groseilliers  in  the  other. 

33 


34       WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

The  vessel  Radisson  was  in  was  driven  back  by  storms, 
but  Groseilliers,  in  Captain  Gillam's  ship,  reached 
Hudson  Bay  in  safety.  After  sailing  southward  they 
came  to  a  river  which  Groseilliers  named  Rupert  in 
honor  of  Prince  Rupert.  Here  they  built  a  fort  and 
called  it  Fort  Charles,  after  the  King  of  England.  The 
Indians  were  delighted  to  have  the  fort  there.  They 
brought  all  their  furs  to  the  white  men,  and  promised 
to  come  again  with  more. 

When  winter  set  in  it  was  just  as  cold  and  dark  and 
dreary  to  these  white  men  as  it  had  been  to  poor  Henry 
Hudson  and  his  men  over  fifty  years  before.  Captain 
Gillam  wrote  in  his  journal:  "  The  earth  seemed  frozen 
to  death."  It  did  not  seem  to  him  that  spring  could 
ever  come.  But  it  did.  The  weather  became  warm, 
then  hot.  The  Englishmen  were  astonished  at  the 
sudden  change,  and  began  to  think  it  possible  for  the 
fur-traders  to  live  on  Hudson  Bay. 

When  the  ice  broke  up  they  sailed  back  to  England 
with  a  load  of  rich  furs.  Meanwhile  Radisson  had  not 
wasted  his  winter,  but  had  been  talking  much  about 
Hudson  Bay  and  the  fur  trade.  Prince  Rupert  had 
been  talking,  too.  The  result  was  that  when  the  ship 
came  back,  and  all  could  see  the  beautiful  furs  from 
Hudson  Bay,  a  company  was  formed.  It  was  called 
the  Honourable  Hudson's  Bay  Company,  or  Company 
of  Adventurers  Trading  into  the  Hudson  Bay.  It  is 
the  same  great  company  that  we  have  to-day. 

The  Royal  Charter  was  granted  to  the  Company  in 
May,  1670.  By  this  charter  the  members  of  the  Com- 
pany were  given  the  sole  right  to  the  fur  trade,  and 
dominion  over  all  the  northern  land.     Their  territory 


THE  HUDSON'S  BAY  COMPANY         35 

was  called  Rupert's  Land,  after  Prince  Rupert,  who 
was  their  first  governor.  At  this  time  even  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Company  had  no  idea  of  the  extent  of  the 
land  they  had  been  given,  and  it  was  years  before  they 
knew  the  real  value  of  their  charter. 

Other  trading-posts  besides  Fort  Charles  were  built 
on  the  shores  of  Hudson  Bay.  These  forts  were  all 
little  log  buildings  with  high  protecting  walls  about 
them.  The  men  who  were  sent  out  to  take  charge  of 
them  had  lonely  times,  with  nothing  to  break  the  dull- 
ness of  the  long  years  but  the  Indians  bringing  in  the 
furs  and  the  English  ships  that  came  and  went  every 
summer  when  the  bay  was  clear  of  ice.  The  ships 
brought  the  blue  beads,  looking-glasses,  bright  handker- 
chiefs, knives,  needles,  guns,  powder  and  shot  used  to 
trade  with  the  Indians,  and  carried  back  loads  of  the 
pretty  furs.  Better  still  for  the  lonely  fur-trader,  they 
brought  him  letters  from  home,  and  carried  away  his 
messages  to  friends  across  the  ocean. 

The  traders  could  not  talk  about  pounds  or  dollars 
to  the  Indians,  who  knew  nothing  of  the  white  man's 
money,  so  beaverskins  were  taken  instead.  The  Indians 
always  understood  when  told  how  many  beaverskins 
an  article  was  worth,  or  how  many  beaverskins'  worth 
of  goods  their  piles  of  furs  would  bring. 

As  more  and  more  of  the  Indians  heard  of  the  forts, 
they  came  there  to  trade  their  furs.  The  animals  soon 
learned  the  meaning  of  the  guns  and  steel  traps  which 
the  Indians  were  getting  from  the  forts.  The  wild 
creatures  living  close  to  Hudson  Bay  were  kept  busy 
teaching  their  babies  how  careful  they  must  be  to 
escape  the  horrible  new  dangers  that  had  come  to  them. 


36   WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  EOAMED 

But  as  the  country  was  so  great,  there  were  still  hun- 
dreds and  thousands  of  animals  that  had  never  yet 
heard  a  gun  or  been  hunted  for  any  other  purpose  than 
to  feed  or  clothe  the  Indian. 

Radisson  and  Groseilliers  did  not  stay  long  with  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company,  but  went  to  the  north-land 
again  under  the  French  flag.  Their  own  countrymen 
had  learned  their  mistake  in  turning  them  away,  and 
had  at  last  made  them  a  fair  oifer.  Afterwards  the 
explorers  left  France  and  again  served  the  Hudson's 
Bay  Company.  Radisson  could  not  be  happy  unless 
he  was  exploring,  and  in  order  to  have  a  chance  to  go 
again  and  again  to  the  "  Great  Lone  Land,"  he  served 
first  one  country  and  then  another.  For  this  reason, 
before  his  work  was  over,  both  France  and  England 
called  him  disloyal,  and  accused  him  of  being  a  deserter. 
But  nothing  can  take  from  Radisson  and  Groseilliers 
the  fame  of  the  discovery  of  the  Canadian  ISTorth-West 


CHAPTEK  VI. 

Pierre  de  la  Verendrye. 

While  the  English  were  building  their  forts  on  the 
shores  of  Hudson  Bay,  the  French  from  Canada  were 
trading  with  the  Indians  between  Lake  Superior  and 
the  Ottawa  River.  They  were  also  pushing  their  way 
on  to  the  land  Radisson  and  Groseilliers  had  discovered, 
and  were  thinking  and  talking  of  the  ISTorth-west  Pas- 
sage to  the  Western  Sea. 

Far  away  on  Lake  Nepigon,  in  charge  of  the  lonely 
fort,  was  a  man  named  Pierre  Verendrye,  who  came 
from  Three  Rivers  and,  like  Radisson,  wished  to  explore 
the  unknown  land.  When  the  Indians  came  in  with 
furs  they  related  great  stories  of  the  country  they  had 
travelled  through.  These  tales  kept  his  mind  busy 
until  they  came  again.  Verendrye  did  not  believe  all 
they  told  him,  for  in  a  letter  to  a  friend  he  said,  "  These 
people  are  great  liars,  but  now  and  then  they  do  tell 
the  truth." 

He  thought  there  might  be  some  truth  in  a  story  one 
old  chief  told  him  about  a  great  lake  out  of  which  a 
river  flowed  to  the  west.  The  chief  said  he  himself 
went  down  this  river  in  his  canoe  until  he  came  to  a 
place  where  the  water  ebbed  and  flowed.  Thinking  this 
was  caused  by  some  evil  spirit,  he  turned  back  in  fear. 
On  his  way  home  he  met  with  Indians  who  told  him 
of  a  great  stretch  of  salt  water  beyond  the  river.     The 

37 


38       WHERE   THE   BUFFALO   ROAMED 

chief  drew  for  Verendrye  a  map  of  it  all  on  birch-bark. 
Other  Indians  who  heard  the  chief's  story  said  they 
knew  it  was  true. 

Verendrye  studied  the  map  and  questioned  all  the 
Indians  he  knew.  They  could  tell  him  little  more, 
except  that  to  reach  this  strange  place  one  must  go 
through  a  flat,  almost  treeless  country,  where  there 
were  great  herds  of  big  wild  animals  like  cattle.  This 
was  the  buffalo's  prairie  playground  of  which  Veren- 
drye was  hearing. 

Three  times  he  dreamed  he  had  found  the  North- 
west Passage  and  the  Western  Sea.  ~Ro  wonder  he 
could  not  stay  at  the  quiet  little  fort.  He  made  up  his 
mind  he  would  go  through  the  flat  country  and  search 
for  the  Western  Sea.  Taking  the  old  chief's  map,  he 
hurried  down  to  Quebec,  hoping  the  Governor  could 
induce  the  French  King  to  give  him  the  needed  supplies. 
The  King  would  give  nothing,  but  fortunately  the 
Governor  did  the  best  he  could  for  Verendrye  by  allow- 
ing him  to  have  all  the  fur  trade  in  the  country  he  was 
going  to  explore. 

Verendrye  soon  found  merchants  who  were  willing 
to  advance  all  the  supplies  he  needed,  and  who  prom- 
ised to  await  their  pay  until  he  sent  back  the  furs. 
Then  he  prepared  for  the  journey.  On  the  8th  of  June, 
1731,  he  started  away.  Besides  his  Canadian  voyageurs 
to  manage  the  canoes,  and  his  Indian  interpreters  to 
talk  to  the  strange  red  men  they  were  going  to  visit,  he 
took  with  him  his  nephew,  De  la  Jemmeraie,  and  his 
three  sons,  young  men  of  sixteen,  seventeen  and  eighteen 
years  of  age. 

When  out  of  hearing  of  the  farewell  chimes  of  the 


PIERRE   DE   LA   VERENDRYE  39 

church-bells,  the  voyageurs  sang  their  boat-songs  to 
drive  away  the  homesick  feeling  and  the  dread  of 
unknown  dangers.  But  with  all  their  gaiety  they  were 
not  careless.  They  read  the  streaks  of  foam  as  you 
would  read  a  book,  and  learned  from  them  where  were 
the  rapids  and  the  rocks.  Many  a  time  a  single  dip  of 
the  paddle  saved  a  canoe.  When  the  rough  places  were 
passed  what  a  rest  it  must  have  been  to  them  to  hoist 
a  blanket  and  sail  before  the  wind.  Still  better  was  the 
rest  at  night  when  sleeping  on  the  shore  under  a  starry 
sky. 

On  the  well-known  fur-traders'  route  they  met  with 
but  few  difficulties,  and  reached  the  post  called  Fort 
Michilimackinac  in  good  time.  But  on  Lake  Superior 
they  were  delayed  by  stormy  weather,  and  it  was  late 
in  August  before  they  reached  Kaministiquia,  the  most 
distant  post.  Thoughts  of  a  lonely  winter  in  a  lonely 
land  made  the  men  homesick,  and  they  urged  Verendrye 
to  turn  back.  However,  half  of  them  were  persuaded 
to  go  on  with  his  nephew  and  his  son  Jean,  while  the 
others  remained  at  Lake  Superior  with  Verendrye. 
Jean  and  his  cousin  went  on  to  Rainy  Lake  and  built  a 
fort  there,  which  they  named  Fort  St.  Pierre. 

On  the  8th  of  June,  1732,  just  one  year  from  the 
day  he  had  left  home,  Verendrye  made  his  way  from  the 
old  fort  to  the  new  fort  which  his  son  had  built  and 
named  for  him.  The  bright  uniforms  of  some  of  his 
men  won  the  admiration  of  the  Indians  gathered  about 
the  gateway.  Verendrye  gave  ammunition  to  the  chiefs, 
who  in  return  presented  him  with  fifty  of  their  bright- 
est-colored canoes,  and  offered  to  guide  him  on  to 
the  Lake  of  the  Woods.     Though  Verendrye  had  just 


40       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

arrived  and  his  men  were  tired,  he  could  not  miss  such 
a  chance,  so  he  and  his  men  set  out  at  once.  When  at 
last  they  reached  the  Lake  of  the  Woods,  they  stopped 
to  build  a  fort,  which  they  named  Fort  St.  Charles. 
Here  they  waited  for  Jean  and  his  cousin,  who  had 
gone  to  Michilimackinac  for  supplies. 

Days  and  weeks  went  by.  October  came,  and  the 
Indians  went  off  to  their  hunting-grounds.  November 
came.  The  lake  was  covered  with  ice,  and  the  snow 
was  deep  in  the  forest.  They  were  out  of  provisions. 
The  fish  which  they  caught  through  holes  in  the  ice 
were  their  only  food.  They  feared  some  accident  must 
have  happened  their  friends,  on  whose  return  every- 
thing depended.  One  day  when  all  were  feeling  gloomy, 
discouraged,  and  hungry,  they  were  aroused  by  the 
shouts  of  their  long-looked-for  friends,  coming  on 
snowshoes,  and  carrying  goods  in  packs  on  their  backs. 

After  a  short  rest  Jean  went  on  to  build  a  fort  on 
Lake  Winnipeg,  which  the  explorers  had  heard  of  from 
the  Indians,  and  which  Verendrye  thought  might  be 
near  the  Western  Sea.  To  his  cousin  was  given  a 
journey  in  the  opposite  direction.  He  must  go  down 
to  Montreal  and  see  the  merchants  about  sending  more 
goods.  On  his  return  he  reported  that  the  merchants 
were  annoyed  because  more  furs  had  not  come  to  them, 
and  declared  that,  instead  of  sending  furs  to  those  he 
owed,  Verendrye  was  keeping  them  and  secretly  enrich- 
ing himself.  They  refused  to  send  him  more  goods 
until  they  received  more  furs. 

Poor  Verendrye  knew  that  the  Indians  would  not 
bring  him  furs  or  guide  him  to  the  Western  Sea  unless 
he  had  beads,  hatchets,  or  guns  to  give  them;  so  he 


LAKE    OF   THE   WOODS. 


INDIAN   TRAPPERS. 


PIEEKE  DE  LA  VERENDRYE  41 

decided  to  go  himself  to  Quebec  and  explain  matters. 
Upon  reaching  there  he  found  that  the  traders  near 
home  were  jealous,  and  had  been  trying  to  injure  him 
by  telling  falsehoods  about  him.  By  the  time  he  was 
able  to  convince  the  merchants  that  he  was  doing  his 
best,  and  had  persuaded  them  to  send  more  goods,  it 
was  too  late  to  return  that  season. 

He  set  out  as  early  as  possible  the  next  year  (1735). 
Regretting  that  during  four  years  he  had  accomplished 
so  little,  he  hurried  on  ahead  of  the  supplies.  Travel- 
ling so  rapidly,  with  very  little  rest,  must  have  been 
wearying  to  Father  Aulneau,  the  chaplain  of  the  expe- 
dition, who  was  taking  his  first  journey  into  that  coun- 
try. But  they  all  had  a  good  rest  at  Fort  Charles,  on 
the  Lake  of  the  Woods,  where  they  waited  for  the 
arrival  of  the  supplies. 

Meanwhile  two  of  Verendrye's  sons  and  their  cousin 
started  from  Fort  Maurepas,  on  Lake  Winnipeg,  to 
come  down  to  him.  On  the  way  occurred  one  of  the 
saddest  incidents  that  can  happen  on  those  lonely  jour- 
neys. There  in  the  wilds,  hundreds  of  miles  from  home, 
the  cousin  died.  Jean  and  his  brother  wrapped  the 
body  in  a  hunter's  robe  and  made  a  grave  beside  a 
lonely  stream,  marking  the  spot  with  a  wooden  cross. 
Thus  did  one  white  man  lose  his  life  in  exploring  the 
home  of  the  animals  and  the  Indians. 

"  One  midst  the  forest  of  the  West 
By  a  dark  stream  is  laid; 
The  Indian  knows  his  place  of  rest 
F"ar  in  the  cedar  shade." 

This  sad  death  was  a  great  shock  to  Verendrye,  but 


42       WHERE   THE  BUFFALO   ROAMED 

lie  would  not  give  np,  though  he  knew  the  same  fate 
might  befall  them  all.  Other  troubles  followed  thick 
and  fast.  The  goods  had  not  arrived,  and  the  Indians 
would  soon  be  coming  in  with  furs  and  meat  to  trade. 
After  thinking  it  all  over,  Jean  Verendrye  and  Father 
Aulneau  said  they  would  go  with  some  of  the  men  to 
Fort  Michilimackinac  to  hurry  on  the  supplies  that 
certainly  must  have  reached  there  by  this  time.  They 
set  out  on  the  8th  of  June,  but  this  was  the  year  1736, 
five  years  since  they  first  left  home. 

The  little  party  stopped  on  a  pretty  island  for  the 
night,  and  all  went  soundly  to  sleep,  little  dreaming  that- 
sly  red  men  were  creeping  about  their  resting-place. 
These  were  the  Sioux,  sometimes  called  "  tigers  of  the 
plain,"  the  most  cruel  and  warlike  of  all  the  North- 
West  Indians.  Just  why  they  were  spying  about  that 
night  is  a  little  story  in  itself.  It  seems  that  once 
when  some  Cree  Indians  had  new  guns  and  wanted  to 
have  a  little  fun  with  them,  they  fired  at  some  Sioux 
Indians. 

"  Who  fire  ?"  asked  the  Sioux. 

Thinking  it  would  be  a  good  joke  to  try  to  pass  for 
the  French,  now  that  they  had  French  guns,  the  Crees 
laughed  and  shouted  back: 

"The  French." 

The  trouble  was,  they  did  pass  for  the  French.  The 
Sioux  were  angry,  and  said  they  would  kill  the  first 
white  man  they  found.  So  they  watched  this  little  band 
while  they  slept,  and  the  next  morning  followed  them 
on  among  the  islands  until  they  knew  by  the  smoke  of 
their  camp-fire  that  they  had  stopped  for  breakfast. 
Then,  without  the  slightest  warning,  the  savages  sprang 


PIERRE   DE   LA   VERENDRYE  43 

upon  the  unsuspecting  Frenchmen,  and  not  one  was  left 
alive. 

Just  nine  days  after  that  ill-fated  little  company  set 
out,  the  supplies  they  were  going  for  arrived.  Three 
days  later,  friendly  Indians,  who  had  found  the  bodies 
of  the  Frenchmen,  came  to  tell  Verendrye  what  had 
happened.  Father  Aulneau  was  kneeling,  they  said, 
as  if  at  morning  prayer,  when  struck  dead. 

This  Lake  of  the  Woods  tragedy  was  a  terrible  blow 
to  poor  Verendrye,  and  it  was  with  a  sad  heart  that  in 
February,  the  coldest  month  of  the  cold  northern  win- 
ter, he  set  out  for  the  little  Fort  Maurepas,  the  last 
fort  that  poor  Jean  had  built.  Across  the  cold,  white, 
lonely  land  he  tried  to  march  with  some  pomp  and 
order.  The  French  flag  was  carried  ahead,  a  few 
Frenchmen  followed  in  bright  soldiers'  uniforms,  and 
behind  were  some  hundreds  of  Crees  in  their  best  fur 
clothes.  For  seventeen  days  they  travelled  in  this  way, 
and  at  night  they  slept  on  pine  boughs  round  a  camp- 
fire. 

The  bunnies  and  foxes  that  ventured  out  those  cold 
days  did  not  know  what  to  make  of  it  all.  The  fur- 
robed  Indians  they  understood,  and  would  be  careful 
not  to  come  too  near  to  them;  but  the  bright  uniforms 
of  the  soldiers  and  that  flag  were  entirely  new.  What 
had  come  to  their  land?  They  would  scurry  off,  then 
pop  up  their  heads  to  look  at  them  again,  and  hurry 
away  only  to  stop  and  look  back  once  more.  They 
could  not  unravel  the  mystery. 

At  last  Verendrye  came  to  Fort  Maurepas.  Like  all 
the  other  forts,  it  was  a  small,  low  building  of  rough 
logs,  the  cracks  filled  with  mud,  and  the  roof  made  of 


44       WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

branches  covered  with  moss  and  clay.  With  a  warm 
fire  in  the  centre,  and  soft  furs  for  blankets  and  rugs, 
it  was  a  welcome  refuge  for  the  tired  men.  As  Veren- 
drye  rested  there  he  must  often  have  thought  of  his 
unfortunate  son. 

The  Indians  soon  came  to  visit  him,  and  learning 
that  he  was  on  a  journey  through  their  land,  were  all 
anxious  to  draw  maps  on  birchbark  and  tell  him  about 
their  travels.  The  one  at  whose  map  he  looked  the 
longest  was  a  great  hero  among  them.  Some  told  him 
of  the  motion  of  the  water  in  a  lake  farther  on.  It  was 
really  caused  by  the  wind,  but  Verendrye,  with  the 
Western  Sea  on  his  mind,  thought  it  might  be  the  ebb 
and  flow  of  the  tide,  and  wanted  to  hurry  on  and  see 
for  himself. 

Alas,  for  his  hopes!  The  merchants  in  Montreal 
would  not  send  him  the  goods  he  needed,  and  he  had 
nothing  to  trade  with  the  Indians.  As  soon  as  the  ice 
was  away  in  the  spring  he  had  to  take  the  furs  to 
Montreal  himself.  Then  the  merchants  were  so  pleased 
with  the  fourteen  canoe-loads  he  brought  them  that  they 
gave  him  the  supplies  he  wanted  at  once  and  started 
him  off  for  more.  By  September  he  was  back  at  Fort 
Maurepas  preparing  to  set  out  for  the  junction  of  the 
Red  and  Assiniboine  rivers,  of  which  the  Indians  had 
told  him. 

Instead  of  the  city  of  Winnipeg  and  the  stretches  of 
golden  grain  beyond,  which  one  sees  there  now,  Veren- 
drye beheld  the  soft  brown  shades  of  the  prairie  grass, 
the  herds  of  buffalo  strolling  about  their  playground, 
and  the  quaint  wigwams  of  the  picturesque  red  men. 


PIERRE   DE   LA   VERENDRYE  45 

Indeed  the  Indians  and  the  animals  had  quite  as 
beautiful  a  country  then  as  the  white  men  have  now. 

The  Crees  living  there  called  Verendrye  "  Father," 
and  told  him  how  glad  they  were  to  have  him  come  to 
them.  They  also  gave  him  food,  and  talked  about  his 
son  Jean,  whom  they  had  known.  One  chief  in  his 
speech  said,  "  Our  hearts  are  sick  for  thy  son  who  came 
the  first  to  build  a  fort  on  our  lands.  We  loved  him 
much;  have  once  already  been  at  war  to  avenge  him. 
I  have  destroyed  only  ten  huts  of  Sioux,  which  is  not 
enough  to  satisfy  us;  but  now  our  father  has  ordered 
us  to  keep  quiet,  and  we  will  do  so."  This  last  he  said 
because  Verendrye,  knowing  the  wisdom  of  keeping 
peace  among  the  red  men,  had  told  him  he  should  not 
fight  the  Sioux,  even  though  they  had  killed  Jean.  At 
the  very  spot  which  is  now  a  part  of  Winnipeg,  the 
explorer  built  another  little  fort,  which  he  named  Fort 
Rouge  {rouge  being  the  French  word  for  red).  The 
Indians  called  the  river  the  Red  River  because  of  the 
reddish  color  of  the  water  and  the  red  clay  banks. 
This  part  of  Winnipeg  is  still  called  Fort  Rouge  in 
memory  of  Verendrye's  fort. 

The  Indians  still  told  stories  of  a  sea  far  to  the  west, 
and  Verendrye  determined  to  go  in  search  of  the  sea, 
even  though  the  cold  winter  would  soon  be  upon  him. 
The  Indians  begged  him  to  stay  with  them  until  spring. 
They  said  the  Assiniboine  was  low  now,  and  so  full  of 
sand  bars  that  he  would  be  sure  to  break  his  canoes. 
They  also  told  him  that  he  would  go  among  Indians  who 
did  not  know  how  to  kill  a  beaver,  and  who  were  so 
stupid  that  they  would  not  know  the  French  when  they 
saw  them.     None  of  these  things  made  the  slightest 

4 

*2- 


46   WHEEE  THE  BUFFALO  KOAMED 

difference  to  Verendrye.     The  end  of  his  rainbow  was 
westward,  and  westward  he  would  go. 

Up  the  river  he  found  game  in  great  abundance,  and 
wood  in  plenty  for  their  camp-fires.  After  travelling 
for  six  clays  they  came  to  the  portage  leading  to  what 
Verendrye  called  Lake  of  the  Prairies.  As  it  was  impos- 
sible to  travel  farther  by  canoes,  he  stopped  here  and 
built  Fort  de  la  Peine,  on  the  site  of  the  present  town 
of  Portage  la  Prairie. 

One  day  he  met  with  some  Assiniboines  who  were 
busy  building  an  oven.  He  talked  with  them  and  gave 
them  tobacco,  axes,  knives  and  awls.  They  received 
him  with  great  pleasure,  shed  tears  of  joy,  and  prom- 
ised to  do  wonderful  things  for  him.  They  could  tell 
him  nothing  of  the  Western  Sea,  but  said  the  Mandan 
Indians,  living  farther  south,  knew  of  it.  So  what  did 
Verendrye  do  but  set  out  with  his  two  sons  and  his 
men  to  visit  the  Mandans. 

Though  in  a  hurry,  he  could  not  travel  as  fast  he 
wished,  because  the  guides  chose  to  go  a  roundabout 
way,  visiting  their  friends  and  making  long  stops  for 
which  the  white  men  could  not  see  the  reason.  Almost 
at  the  very  beginning  of  the  journey,  Verendrye  was 
invited  to  visit  a  village  of  forty  huts,  and,  as  it  would 
never  do  to  offend  the  Indians,  he  was  obliged  to  go  and 
attend  their  feast  and  listen  to  their  long  speeches 
before  he  could  travel  on.  So  many  pleasant  autumn 
days  were  wasted  that  it  was  nearly  December  before 
he  came  to  the  Mandan  villages. 

The  Mandans  were  very  happy  to  receive  him,  and 
insisted  upon  carrying  him  into  their  village.  In  writ 
ing  of  this  Verendrye  said,  "  The  Mandans  would  not 


i.ir*m 


PIERRE  DE  LA  VERENDRYE  47 

let  me  walk,  but  offered  to  carry  me,  to  which  I  had  to 
consent,  being  requested  by  the  Assiniboines,  who  told 
me  I  would  displease  them  greatly  if  I  refused." 
Having  plenty  to  eat,  they  made  a  grand  feast,  after 
which  he  smoked  the  peace-pipe  with  them.  But  of  the 
Western  Sea,  of  which  Verendrye  most  wished  to  hear, 
they  could  tell  him  nothing,  except  that  they  knew  of 
other  tribes  far  west  that  lived  beside  a  great  water 
which  was  bitter  to  the  taste. 

The  sea  was  still  beyond  his  reach,  and  in  the  cold 
month  of  December  he  marched  back  to  Fort  de  la 
Reine,  travelling  through  the  day  over  cold,  bleak 
prairies,  and  sleeping  at  night  on  the  snow.  During 
this  long  return  journey  he  was  ill,  and  suffered  greatly 
from  cold  and  fatigue. 

Discouragements  came  to  him  from  all  sides.  Down 
in  Montreal  and  Quebec  his  enemies  said  he  owed  them 
for  goods,  and  that  certainly  he  must  be  getting  many 
furs  and  making  himself  rich  instead  of  paying  his 
debts.  Finally  those  who  had  sent  him  a  few  cheap 
things  to  trade  said  they  would  seize  everything  he  had, 
even  the  forts  he  had  risked  his  life  to  build.  Poor 
Verendrye  had  to  go  all  the  way  back  to  Montreal  to 
defend  himself  against  his  envious  countrymen. 

While  he  was  in  Montreal  his  sons  travelled  up  the 
Saskatchewan  River.  Finding  this  was  not  going  to 
take  them  to  the  sea,  they  took  the  long  trip  back  to  the 
Mandans,  hoping  to  find  guides  to  conduct  them  to  that 
body  of  water  which  was  "  bitter  to  drink,"  and  which 
they  still  thought  might  be  the  coveted  Western  Sea, 
They  had  some  good  meals  there  with  the  Mandans, 
and  smoked  many  peace-pipes,  but  the  Indians  were 


48       WHEKE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

afraid  of  meeting  their  enemies  and  would  not  go  with 
them.  However,  after  a  series  of  peace-pipes  and  more 
meals,  they  consented  to  guide  them  part  of  the  way. 

After  a  weary  journey  of  many  days  they  came  to 
the  Rocky  Mountains,  within  what  is  now  the  United 
States.  Young  Pierre  Verendrye  meant  to  climb  over 
the  mountains  and  find  the  sea,  little  dreaming  that 
hundreds  of  miles  lay  between  him  and  the  water  that 
was  "bitter  to  the  taste."  But  his  guides  would  go  no 
farther,  so  he  was  obliged  to  turn  back. 

Meanwhile,  in  spite  of  all  Verendrye  could  do  in 
Montreal,  the  people  would  not  believe  him,  and  still 
persisted  that  he  was  a  dishonest  man.  Another  man 
was  sent  to  fill  his  place.  They  might  have  saved  them- 
selves the  trouble,  for  the  new  man  could  not  get  along 
with  the  Indians.  They  would  not  call  him  "  Father," 
as  they  had  called  Verendrye,  but  disliked  him  and 
tried  to  drive  him  away. 

The  Governor  had  never  really  believed  the  stories 
told  about  Verendrye,  and  seeing  no  one  else  could 
fill  the  position  so  well,  gave  him  permission  to  return. 
But  that  was  not  to  be.  Weary  journeys,  disappoint- 
ments and  discouragements  had  worn  out  the  great 
explorer.  Early  in  December,  1749,  he  died  suddenly 
at  Montreal  while  preparing  to  go  again  in  search  of 
the  Western  Sea.  His  enemies  refused  to  give  his  sons 
the  opportunity  of  carrying  on  their  father's  explora- 
tions, so  his  great  work  was  left  until  others  should  take 
it  up.  Pierre  Verendrye  never  found  the  end  of  his 
rainbow,  but  he  was  the  first  white  man  to  travel  over 
much  of  the  wide  IsTorth-West. 


CHAPTER  VII. 
Samuel   Hearne. 

Fab  away  on  the  shores  of  Hudson  Bay  the  Great 
Company  had  been  trading  with  the  red  men  since 
Radisson's  day,  but  of  their  Rupert's  Land  they  knew 
little  more  than  when  they  first  received  their  charter. 
As  the  Indians  had  always  come  to  the  forts,  the  Com- 
pany had  not  considered  it  necessary  to  send  their  men 
out  to  smoke  the  peace-pipe  in  the  tepee  homes,  or  to 
build  trading-posts  on  the  distant  hunting-grounds,  but 
let  them  sleep  at  the  lonely  Hudson  Bay  forts  until  the 
furs  came  in. 

Such  an  easy  way  of  keeping  the  right  to  the  fur 
trade  could  not  last.  Now  that  the  great  explorer  had 
led  the  way,  French  traders  were  going  from  Lake 
Superior  inland,  and  Indians  who  had  taken  furs  north 
to  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  were  taking  them  south 
to  the  French. 

When  this  condition  of  affairs  was  made  known  in 
England,  many  complained  that  the  Company  had  not 
even  tried  to  travel  through  their  territory,  nor  had 
they  made  the  slightest  attempt  to  find  the  !N"orth-west 
Passage,  which  the  French  had  never  ceased  to  search 
for,  and  would  certainly  find  first  unless  something  were 
done.  Besides,  they  said  the  Company  had  promised 
to  try  to  make  the  Indians  Christians,  but  so  far  had 

49 


50       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

only  sent  them  a  few  prayer-books.  The  poor  red  men, 
seeing  no  use  in  books  of  prayers  which  they  could  not 
read,  and  which  were  addressed  to  the  white  man's  God, 
of  whom  they  knew  nothing,  were  trading  them  off  for 
sharp  knives  with  which  to  scalp  their  enemies. 

At  last,  upon  hearing  that  there  was  some  danger  of 
their  charter  being  taken  away  from  them  if  they  did 
not  accomplish  more,  the  Company  awoke  to  action. 
No  longer  did  they  let  their  men  sleep  on  the  shores 
of  the  Hudson  Bay,  waiting  for  the  Indians  to  come  to 
them.  ISTew  orders  were  sent  across  the  ocean  to  Prince 
of  Wales  Fort,  orders  which  made  quite  a  commotion 
there  on  the  summer  day  of  1769  when  the  boat  arrived 
with  mail  from  England.  The  Governor  of  the  Fort 
was  to  send  his  bravest  man  out  to  smoke  the  peace-pipe 
with  the  Indians,  to  search  for  the  North-west  Passage, 
to  explore  a  distant  river,  called  "  Far-off-metal  River," 
and  to  discover  the  copper  mine  which  the  Indians  said 
was  to  be  found  on  the  banks  of  that  river. 

All  now  was  excitement  at  the  little  fort.  The  men 
were  studying  the  Indians'  birchbark  maps,  and  asking 
of  any  Indians  who  happened  in  question  after  ques- 
tion about  that  "  Far-off-metal  River."  One  man 
studied  the  maps  more  intently  than  the  others.  His 
name  was  Samuel  Hearne.  It  was  he  who  had  been 
chosen  to  go. 

Hearne  well  knew  the  risks  he  ran  in  taking  such  a 
journey.  He  might  starve  in  that  unknown  land,  or 
be  frozen  to  death  when  he  reached  the  cold  Arctic 
regions.  Wolves  might  attack  him  when  he  was  cold 
and  hungry  and  could  not  fight  them,  or  he  might  be 
hugged  too  tight  by  the  great  white  Polar  bear.     On 


SAMUEL  HEAKNE  51 

the  other  hand,  he  might  make  the  whole  journey  in 
safety,  find  the  Ear-off-metal  Kiver  and  the  North- 
west Passage,  make  the  great  Company  that  he  served 
worthy  of  the  name  of  the  Honourable  Hudson's  Bay 
Company,  and  find  himself  hailed  as  a  hero. 

Scarcely  had  day  dawned  on  the  cold,  frosty  6th  of 
November  when  the  fort  gates  opened  and  Hearne  with 
his  two  Indian  guides  and  his  hunters  marched  out, 
while  the  great  cannon  thundered  a  noisy  good-bye. 
Away  they  went,  facing  the  cold  north  wind,  the  Husky 
or  Eskimo  dogs  drawing  the  heavy  load  on  the  long 
toboggan  sleigh,  while  the  bells  jingled  merrily. 

Where  there  was  not  snow  enough  to  pile  up  about 
them  to  keep  the  wind  off  at  night,  they  would  roll  up 
in  their  blankets  and  sleep  in  the  shelter  of  their 
sleigh,  which  they  turned  on  edge.  When  they  came 
to  that  great  stretch  of  country  called  the  "  Barren 
Lands  "  there  was  nothing  to  stop  the  sweep  of  the  cold 
wind  over  the  frozen  plain.  Hearne  and  his  men  could 
get  but  little  game,  and  scarcely  wood  enough  to  cook 
their  meals.  This  tract  of  land  was  given  its  name 
because  food  is  so  scarce  there  that  even  the  wild  animals 
avoid  it.  The  Indians  call  it  "  Little  Sticks,"  because 
only  small  dwarf  trees  grow  there. 

Hearne's  position  was  made  more  unpleasant  by  the 
conduct  of  the  Indians,  who  were  beginning  to  show 
that  they  did  not  wish  to  go  on.  Instead  of  hunting 
they  were  frightening  what  game  there  was  away,  so 
that  he  would  be  starved  out  of  that  cold  land  and  have 
to  turn  back.  They  did  worse  than  that.  One  morn- 
ing he  awoke  just  in  time  to  see  them  going  off  with  his 
guns,   powder  and  shot,   and  hatchets.     He  called  to 


52       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

them.  They  made  the  woods  ring  with  their  laughter, 
but  would  not  come  back. 

Without  such  things  one  cannot  travel  in  a  wilder- 
ness. Hearne,  therefore,  was  obliged  to  go  back  to  the 
Fort,  snaring  ptarmigan  as  he  went  to  keep  from  starv- 
ing. He  arrived  there  on  the  11th  of  December.  Now, 
what  was  to  be  done  ?  If  he  was  to  reach  the  Arctic 
regions  in  the  summer — in  which  season  only  he  could 
see  something  besides  snow  and  ice — he  must  leave  the 
Fort  in  the  winter  and  run  the  risk  of  being  frozen  or 
starved  on  the  way.    He  was  not  afraid  to  take  the  risk. 

Late  in  February  of  1770  he  set  out  again  with  five 
men.  This  time  the  cannon  were  covered  with  snow; 
so  was  the  wall,  which  they  walked  over  on  their  snow- 
shoes.  All  the  shrubs  were  under  the  snow;  only  here 
and  there  a  branch  was  stretching  out  through  the 
drifts.  It  was  no  easy  matter  at  night  after  their  day's 
tramp  to  dig  down,  down,  down  to  the  moss  which  made 
both  their  fire  and  their  bed. 

When  the  snow  became  soft  and  heavy,  travelling 
was  very  hard,  and,  as  they  were  in  the  Barren  Lands, 
they  were  often  hungry.  For  days  they  had  nothing 
to  eat  but  cranberries.  When  at  last  they  got  a  thin 
musk-ox,  a  rain  came  on  and  put  out  their  fire,  so  that 
they  could  not  cook  it.  The  Indians  ate  it  raw,  but 
Hearne  did  not  relish  it  that  way. 

There  were  other  troubles  besides  hunger.  The 
guides  wanted  to  go  back,  declaring  it  was  too  late  to 
reach  the  copper  mine  that  summer ;  and  all  the  Indians 
he  happened  to  meet  with  worried  him  for  something. 
They  would  ask  for  guns,  powder,  shot,  tobacco  and 
medicine.      They  seemed  to  think  he  was  a  walking 


SAMUEL  HEARKE  53 

trading-post.  When  they  found  he  had  nothing  for 
them  they  called  him  a  "  poor  servant/'  not  like  the 
Governor  at  the  Factory,  who  always  gave  them  some- 
thing; others  offered  him  furs,  as  if  he  would  think  of 
increasing  his  load  by  carrying  extra  skins  to  the 
copper  mines ! 

Sometimes  they  would  meet  with  a  poor  starving 
Indian  wandering  on  those  barren  plains.  Hearne's 
Indians  always  made  the  unfortunate  stranger  wel- 
come, sharing  their  food  with  him,  no  matter  how  little 
it  was. 

They  had  plenty  of  food  when  they  began  to  meet 
the  caribou  on  their  spring  march  from  the  woods 
across  the  Barren  Lands.  Many  Indian  hunters  then 
joined  the  travellers,  and  together  they  secured  a  good 
supply  of  meat.  As  the  snow  was  now  gone  they  could 
get  plenty  of  moss  for  the  fires  to  cook  it. 

Though  Hearne  had  now  no  anxiety  as  to  where  his 
meals  would  come  from,  he  was  not  without  other 
troubles.  About  this  time  a  serious  accident  happened. 
One  day,  when  called  to  his  dinner,  he  left  his  quad- 
rant standing  that  he  might  learn  more  correctly  what 
latitude  he  was  in.  A  sudden  gust  of  wind  blew  it 
over  and  it  was  broken  by  the  fall.  It  was  useless  to 
go  on  with  no  instrument  to  take  observations  and  to 
tell  him  where  he  was,  so  again  he  turned  back.  He 
had  a  hard  journey  home,  for  he  was  already  so  far 
north  that  the  winter  snows  had  begun.  In  one  of  the 
worst  snowstorms  he  almost  ran  into  Mattonabbae,  an 
Indian  chief,  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company's  messenger 
to  distant  tribes,  who  was  now  on  his  way  to  Prince  of 
Wales   Fort.      That   night  when   they   had   piled   the 


54       WHEEE  THE  BUFFALO  KOAMED 

dog-sleighs  up  to  keep  the  wind  off,  and  were  able  to 
talk,  he  told  Hearne  that  he  had  failed  because  he  had 
taken  no  women  along.  He  said  squaws  were  always 
needed  on  a  long  journey,  to  bring  in  the  game  that 
had  been  shot,  and  to  attend  to  the  camping  and  cook- 
ing, and  that  Hearne,  being  a  white  man,  did  not  under- 
stand how  much  the  Indian  women  could  do.  He  him- 
self was  travelling  with  many  squaws  to  drive  the  dog- 
sleighs  and  do  the  work. 

When  Hearne  gave  the  chief  some  good  tobacco  he 
talked  on,  and  finally  told  the  white  man  he  would  guide 
him  to  the  Far-off-metal  River.  Hearne  was  delighted 
that  there  was,  at  last,  some  chance  of  success.  With- 
out waiting  for  Mattonabbae,  he  hurried  on  ahead  to 
the  Fort  that  he  might  make  ready  for  another  start. 
With  all  his  haste  he  did  not  reach  there  until  late  in 
November.  In  less  than  two  weeks  after  his  arrival 
at  Prince  of  Wales  Fort  he  made  a  third  start.  This 
time  Mattonabbae  led  the  way,  and  there  were  squaws 
among  the  Indians  that  went  with  him. 

One  little  incident  that  happened  before  they  had 
gone  far  taught  Hearne  something  of  the  Indian  cus- 
toms. When  Mattonabbae  was  out  before,  he  had 
cached — that  is,  left  in  a  safe  place — some  food,  which 
he  now  wanted  for  the  journey,  but  upon  reaching  the 
place  where  he  had  left  it  he  found  it  gone.  To 
Hearne's  surprise  the  chief  was  not  at  all  annoyed, 
but  said  that  some  starving  hunter  must  have  taken  it 
— which  to  him  was  quite  right,  for  Indians  look  upon 
food  as  common  property. 

On  they  went  day  after  day,  even  though  the  time 
came  when  they  had  nothing  to  eat,   and  only  snow 


SAMUEL  HEARNE  55 

water  to  drink.  All  Christmas  day,  and  for  three  days 
before,  they  were  without  food.  But  the  Indians  never 
once  complained.  On  and  on  they  went,  travelling  over 
the  Barren  Lands  and  facing  the  midwinter  winds. 

Just  while  Hearne  was  wondering  whether  he  could 
stand  the  cold  and  hunger  much  longer,  the  Indians 
saw  something  that  cheered  them.  Caught  here  and 
there  in  the  branches  of  the  shrubs  were  hairs  which 
told  the  red  men  that  game  was  not  far  away.  The  deer 
were  now  leaving  their  shelter  in  the  woods,  and  it  was 
not  long  before  they  were  able  to  secure  meat  enough 
for  the  journey. 

At  last  they  came  to  the  home  of  the  Copper  Indians, 
and  Hearne,  as  he  had  been  told  to  do,  smoked  the 
peace-pipe  with  them.  These  Indians  were  greatly 
interested  in  his  journey.  They  lent  him  canoes  and 
wanted  to  go  with  him.  He  was  the  first  white  man 
they  had  ever  seen,  and  they  came  flocking  round,  exam- 
ining him  from  head  to  foot;  but  they  did  not  admire 
his  white  skin  or  consider  him  as  good  looking  as  them- 
selves. "His  hair,"  they  said,  "was  like  the  stained 
hair  of  a  buffalo's  tail,  and  his  eyes,  being  light,  were 
like  those  of  a  gull."  When  he  combed  his  hair  they 
crowded  about  in  hope  of  getting  the  hairs  that  came 
off  on  the  comb,  which  they  would  wrap  up  carefully, 
saying,  "  White  man,  when  I  see  you  again  I  shall  see 
your  hair." 

Farther  on  the  Indians,  choosing  a  favorable  spot, 
left  the  women  to  make  camp  while  they  guided  Hearne 
to  the  mouth  of  the  river.  As  they  travelled,  Hearne 
noticed  that  in  many  places  the  earth  had  been  turned 
over  like  ploughed  land,  and  asked  the  Indians  whether 


56       WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

it  was  caused  by  lightning.  "  ]STo,"  they  said,  "  we 
never  have  lightning  here;  the  bears  have  done  that 
hunting  the  ground  for  squirrels."  Afterwards  he  saw 
huge  stones  which  had  been  overturned  by  bears  look- 
ing for  a  meal  of  these  little  animals. 

The  farther  north  they  travelled  the  shorter  the 
nights  became,  until,  on  the  21st  of  June,  when  the  sun 
remained  in  view  all  night,  Hearne  knew  that  he  had 
come  within  the  Arctic  Circle.  There  was  much  snow 
and  ice,  and  the  weather  was  cold,  with  a  heavy  fog. 
A  few  weeks  later  they  came  to  the  "  Far-off-metal 
River."  Though  a  little  after  midnight  when  they 
reached  there,  it  was  bright  as  mid-day,  and  Hearne 
could  see  all  about  him. 

He  soon  learned  that  this  river  did  not  lead  to  any 
north-west  passage ;  but  he  had  no  time  to  think  of  this 
disappointment,  for  his  attention  was  drawn  to  the 
Indians,  who  were  busy  painting  their  faces  red  and 
black,  and  making  queer-looking  figures  on  their  shields. 
Some  said  they  were  drawing  the  sun ;  others  said  the 
moon  or  some  bird  or  beast  of  prey.  Their  works  of 
art  looked  all  about  the  same  to  Hearne,  but  these  war- 
like preparations  were  arousing  his  suspicions.  He 
begged  them  not  to  harm  the  Eskimos,  whose  homes  on 
the  Arctic  coast  they  were  nearing.  They  would  not 
listen  to  him,  however,  but  sent  spies  on  ahead  to  see 
where  the  Eskimos'  homes  were.  Finding  they  were 
near  to  them,  they  took  off  all  their  heavy  clothing,  and 
those  who  wore  sleeves  cut  them  out.  Again  Hearne 
begged  them  not  to  make  an  attack.  They  pushed  him 
aside  as  one  might  a  small  dog.  Some  told  him  that  he 
had  better  stay  behind.     This  he  would  not  do.     Choos- 


GROUP   OF   INDIAN   CHILDREN. 


GROUP   OP   ESKIMO   CHILDREN. 
(From  a  photo  by  J.  W.  Tyrrell.) 


SAMUEL  HEARNE  57 

ing  low  ground,  where  they  would  be  hidden  by  the 
rocks,  they  went  on  noiselessly  like  stealthy  cats  when 
hunting  mice.  In  this  way  they  neared  the  round- 
topped  Eskimo  tents. 

Hearne  saw  the  alarm  birds  flying  back  and  forth 
from  Indians  to  Eskimos,  and  hoped  the  Eskimos  would 
know  by  this  that  enemies  were  approaching  and  take 
warning.  But  they  either  did  not  know  the  habit  of 
this  bird  or  were  sleeping  and  did  not  hear  the  shrill 
notes. 

Sounding  the  war-cry,  the  Indians  dashed  forward 
like  savage  wolves.  The  Eskimos,  hearing  them  at  the 
last  moment,  rushed  out.  Surprised  and  unarmed, 
they  were  surrounded.  With  their  guns  and  spears 
the  Indians  killed  all  but  a  few  who  managed  to  get 
into  their  little  skin  kyacks  (canoes),  push  them  off 
with  their  double-bladed  paddles,  and  thus  make  their 
escape. 

Other  tents  were  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  river, 
but  as  the  Indians  had  left  their  canoes  behind,  they 
had  to  content  themselves  with  firing  across  at  them. 
The  Eskimos  had  never  seen  firearms  before,  and  instead 
of  running  away  at  once,  stopped  to  pick  up  the  bullets, 
not  knowing  they  would  harm  them,  until  one  was  shot 
in  the  leg.  Then  they  scrambled  into  their  kyacks  and 
paddled  swiftly  away.  After  the  Indians  had  destroyed 
the  Eskimos'  homes,  and  had  a  good  meal  of  salmon, 
followed  by  a  long  sleep,  they  turned  their  attention  to 
the  white  man  again,  and  announced  that  they  were 
ready  to  go  with  him  to  the  copper  mines. 

Poor  Hearne  was  filled  with  grief  and  horror.  He 
had  wanted  to  meet  the  Eskimos,  to  become  acquainted 


"yirnrw;^ 


/ 


58       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

with  them,  and  to  talk  with  them;  but,  more  than  all, 
he  had  been  anxious  that  no  blood  should  be  shed  on 
this  his  first  journey  to  their  land.  He  was  too  sorry 
now  to  care  that  on  that  bright  July  morning  he  was 
the  first  white  man  to  stand  on  the  shores  of  the  Arctic 
Ocean;  that  he  had  taken  possession  of  all  the  Arctic 
region  for  his  Company,  and  had  made  himself  a  hero 
whose  deeds  would  be  told  through  all  the  years  to 
come.  At  that  moment  he  would  have  given  up  all  the 
glory  of  his  journey,  and  remained  a  commonplace 
trader  in  the  sleepy  little  fort  on  Hudson  Bay,  rather 
than  that  such  a  dreadful  calamity  should  have  fallen 
upon  those  innocent  people. 

Nothing,  however,  could  be  undone  now,  so  the  next 
best  thing  was  to  go  with  the  Indians  to  find  the  mine. 
After  following  the  narrow  winding  Coppermine  River 
(the  Far-off-metal  River),  they  came  to  the  much-talked- 
of  spot  where  the  Indians  got  the  bright  metal.  The 
red  men  told  Hearne  their  legend  which  gave  the  reason 
why  the  copper  was  under  the  ground  instead  of  lying 
on  the  surface,  as  they  said  they  found  it  years  before. 
According  to  this  story  it  was  an  Indian  woman  who 
found  the  metal  first,  and  who  guided  the  other  Indians 
back  and  forth  when  they  wanted  copper  for  their 
knives  and  hatchets.  One  day  they  made  her  angry, 
so  when  they  had  loaded  themselves  she  refused  to  return 
with  them,  saying  she  would  sit  upon  the  mine  until 
she  sank  into  the  ground,  and  that  all  the  copper  would 
sink  in  with  her.  When  they  came  the  next  year  she 
had  sunk  to  her  waist,  but  was  still  alive.  She  talked 
freely  to  them,  still  declaring  she  would  take  all  the 
copper  into  the  ground.    By  the  next  year  she  had  quite 


SAMUEL  HEAKKE  59 

disappeared,  and  sure  enough,  most  of  the  metal  had 
gone  in  with  her.  Instead  of  great  heaps,  as  before, 
only  a  few  small  pieces  were  found  above  ground.  The 
Indians  also  believed  that  every  lump  of  copper  taken 
from  the  mine  looked  like  some  bird  or  beast. 

Leaving  the  copper  mines,  they  travelled  at  a  rapid 
pace.  When  at  last  the  smoke  of  moss  fires  told  of  the 
women's  camps,  the  Indians  stopped  to  take  a  kind 
of  Turkish  bath,  which  they  made  by  covering  over  a 
little  pond  of  water  and  throwing  red-hot  stones  into  it. 
In  this  each  Indian  bathed.  They  knew  they  had  done 
wrong  by  killing  the  Eskimos,  and  they  thought  by 
making  themselves  very  clean  they  would  wash  away 
the  stain  of  that  crime  and  be  good  again  before  they 
went  to  see  their  wives. 

After  joining  the  women  the  party  prepared  to  start 
for  home.  They  returned  by  way  of  the  Athabasca 
country,  thus  enabling  Hearne  to  do  more  exploring. 
Christmas  they  spent  on  the  shore  of  Lake  Athabasca. 
It  was  cold  there,  but  they  had  plenty  to  eat,  for  it  was 
the  home  of  the  buffalo,  the  beaver  and  the  moose. 
They  had,  therefore,  a  very  different  Christmas  from 
the  one  before,  when  they  were  starving  on  the  Barren 
Lands. 

On  the  shore  of  the  lake  called  Athapapuskou  they 
came  upon  a  little  hut  where  an  Indian  woman  lived 
alone.  Her  companions  had  been  killed,  she  told  them, 
and  she  had  not  seen  a  soul  for  seven  moons.  All  that 
time  she  had  kept  herself  alive  by  hunting.  How  glad 
she  must  have  been  to  see  them!  What  strange  hard- 
ships sometimes  come  upon  these  people  in  the  wilder- 
ness! 


60       WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

Before  leaving  Athabasca,  Hearne  secured  some  fine 
furs  and  had  rich  loads  to  take  back  to  Hudson  Bay 
in  the  spring.  On  the  last  day  of  June  he  reached 
Prince  of  Wales  Fort.  This  time  he  had  been  away 
travelling  with  the  Indians  for  a  year  and  a  half.  He 
had  found  the  copper  mines,  and  had  smoked  the  peace- 
pipe  with  the  Indians.  Though  he  had  failed  to  find 
the  North-west  Passage,  yet  his  journey  accomplished 
much,  for  it  gave  men  a  better  idea  of  the  extent  of 
Rupert's  Land.  The  members  of  the  Hudson's  Bay 
Company  were  pleased  with  his  success,  and  very  soon 
made  him  governor  of  Fort  Prince  of  Wales.  He  is 
known  to  fame  as  the  discoverer  of  the  Coppermine 
River. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

The  Discovery  of  the  Mackenzie  Fkiver. 

Far  away,  on  a  river  flowing  out  of  Lake  Athabasca 
— which,  you  will  remember,  Samuel  Hearne  passed 
on  his  journey  home  from  the  Coppermine — a  white 
man  was  travelling  north.  The  river  was  rough  and 
swollen,  and  many  times  he  came  to  rapids  which  his 
men  could  not  cross  in  their  canoes,  but  were  forced  to 
land,  unload,  and  carry  their  things  past. 

Before  they  had  gone  far  they  came  to  a  fall,  and 
again  prepared  to  land.  One  canoe  was  whirled  past 
the  others.  The  squaw  who  was  managing  it  alone  did 
not  notice  the  current  until  she  was  caught  in  its 
tide.  Just  in  time  she  jumped  out  into  the  deep,  cold 
water.  A  line  was  thrown  to  her  and  by  means  of  it 
she  saved  herself;  but  the  canoe  was  swept  over  the 
falls  and  dashed  to  pieces  on  a  rock,  and  its  valuable 
load  of  the  white  man's  goods  sank  to  the  bottom  of 
the  river. 

No  one  worried  over  the  misfortune.  The  danger 
and  wetting  were  nothing  to  the  squaw,  who  was  soon 
busy  helping  to  carry  another  canoe.  Though  to  the 
white  man  the  loss  was  serious  enough,  he  spent  no 
time  in  lamenting,  but  was  very  glad  that  it  was  the 
goods,  and  not  himself,  that  went  to  the  bottom.  He 
started  his  Indians  on  again  as  if  nothing  had  hap- 
pened.    The  red  men  were  continually  wanting  to  lie 

61 
5  i  ......     , 


62       WHEKE  THE  BUFFALO  KOAMED 

on  the  shore,  or  to  spend  a  few  days  hunting  and  a  few 
in  feasting.  When  he  hurried  them  on  they  complained 
to  him,  saying,  "  It  is  hard,  white  man,  it  is  hard." 

Though  it  was  only  the  fourth  day  of  June,  and  the 
whole  bright  northern  summer  was  before  him,  there 
was  a  reason  for  the  white  man's  hurry.  For  many 
years  explorers  had  been  travelling  in  the  land  of  the 
animals  and  Indians,  but  they  had  not  yet  found  out 
how  large  it  was,  and  this  traveller  had  no  idea  how 
far  he  was  going.  The  day  before  he  had  left  his  little 
trading-post  to  explore  a  great  river  of  which  he  had 
heard.  Where  it  would  take  him  he  did  not  know,  so 
it  was  wise  to  waste  no  time. 

He  was  exploring  for  the  North-West  Company,  and 
had  charge  of  their  trading-post,  Fort  Chipewyan,  on 
Lake  Athabasca.  This  Company,  composed  of  Mont- 
real merchants,  was  formed  in  1784,  over  thirty  years 
after  Verendrye's  death. 

A  change  had  taken  place  in  Canada  since  Veren- 
drye's day.  A  great  battle  between  the  French  and 
British  had  been  fought  at  Quebec.  The  British  were 
victorious,  and  Canada  has  ever  since  been  a  British 
colony.  The  members  and  traders  of  the  North-West 
Company  were  Scotch  or  English,  but  most  of  the  men 
who  took  the  furs  down  to  the  St.  Lawrence  were  the 
jolly  French  voyageurs. 

The  young  man  who  lost  the  canoe,  almost  at  the 
beginning  of  his  long  journey,  was  a  Scotchman  named 
Alexander  Mackenzie.  A  few  years  before  he  had  been 
sent  to  take  charge  of  the  dull  little  fort  of  Chipewyan. 
Trading  with  the  Indians  when  they  came  in,  shipping 
the  furs   away,   sleeping,   eating,   writing  letters,   and 


DISCOVERY  OF  MACKENZIE  RIVER     63 

reading  between  times,  was  too  quiet  a  life  for  him. 
What  he  most  wanted  was  to  explore  the  wild,  unknown 
country.  Now  it  happened  that  near  the  Fort  were 
two  great  rivers.  One  came  from  the  west,  but  just 
where  he  did  not  know.  The  other  he  did  know  flowed 
to  a  large  lake  north  of  Lake  Athabasca;  but  out  of 
that  lake  flowed  a  river,  and  where  it  went  no  one 
knew.  It  might  lead  to  the  North-west  Passage !  Mac- 
kenzie determined  to  follow  the  river  to  its  mouth  and 
see  if  this  were  so.  The  North-West  Company  were 
at  this  time  too  busy  trying  to  get  more  furs  than  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company  to  give  him  much  help,  but 
this  did  not  prevent  his  journey. 

By  the  month  of  June  (1789)  the  Indians  had 
finished  their  trading  for  the  season  and  had  gone  back 
to  their  homes.  The  furs  had  been  shipped  away,  and 
Mackenzie  had  the  summer  before  him.  This  was  the 
time  he  chose  to  start  upon  his  journey.  He  took  with 
him  four  Canadian  voyageurs  to  manage  the  canoes, 
a  few  Indians  to  act  as  interpreters  and  to  pro- 
cure game,  and  a  North-West  Company  clerk  as  his 
assistant.  One  of  the  Indians  was  called  "  English 
Chief."  This  was  because  he  had  done  so  much  for  the 
English  and  their  interests  at  Hudson  Bay.  The  chief 
insisted  on  taking  two  of  his  wives,  and  some  of  the 
voyageurs  also  had  their  Indian  wives  with  them. 

It  was  a  slow,  tiresome  journey  up  the  river  to  the 
lake,  and  they  had  many  accidents  besides  the  one  at 
the  fall  where  the  canoe  was  lost.  The  men  grew  weary 
of  the  dangerous  rocks  and  rapids,  but  as  the  hunters 
were  fortunate  in  always  getting  plenty  qf  game,  they 
were  sure  of  a  refreshing  supper  when  they  landed  for 


64       WHEKE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

the  night.  They  must  have  been  glad  of  the  smoke 
from  their  camp-fire,  for  this  gave  them  a  little  peace 
from  the  mosquitos  that  swarm  in  the  northland  dur- 
ing the  summer.  As  early  as  two  or  three  o'clock .  in 
the  morning  it  was  light  enough  to  set  out  again,  and 
Mackenzie  never  failed  to  waken  them  all.  No  wonder 
the  Indians  grumbled  at  such  travelling! 

Upon  reaching  the  lake  they  found  it  still  so  full  of 
ice  that  they  were  obliged  to  wait  for  it  to  break  up. 
While  waiting  there  Mackenzie  and  his  men  caught 
plenty  of  fish.  Wild  fowl,  too,  were  numerous;  great 
flocks  of  beautiful  swans,  geese  and  ducks  were  flying 
all  about  them.  Although  there  was  so  much  ice  in  the 
lake,  they  found  ripe  berries  and  wild  onions,  which 
made  a  pleasant  change  from  fish  and  meat.  Mackenzie 
pleased  his  Indian  visitors  by  telling  them  that  the 
white  man  would  come  again  to  build  a  fort,  and  would 
stay  always  to  trade  with  them. 

This  lake  is  called  Great  Slave  Lake,  and  the  river 
by  which  they  came  to  it  is  the  Slave  River.  This 
name  was  given  the  lake  because  one  time,  in  days  gone 
by,  when  red  men  in  the  North  were  at  war,  a  tribe  was 
defeated  by  other  tribes  and  driven  near  its  shores.  In 
scorn  the  conquerors  called  them  Slavi,  meaning  Slave. 
This  name  still  clings  to  them,  though  they  declare  their 
name  to  be  Tenni,  meaning  the  people.  From  the 
Indians  living  along  the  shore  the  name  Slave  passed 
to  the  lake  and  river. 

About  the  21st  of  June  the  ice  had  broken  up  so  that 
they  were  able  to  start  on  their  canoe  journey  across 
the  lake.  On  one  of  the  small  islands  they  saw  a  herd 
of  reindeer  that  had  come  over  on  the  ice;  as  the  ice 


DISCOVERY  OF  MACKENZIE  RIVER     65 

was  now  gone,  the  wolves  could  not  get  at  them,  so  it 
was  a  safe  place  to  keep  their  baby  reindeer.  One  of 
the  men  called  it  Isle  de  Carreboeuf,  and  so  Mackenzie 
gave  the  island  that  name.  It  was  near  here  that  he 
sat  np  through  the  night  to  see  the  sun  set  and  rise. 
He  found  that  it  was  out  of  sight  for  exactly  four 
hours  and  twenty  minutes. 

Mackenzie  had  some  trouble  in  finding  his  way  out 
of  the  lake  and  into  the  river  he  had  come  to  explore. 
An  Indian  of  the  Red  Knife  tribe  had  been  engaged 
to  guide  them,  but,  having  a  poor  idea  of  the  way,  took 
them  to  the  north-east  side  of  the  lake,  and  ran  the 
canoe  into  the  rushes  on  the  shore  before  they  found 
no  river  was  there.  English  Chief  was  so  angry  at  the 
Red  Knife  Indian  for  trying  to  guide  them,  when  he 
did  not  know  the  way  himself,  that  he  said  he  would 
murder  him.  But  the  Red  Knife  Indian  declared  he 
had  come  to  that  very  place  through  the  woods  from 
the  river,  and  that  they  could  not  be  far  from  the  mouth 
of  the  latter.  So  they  started  again,  going  now  in  a 
south-westerly  direction,  and  in  time  reached  the  river 
into  which  the  Slave  Lake  empties.  Down  this  great 
stream  they  turned  their  canoes.  English  Chief  was 
so  happy  now  that  he  forgot  his  threat  to  murder  the 
Indian  guide. 

On  and  on  they  travelled,  farther  and  farther  into 
the  northern  homes  of  the  red  men.  Sometimes  when 
they  landed  for  the  night  they  would  be  caught  in  a 
rainstorm  and  soaked  before  they  could  get  any  shelter. 
They  were  always  expecting  to  come  to  falls,  of  which 
they  had  heard  from  the  Indians,  and  were  continually 
on  the  lookout.  At  times  they  even  imagined  they 
could  hear  the  roaring  of  falling  water  on  ahead. 


66   WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

Farther  down  the  river  they  came  to  some  Indians 
who  were  terrified  and  ran  away  at  the  sight  of  the 
white  men.  But  there  were  a  few  who  did  not  get 
away  in  time,  and  Mackenzie's  Indians  told  them  not 
to  be  afraid,  and  gave  them  beads,  knives,  hatchets  and 
rings.  Mackenzie  presented  them  with  tobacco,  and 
taught  them  how  to  smoke.  After  this  they  were  not  so 
terror-stricken,  and  were  persuaded  to  tell  what  they 
knew  about  the  river. 

Their  story  was  not  encouraging.  They  said  it  was 
so  far  to  the  river  mouth  that  they  would  all  be  old 
before  they  could  get  there;  that  they  would  come  to 
two  impassable  falls,  and  that  they  would  meet  with 
all  sorts  of  dangerous  monsters.  They  even  described 
an  island  where  they  said  a  spirit  lived  waiting  to 
swallow  anyone  who  went  by.  They  entertained  the 
white  men  with  a  dance,  which  was  like  hopping  about 
to  an  accompaniment  of  two  or  three  notes  which  they 
considered  singing.  Each  performer  held  a  bone  over 
his  head,  and  beat  time  by  moving  it  about. 

These  Indians  were  dressed  in  the  skins  of  moose 
or  reindeer,  and  were  decorated  with  bracelets  of  wood, 
horn  or  bone.  Most  of  them  wore  their  hair  long,  but 
a  few  who  tried  to  be  very  fine  let  only  part  of  it  hang 
down  their  backs  and  wore  the  rest  of  it  short  round 
the  sides  of  their  heads.  Mackenzie  thought  they  were 
very  ugly  and  dirty.  They  lived  in  rude  tepees,  built 
so  that  one  faced  another  and  a  fire  between  would  do 
for  both.  Their  axes  were  made  out  of  a  kind  of  grey 
stone.  They  made  their  dishes  out  of  wood  and  horn, 
and  boiled  water  by  throwing  red-hot  stones  into  it. 
They  kindled  their  fires  by  striking  together  a  piece  of 


DISCOVERY  OF  MACKENZIE  RIVER     67 

iron  pyrites  and  a  piece  of  flint  stone  over  lightwood. 
These  things  they  carried  with  them  as  we  do  matches, 
and  so  could  make  a  fire  at  any  time.  The  iron  for  their 
knives  they  got  by  trading  furs  with  other  Indians. 
They  had  very  small  bark  canoes,  but  the  paddles  they 
used  were  large  and  strong. 

Mackenzie  was  not  alarmed  by  the  stories  the 
Indians  told  him  of  the  river,  but  the  guide  he  brought 
with  him  from  Slave  Lake  was  greatly  frightened  and 
declared  he  would  turn  back.  As  they  could  not  do 
without  him,  they  took  him  along  by  force.  They  also 
got  one  of  the  Indians  living  there  to  go  with  them,  as 
he  knew  something  of  the  river  and  the  Indians  they 
might  meet.  To  induce  him  to  go  they  had  to  give  him 
a  kettle,  a  knife,  and  an  axe,  but  even  then  he  did  not 
stay  with  them  for  any  length  of  time.  Mackenzie 
soon  found  out  he  would  have  to  get  a  new  guide  from 
almost  every  band  of  Indians  he  came  to,  as  he  could 
never  keep  the  same  one  long. 

As  they  travelled  on  and  on,  day  after  day,  down  the 
great  river,  and  found  no  sea,  the  men  became  discour- 
aged. Mackenzie  had  to  promise  that  if  they  did  not 
come  to  salt  water  in  seven  days  he  would  turn  back. 
Even  then,  to  keep  English  Chief  content,  he  had  to  give 
him  one  of  his  best  coats,  and  to  the  guide  he  gave  a 
mooseskin.  In  spite  of  this,  however,  it  was  not  long 
before  the  guide  went  off  in  the  night;  but  he  was  so 
honest  as  to  leave  the  mooseskin,  which  he  knew  he 
had  not  yet  earned. 

After  such  proof  of  their  honesty,  Mackenzie  was 
much  surprised  one  night,  when  he  sat  up  to  write  by 
the  midnight  sun,  to  find  that  he  had  to  watch  the 
Indians  to  keep  them  away  from  the  meat  he  was  boil- 


68       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

ing  for  breakfast.  He  learned  in  time  that  to  them 
this  was  not  stealing,  for  they  considered  food  common 
property.  According  to  their  ideas,  his  pot  of  meat 
belonged  to  anyone  who  happened  to  be  hungry. 

As  they  travelled  on,  the  Indians  they  met  with 
talked  differently,  but  as  English  Chief  could  under- 
stand them,  they  knew  that  all  languages  spoken  in  that 
part  were  somewhat  alike.  Usually  when  the  natives 
saw  them  coming  they  would  hurry  the  women  and 
children  away  to  the  woods,  hide  all  their  things,  and 
have  their  bows  and  arrows  ready.  Mackenzie  always 
gave  them  presents,  and  made  them  understand  he  had 
come  in  peace,  and  did  not  mean  to  carry  off  their 
treasures  or  their  babies.  He  found  that  the  presents 
they  liked  best  were  the  big  blue  beads.  Sometimes  they 
were  afraid  of  his  gun,  but  his  Indians  told  them  he 
used  it  only  to  shoot  game,  and  had  no  intention  of 
hurting  them  with  it. 

Though  the  current  was  so  strong  that  they  were 
going  at  the  rate  of  sixty  or  seventy  miles  a  day,  the 
river  was  becoming  broad  like  a  lake.  Would  they  come 
to  a  lake,  with  other  unknown  rivers  beyond?  Would 
the  winter,  the  cold  northern  winter,  be  upon  them 
before  they  could  reach  the  sea,  or  were  they  coming 
to  it  now?  Anxiously  they  watched  as  they  paddled 
farther  and  farther  into  the  north,  where  the  summer 
sun  shines  bright  at  midnight.  One  of  the  men,  waking 
up  in  the  middle  of  the  night,  forgot  where  he  was, 
and  thinking  that  because  the  sun  was  shining  it  was 
morning,  he  called  the  others  up  to  breakfast.  The 
sleepy  men  were  angry  at  having  their  short  rest  dis- 
turbed, and  saw  that  he  was  not  allowed  to  call  them 
the  next  morning. 


DISCOVERY  OF  MACKENZIE  RIVER     69 

For  several  days  early  in  July  they  fancied  they 
could  smell  salt  water.  One  evening  they  went  to  bed 
as  usual  on  dry  ground.  In  the  night  they  made  the 
discovery  that  the  ground  was  covered  with  water  and 
the  baggage  was  floating  upon  it.  Hurriedly,  but  with 
glad  hearts,  they  moved  back  from  the  rising  tide. 
They  had  come  at  last  to  the  Arctic  Ocean! 

A  little  farther  on  they  saw  the  whales  swimming 
about.  Never  stopping  to  think  that  the  whales  could 
easily  smash  their  little  canoes,  they  went  after  them, 
but  fortunately  they  could  not  catch  up  to  the  big  sea 
monsters.  On  the  shore  they  erected  a  large  post  with 
the  date,  July  14th,  1789,  and  under  it  carved  the 
names  of  all  who  had  made  the  trip. 

Mackenzie  wished  very  much  to  see  the  Eskimos,  but 
as  none  could  be  found,  his  Indians  said  they  were  pro- 
bably all  away  hunting  whales ;  so  he  had  to  content 
himself  with  looking  at  their  village  of  vacant  huts. 
Both  Mackenzie  and  Hearne,  the  first  white  men  to 
reach  the  Arctic  coast,  were  unfortunate  in  not  be- 
coming acquainted  with  these  people. 

Though  the  travellers  were  only  six  weeks  in  reach- 
ing the  Arctic  coast,  it  took  them  eight  weeks  to  return, 
for  they  were  now  going  against  the  current  of  the 
river.  In  many  places  they  had  to  "  track  "  with  the 
tow-lines,  and  in  walking  along  the  shore  often  sank  to 
their  waists  in  the  moss  of  the  beaver-meadows.  It 
was  the  12th  of  September  when  Mackenzie  got  back 
to  Fort  Chipewyan.  He  knew  now  where  the  river 
flowed.  He  had  traced  it  to  its  mouth,  and  proved  that 
it  did  not  lead  to  a  passage  to  the  Western  Sea.  In 
honor  of  his  discovery  the  great  river  was  named  for 
him,  and  it  will  ever  perpetuate  his  memory. 


CHAPTER  IX. 
Alexander  Mackenzie  Crosses  the  Continent. 

Though  Alexander  Mackenzie  had  won  the  right  to 
be  called  a  great  explorer,  the  North-West  Company 
had  as  yet  taken  little  notice  of  him  or  his  discovery. 
Nor  could  he  arouse  them  to  take  much  interest  in 
another  long  journey  of  his  dreams.  They  had  other 
things  to  think  of.  For  some  years  the  Hudson's  Bay 
Company,  now  thoroughly  wide  awake,  had  been  extend- 
ing their  trade  inland  from  Hudson  Bay.  A  little  west 
of  the  northern  shore  of  Lake  Winnipeg  they  had  built 
a  large  central  trading-post,  called  Fort  Cumberland, 
and  far  west,  on  the  Saskatchewan  River,  was  their 
Edmonton  House,  where  every  year  load  upon  load 
of  furs  was  traded  from  the  Indian  hunters.  By  this 
time  the  North-West  Company  and  the  Hudson's  Bay 
Company  were  fighting  each  other,  not  with  guns  and 
tomahawks,  but  with  trading-posts,  fur-traders,  and 
the  goods  the  Indians  liked  best. 

They  fought  this  way:  The  North- West  Company 
would  build  a  fort  on  the  route  the  Indians  took  to  a 
Hudson's  Bay  Company  post.  There  they  would  watch 
for  the  passing  Indians,  and  coax  them  to  trade  with 
them.  They  would  tell  them  how  much  better  their 
blue  beads  and  red  handkerchiefs  were ;  that  they  could 
shoot  straighter  with  their  guns,  and  that  they  would 
get  so  much  more  for  a  beaverskin  than  they  would 

70 


MACKENZIE  CROSSES  THE  CONTINENT    71 

from  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company.  The  Hudson's  Bay 
Company  would  learn  of  this,  and  straightway  build 
a  fort  a  little  beyond  the  North-West  Company's  trad- 
ing-post, where  they  could  meet  the  Indians  first  and 
tell  them  very  much  the  same  sort  of  story.  Both 
companies  did  worse  than  this.  Both  gave  them 
whiskey  to  keep  their  trade,  although  they  knew  how 
injurious  it  was  to  the  Indians,  and  how  dangerous  it 
made  them. 

However,  in  spite  of  the  rivalry,  Alexander  Mac- 
kenzie managed  to  have  someone  else  placed  in  charge 
of  Eort  Chipewyan,  while  he  went  over  to  England  to 
study  surveying.  He  wanted  also  to  secure  new  instru- 
ments, that  he  might  be  better  able  to  take  correct  obser- 
vations to  show  the  latitude  and  longitude  of  the  places 
he  travelled  through.  Upon  his  return  he  prepared  for 
his  western  journey.  No  one  had  yet  crossed  the  con- 
tinent to  the  Western  Sea,  nor  even  climbed  over  the 
great  mountains  to  find  what  was  beyond.  They  did 
know  by  this  time  that  America  was  no  narrow  strip 
of  land.  They  were  quite  over  their  surprise  at  the 
extent  of  the  red  man's  country,  but  sometimes,  when 
not  too  busy  with  the  fur  trade,  they  wondered  how 
wide  the  New  World  really  was,  and  how  far  it  could 
be  across  to  the  Western  Sea.  Alexander  Mackenzie 
said  he  would  go  and  find  out.  In  the  fall  of  the  year 
1792  he  began  his  journey  by  ascending  the  great  Peace 
River,  of  which  he  had  been  thinking  for  so  long.  He 
went  up  this  river  past  the  most  westerly  fur  post,  and 
spent  the  winter  there  so  that  he  might  make  an  early 
start  in  the  spring.  On  the  9th  of  May  he  set  out  upon 
his  travels  into  the  unknown  West.     He  was  accom- 


72       WHEKE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

panied  by  his  assistant,  Alexander  McKay,  six  Cana- 
dians, two  Indians,  and  his  dog.  They  took  only  one 
canoe,  which,  though  twenty-five  feet  long,  was  so  light 
that  it  could  be  easily  carried  over  portages  or  past 
rapids  and  dangerous  rocks. 

During  the  long  and  difficult  journey  Mackenzie 
had  much  to  interest  him.  Often  he  met  Indians  who 
told  him  something  -f  the  country  ahead.  He  was  able 
also  to  study  the  habits  of  the  wild  animals  of  that 
lonely  land.  He  says  they  passed  acres  and  acres  where 
the  large  poplar  trees  had  been  cut  down  by  the  beavers 
to  build  their  dams  and  lodges.  The  charming  scenery 
through  which  they  were  passing  was  a  constant  delight. 
The  most  magnificent  sight  that  met  their  eyes  was  the 
great  mountain  range  with  its  snowy  summits  gleaming 
in  the  sun. 

Among  those  mountains  the  travellers  met  with  their 
greatest  dangers.    They  were  often  in  great  peril  when 
towing  their  canoes  up  the  rough,  rocky  stream.     In 
some  places,  between  the  precipice  and  the  deep  water, 
there  was  only  a  narrow  slippery  ledge  for  the  men  to 
walk  upon,  and  bits  of  rock  were  falling  all  about  them. 
Mackenzie  wrote  of  that  part  of  the  journey:  "One 
false  step  of  those  who  were  attached  to  the  line,  or  the 
breaking  of  the  line  itself,  would  at  once  have  con- 
signed the  canoe,  and  everything  it  contained,  to  instant 
destruction.     .     .     .     For  stones  both  small  and  great 
were    constantly    rolling    from    the    bank,    rendering 
the  situation  of  those  who  were  dragging  the  canoe 
beneath  it    extremely    perilous."     No    wonder    they 
thought  of  the  stories  the  Indians  had  told  about  the 
spirits  whispering  with  the  wind   in  the  night,   and 
throwing  stones  down  at  them  if  they  ventured  to  pass. 


MACKENZIE  CROSSES  THE  CONTINENT    73 

In  some  places  even  this  mode  of  travelling  was 
impossible,  and  canoe  and  baggage  were  carried.  Climb- 
ing rocks  and  struggling  up  bills  with  loads  on  their 
backs  tired  the  men,  wore  out  their  moccasins,  and 
hurt  their  feet.  For  one  long  stretch  the  way  was  so 
rough  that  someone  had  to  go  ahead  and  cut  down  the 
trees  and  branches  to  clear  a  road.  It  was  Mackenzie 
who  did  the  most  of  this,  for  the  men  were  tired  and 
grumbled  much  over  their  difficulties.  It  was  so  cold 
among  the  snow-capped  mountains  that  frequently  they 
shivered  beside  a  fire  while  taking  their  suppers.  Their 
night's  rest  was  always  welcome,  although  they  awoke 
stiff  and  chilly  in  the  morning. 

When  past  the  mountains  they  had  a  long  weary 
tramp.  On  their  way  they  met  bands  of  Indians,  who 
were  frightened  at  first  and  ran  away,  but  were  usually 
induced  to  come  to  Mackenzie  for  the  presents  he 
offered.  At  last  the  travellers  came  to  a  large  river, 
which  Mackenzie  decided  to  follow,  hoping  it  would 
take  him  to  the  sea.  The  rocks  and  rapids  they  had  to 
pass  discouraged  the  men,  but  Mackenzie  did  his  best 
to  keep  up  their  spirits.  Before  they  had  gone  far  they 
saw  Indians  on  the  banks,  flourishing  their  arrows  as 
if  they  thought  the  white  men  were  enemies.  After 
the  interpreters  had  talked  to  them,  however,  and  Mac- 
kenzie had  given  them  beads  and  a  looking-glass,  and 
the  children  some  sugar,  they  became  quite  friendly, 
and  two  of  them  went  with  him  as  guides.  Soon  they 
came  to  other  Indians,  who  were  most  friendly  after 
they  learned  Mackenzie  would  not  harm  them.  They 
were  much  interested  in  his  gun,  and  to  show  it  off  and 
to  entertain  them  he  shot  a  duck  which  was  flying  near. 


74       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

Farther  on,  at  the  home  of  other  Indians,  Mackenzie 
was  able  to  get  some  information  about  the  river.  An 
old  man  drew  a  sketch  on  a  piece  of  birch-bark,  show- 
ing dangerous  cataracts  and  falls  ahead.  He  told  of  a 
route,  across  the  land  to  the  sea,  which  began  a  short 
distance  back,  and  was  a  much  shorter  and  easier  way 
than  following  the  rough,  winding  river.  Mackenzie 
could  not  make  up  his  mind  what  was  best  to  do.  Nearly 
all  night  he  lay  awake  thinking  about  it.  In  the  morn- 
ing he  began  to  ask  more  questions,  when  to  his  sur- 
prise the  Indian  said,  "  Why  are  you  asking  so  many 
questions?  Do  not  white  people  know  everything?" 
Now,  the  more  a  white  man  knows  the  more  an  Indian 
thinks  of  him,  and  Mackenzie  was  a  little  puzzled  how 
to  answer  and  keep  the  good  opinion  of  this  Indian. 
At  last  he  replied  by  saying  that  he  knew  where  he  was, 
and  where  the  sea  was,  but  he  was  not  sure  of  the  easiest 
way  to  reach  it. 

Mackenzie  finally  decided  to  take  the  old  man's  advice 
and  go  back  to  the  trail  which  led  across  the  country. 
As  soon  as  the  guide  heard  this  he  proposed  to  take  a 
short  route  overland  to  his  home,  that  he  might  have 
more  time  to  prepare  for  the  journey.  Mackenzie  let 
him  go,  but  he  thought  it  safer  to  send  McKay  and  two 
of  the  men  with  him.  By  the  time  Mackenzie  had 
travelled  up  the  river  to  the  camp  where  the  Indians 
had  been  so  friendly  when  he  passed  through  there 
before,  none  were  to  be  seen,  not  even  the  guide. 
McKay  and  the  two  men  appeared  alone,  with  terror- 
stricken  faces.  They  stated  that  the  guide  had  taken 
them  along  at  a  terrible  pace,  and  that  at  the  camp  they 


MACKENZIE  CROSSES  THE  CONTINENT    75 

had  found  the  huts  empty  and  things  lying  about  as 
if  the  Indians  had  gone  off  in  a  panic.  The  guide  had 
at  once  rushed  into  the  woods  after  the  others.  Upon 
hearing  this  the  men  were  frightened,  for  they  thought 
the  Indians  must  be  preparing  to  attack  them.  They 
wanted  to  turn  back,  and,  as  Mackenzie  said,  their  cry 
was,  "  Let  us  re-embark  and  be  gone."  But  their  brave 
leader,  who  had  no  intention  of  returning  yet,  ordered 
them  to  unload  the  canoe. 

At  about  midnight  of  the  second  day  after  their 
return  to  this  place,  a  noise  was  heard  that  greatly 
alarmed  the  men,  especially  as  the  dog  kept  barking  and 
running  back  and  forth  in  the  edge  of  the  woods.  A 
little  later  the  sentinel  said  a  man  seemed  to  be  creep- 
ing about  on  his  hands  and  feet  not  far  from  them. 
This  increased  their  alarm,  as  they  felt  sure  he  was  an 
Indian  spy  who  had  come  to  learn  where  they  were,  so 
that  the  whole  band  might  fall  upon  them.  Mackenzie 
tried  in  vain  to  make  them  believe  it  was  a  bear. 

When  daylight  came  they  found  only  a  poor  old 
blind,  gray-headed  Indian,  who,  unable  to  get  away 
with  the  others,  had  been  hiding  near  until  that  night, 
when  he  crawled  out  in  search  of  something  to  eat.  He 
trembled  with  fright  when  Mackenzie  touched  him. 
They  led  him  to  their  fire  and  gave  him  food,  and  when 
at  last  they  persuaded  him  to  talk,  he  said  that  some 
Indians  had  told  them  that  the  white  men  were  danger- 
ous enemies,  and  that  when  his  people  saw  the  white 
strangers  coming  back  so  soon,  after  informing  them 
they  were  going  down  the  river  and  would  not  return 
for  many  moons,  they  ran  away  in  terror,  thinking 
the  travellers  were  surely  enemies  and  had  come  back 


76       WHEEE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

to  take  them  unawares  and  kill  them  with  their  wonder- 
ful guns.  Mackenzie  was  sorry  now  that  he  had  fired 
off  the  gun  for  them,  and  made  up  his  mind  that  he 
would  not  entertain  strange  Indians  that  way  again.  So 
it  happened  that  both  Indians  and  white  men  had  been 
afraid  and  thought  it  necessary  to  be  on  the  watch. 

Resuming  their  journey,  they  travelled  on  some  dis- 
tance, till  they  came  to  the  mouth  of  a  small  river  which 
seemed  to  be  the  place  where  the  Indians  took  the  trail 
through  the  woods.  But  what  could  they  do  without 
a  guide  ?  They  might  lose  their  way,  or,  with  no  one 
to  tell  they  were  friendly  white  men,  they  might  be 
killed  by  the  next  Indians  they  met.  As  they  were  won- 
dering what  they  were  going  to  do,  they  saw  two  canoes 
coming  towards  them,  and  were  delighted  to  find  that 
it  was  the  guide  returning  with  some  of  his  friends.  He 
was  so  gay  in  a  gaudily-painted  beaver-robe  that  they 
all  believed  him  when  he  said  he  had  been  getting  ready 
for  the  journey.  As  a  reward  for  coming  back,  Mac- 
kenzie gave  him  a  bright  handkerchief  and  a  jacket. 

They  now  left  the  canoe  and  everything  they  could  do 
without,  and  with  packs  on  their  backs  started  on  their 
overland  journey.  The  Indians  they  met  with  gave 
them  much  help  by  supplying  guides  from  among  their 
young  men  to  take  them  on  from  one  encampment  to 
another.  There  was  one  great  trouble  with  the  Indian 
guides ;  they  were  inclined  to  run  off  in  the  night,  leav- 
ing the  poor  white  men  with  no  one  to  introduce  them 
at  the  next  village.  Mackenzie  made  up  his  mind  one 
day  that  he  would  put  a  stop  to  this  by  sleeping  under 
the  same  covering  with  his  guide.  This  one  happened 
to  be  a  very  stylish  Indian,  and,  in  accordance  Avith  the 


MACKENZIE  CROSSES  THE  CONTINENT    77 

latest  fashion,  had  his  body  thickly  smeared  with  red 
earth  and  his  hair  thick  and  sticky  with  fish  oil.  Poor 
Mackenzie  found  it  quite  impossible  to  go  to  sleep  beside 
him !  Hoa  ever,  he  thought  it  better  to  be  kept  awake 
by  the  odor  of  the  Indian's  finery  than  to  be  left  without 
a  guide  in  the  morning. 

Eish  were  very  plentiful  in  all  the  streams  and  rivers, 
and  so  the  Indians  they  met  had  plenty  to  eat.  Some  of 
them  would  not  hunt  the  animals  for  food,  and  when 
they  saw  one  of  Mackenzie's  men  throw  a  bone  into  the 
river,  a  young  brave  went  in  and  brought  it  out,  for  they 
were  afraid  the  sight  of  the  bone  would  drive  the  fish 
away.  They  caught  the  fish  by  placing  large  traps, 
made  of  split  wood,  in  the  river.  Each  trap  had  a  small 
opening,  and  was  made  in  such  a  way  that  when  the  fish 
were  once  in  they  could  not  get  out. 

At  one  village  an  axe  disappeared.  The  Indians  pre- 
tended to  know  nothing  about  it  until  Mackenzie  sat 
down  and  made  signs  that  he  would  not  go  on  until  he 
got  it.  It  was  then  pulled  out  from  under  the  chief's 
canoe.  After  leaving  another  village  they  missed  the 
dog.  Though  they  called  and  called  he  did  not  come, 
and  they  feared  they  would  never  see  him  again. 

By  this  time  they  were  going  down  a  river  in  an 
Indian  canoe  and  nearing  the  ocean.  They  saw  the  sea- 
gulls, the  porpoises,  and  the  beautiful  sea-otters;  and 
at  last  they  beheld  the  ebb  and  flow  of  the  tide  of  that 
Western  Sea,  the  Pacific  Ocean,  which  Verendrye  had 
spent  his  life  in  seeking. 

On  the  coast  the  travellers  found  the  Indians  by  no 
means  friendly.  One  young  Indian  was  particularly 
troublesome,  and  kept  hanging  about,  calling  out  to  the 


78       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

white  men  that  he  had  once  been  shot  at  by  men  of  their 
color,  and  acting  as  if  he  wished  to  do  them  some 
injury.  He  persisted  in  getting  into  the  canoe  with 
Mackenzie,  and  he  tried  to  get  his  hat,  handkerchief, 
and  everything  else  he  saw.  Later  the  guide  heard  that 
the  natives  were  going  to  attack  them  with  spears.  His 
story  terrified  the  men,  and  they  wanted  to  turn  back. 
But  though  they  had  to  take  refuge  on  a  rock  all  night, 
Mackenzie  would  not  leave  until  he  had  taken  observa- 
tions to  find  out  what  latitude  and  longitude  he  was  in. 
Before  leaving  the  Pacific  the  explorer  mixed  some  ver- 
milion with  grease  and  wrote  in  large  letters,  on  a  rock 
overhanging  the  sea,  "Alexander  Mackenzie,  from 
Canada  by  land,  the  twenty-second  of  July,  One 
thousand  seven  hundred  and  ninety-three." 

You  will  be  glad  to  know  that  on  the  way  back  they 
found  the  dog.  The  poor  creature  acted  as  if  he  were 
crazy  when  they  first  came  to  him,  but  after  they  had 
given  him  food  and  patted  him  he  knew  them  again, 
and  jumped  about,  wagging  his  tail  in  the  greatest 
delight.  The  Indians  from  the  village  near  where  they 
had  lost  him  said  he  had  been  howling  about  ever  since 
they  had  passed  there. 

When  Mackenzie's  name  is  praised  in  many  lands, 
and  histories  keep  afresh  in  our  minds  the  story  of  his 
great  deeds,  surely  the  children  will  give  a  little  glory 
to  the  dog  that  did  all  a  dog  could  do  to  help.  He 
cheered  the  men,  warned  them  of  danger,  barked  all 
one  night  because  he  knew  a  wolf  was  near,  and,  though 
tired  and  footsore,  followed  his  master  on  the  long  jour- 
ney, through  hardships  and  dangers,  to  find  the  path 
across  the  great  continent,  the  long-talked-of  passage 
to  the  Western  Sea. 


HENRY    HUDSON. 


SAMUEL    HEARNE. 


CAPTAIN    COOK. 


CAPTAIN    VANCOUVER. 


SIR  JOHN   FRANKLIN. 


SIR    ALEXANDER    MACKENZIE. 


SIMON    ERASER. 


FAMOUS    EXPLORERS. 


CHAPTEE  X. 
Explorers  on  the  Pacific. 

Though  Alexander  Mackenzie  was  the  first  white 
man  to  reach  the  Pacific  coast  of  North  America  by 
land,  he  was  not  the  first  white  man  to  see  that  shore. 
Daring  sailors,  by  a  long  ocean  voyage,  had  reached  it 
before  him.  For  many  years  the  Spaniards  had  been 
on  the  Pacific  coast  of  America.  They  sailed  to  the 
Isthmus  of  Panama,  and  crossed  on  a  narrow  neck  of 
land  between  North  and  Sonth  America.  On  the 
Isthmus  they  built  a  stronghold  to  keep  other  nations 
back,  and  felt  quite  sure  that  in  this  way  they  could 
have  the  whole  Pacific  coast  to  themselves.  They  had 
ports  all  along  the  coast,  and  ships  to  carry  home  the 
gold  and  silver  from  the  mines. 

In  the  year  1577  a  young  man  named  Francis  Drake 
set  out  from  England  with  five  vessels  bound  for  the 
Pacific  coast,  determined  to  show  Spain  that  England, 
too,  would  sail  that  sea.  Queen  Elizabeth,  who  ruled 
in  England  then,  presented  him  with  a  sword  on  which 
were  the  words,  "Who  striketh  thee,  Drake,  striketh 
us,"  and  with  that  he  sailed  away,  straight  to  the  south 
of  South  America. 

Strong  westerly  winds  were  blowing,  and  dangerous 
waves  filled  the  Strait  of  Magellan.  But  Drake  was 
determined  to  reach  the  Pacific  by  this  route,  and 
through  the  stormy  strait  he  went.     Of  the  five  shii?3 

79 


80       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  EOAMED 

that  started,  only  three  reached  the  strait  and  only  the 
one  that  he  was  in,  the  Golden  Hind,  passed  through  in 
safety. 

Drake  then  sailed  north  along  the  Pacific  coast.  A 
Spanish  vessel  saw  him  coming,  and,  thinking  him  a 
messenger  from  Spain,  was  preparing  to  give  him  a 
grand  reception,  when  he  sailed  up  and  captured  the 
ship.  On  he  went,  capturing  other  ships  and  seizing 
the  silver  and  gold  from  the  Spaniards  before  they 
could  get  over  their  surprise  at  seeing  an  English 
vessel  on  the  sea  they  claimed  as  their  own. 

When  ready  to  go  home  he  dare  not  turn  about  and 
sail  down  that  coast,  for  he  knew  they  would  not  let 
him  pass  them  again.  So  he  sailed  north,  past  all  the 
Spanish  possessions,  up  along  the  Pacific  coast  to  what 
is  now  the  United  States;  then  westward  through  the 
Pacific  and  Indian  oceans,  round  the  Cape  of  Good 
Hope,  and  back  to  England. 

Drake  was  a  great  hero  then,  for  he  had  sailed  round 
the  world,  and  had  been  on  the  Pacific  coast  farther 
north  than  the  Spaniards.  Queen  Elizabeth  dined  on 
his  ship,  and  made  him  one  of  her  knights.  Through- 
out all  England  was  heard  the  name  and  fame  of  Sir 
Francis  Drake,  who  had  sailed  round  the  world. 

Bering. 

Over  one  hundred  and  fifty  years  later,  a  man  crossed 
from  Russia  to  the  Pacific  coast  of  America.  If  you 
look  at  the  map  of  the  world  you  will  see  how  near  Asia 
comes  to  America,  and  that  the  part  which  so  nearly 
touches  the  new  continent  is  the  north-eastern  coast  of 
Russia.      At   St.   Petersburg,   the  capital  of    Russia, 


EXPLORERS  ON  THE  PACIFIC  81 

strange  stories  bad  been  told  of  driftwood  tbat  bad  never 
grown  in  Asia,  but  wbieb  bad  been  picked  up  on  tbat 
nortb-eastern  coast ;  and  of  wbales  tbat  bad  been  found 
tbere  witb  weapons  in  tbem  tbat  bad  not  been  made  in 
Asia.  Tbe  Russians  bad  no  idea  tbat  America  stretcbed 
nortb-east  so  near  tbeir  own  country,  but  tbougbt  tbat 
between  Asia  and  tbe  America  tbey  bad  beard  of  tbere 
must  be  some  unknown  land  from  wbicb  tbese  tbings 
bad  drifted,  and  tbey  began  to  call  it  Gamoland. 
Tbougb  no  one  bad  found  tbis  Gamoland,  tbey  put  it 
on  tbeir  maps.  Tbey  tben  sent  a  man  named  Vitus 
Bering,  a  stout-bearted  Danisb  navigator,  out  from  St. 
Petersburg  to  cross  over  from  Asia  and  explore  tbis 
part  of  tbe  world. 

Poor  Bering,  wbat  a  journey  be  bad!  Before  be 
could  reacb  tbe  sbore  and  start  out  in  bis  sbips  be  bad 
to  travel  six  tbousand  miles  by  land,  mucb  of  tbat  dis- 
tance tbrougb  cold,  dreary  Siberia.  He  and  bis  men 
were  years  going  over  tbat  trackless  country,  climb- 
ing tbe  mountain  ranges  and  crossing  tbe  rivers. 
Horses,  dogs,  and  even  men,  died  from  tbe  bardsbips. 
Crowds  of  timber-wolves  followed  at  tbeir  beels  wait- 
ing to  devour  tbem.  But  Bering  kept  bravely  on  until 
be  reacbed  Kamcbatka,  wbere  Asia  borders  on  tbe 
Pacific. 

From  Kamchatka  be  set  out  witb  two  boats  to  learn 
wbat  really  lay  between  Asia  and  America.  As  you 
know,  tbey  found  no  Gamoland,  but  tbey  did  find  tbe 
coast-line  of  America.  Bering  passed  tbe  great  snow- 
capped mountain  of  St.  Elias,  saw  tbe  brigbt  ligbt 
from  volcanoes,  and  gazed  on  tbe  buge  icebergs  tbat  in 
tbe  sunset  were  all  aglow  witb  brilliant  hues.     Tbey 


82       WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

anchored  by  an  island.  Provisions  were  running  short 
and  many  of  the  men  were  ill,  so  Bering  ordered  them 
to  steer  homeward. 

They  were  now  skirting  the  Peninsula  of  Alaska, 
of  which  they  had  never  heard,  and  they  could  not 
ma'ke  out  where  they  were  and  why  they  did  not  get 
away  from  the  coast-line.  The  breakers  roared.  Storms 
drove  them  on.  The  fog  fell,  and  they  could  not  see 
where  they  were  going.  Still  the  ship  sped  on — but 
where  ?  They  could  only  hope  that  they  were  nearing 
Kamchatka.  Days  went  drearily  by.  The  sky  cleared, 
and  the  cheery  cry  rang  out,  "  Land  ahead !"  Even 
those  who  were  ill  crawled  on  deck  to  look.  Alas ! 
it  was  not  Kamchatka,  but  an  island.  As  they  had 
no  idea  how  near  they  were  to  the  home  shore,  and  as 
winter  was  coming,  they  prepared  to  spend  the  long, 
cold,  dreary  season  there.  Sea-cows  gazed  up  from 
their  sea-weed  in  amazement,  and  hungry  foxes 
swarmed  round.  Man  was  still  a  stranger  to  them, 
and  they  had  no  fear.  Soon  the  winds  began  to  roar, 
blowing;  such  hurricanes  that  when  on  shore  the  men 
had  to  crawl  on  their  hands  and  feet.  One  breaker 
washed  their  boat  away.  They  could  only  look  on  in 
horror,  while  thoughts  of  a  life-time  on  that  dreary 
island  flashed  through  every  mind;  but,  fortunately, 
another  wave  drove  the  boat  high  and  dry  on  the  land. 

Deep  down  in  the  sand  the  men  dug  pits,  which  they 
roofed  over  with  peat,  branches  and  sand.  Poor  Bering 
was  ill  with  scurvy.  His  men  wrapped  him  in  fur  and 
put  him  in  the  deepest,  warmest  pit.  Here  the  sand 
caved  in  about  him,  pressing  the  fur  covering  closer 
and  keeping  out  the  cold.     As  the  season  advanced  he 


EXPLOEEES  ON  THE  PACIFIC  83 

grew  worse,  and  in  the  cold  month  of  December  he 
died  in  his  cheerless  sand-pit.  Sadly  the  men  buried 
the  body  of  their  leader  on  the  lonely  island.  Before 
starting  home  in  the  spring  they  placed  a  wooden  cross 
above  his  grave.  To  this  day  a  cross  like  it  is  kept 
upon  that  spot,  and  the  island  bears  his  name. 

Bering  had  learned  there  was  no  Gamoland,  and  no 
open-water  passage  north  of  America.  He  had  dis- 
covered the  North  Pacific  coast  of  that  new  continent, 
and  his  name  was  given  to  the  sea  and  strait  between 
Asia  and  America. 

But  these  honors  did  not  come  to  his  name  at  once. 
The  Eussians,  who  had  never  seen  America,  nor  the 
Pacific  coast,  declared  that  Bering,  who  had  lost  his 
life  in  discovery,  was  all  wrong.  They  said  that  what 
he  took  to  be  the  coast-line  must  have  been  islands ; 
that  the  fog  was  too  heavy  for  him  to  find  the  water 
passage  to  the  Atlantic;  that  he  was  too  homesick  and 
ill  with  scurvy  to  search  as  he  should  have  done  for 
the  North-west  Passage.  Other  countries  had  much 
the  same  opinion.  Even  England  offered  a  prize  for 
its  discovery. 

Cook. 

The  Pacific  coast  of  Canada  was  first  explored  by 
an  Englishman.  While  Verendrye  at  his  lonely  trad- 
ing-post was  studying  birch-bark  maps  and  dreaming 
of  the  Western  Sea,  a  little  boy  named  James  Cook  lived 
in  a  tiny  thatch-roofed  cottage  in  England.  As  the 
family  was  large,  and  the  father  a  poor  man,  James 
could  not  be  sent  to  school  until  he  was  over  twelve 


84       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

years  old.  He  learned  so  quickly  then  that  he  soon 
passed  the  others  and  became  head  of  the  school. 

At  this  time  all  England  was  talking  of  the  North- 
west Passage  and  the  mystery  of  the  unexplored  seas, 
and  the  boy  heard  stories  of  roaring  waves,  of  burning 
mountains,  of  sea-cows,  and  of  beautiful  sea-otters, 
until  he  longed  with  all  his  heart  to  be  a  sailor.  But, 
like  Columbus,  another  profession  was  chosen  for  him. 
His  father  sent  him  to  a  shop  to  learn  to  be  an  ordin- 
ary shop-keeper.  James  never  meant  to  stay  there.  It 
is  said  that  in  less  than  two  years  he  was  out  of  the 
shop  working  on  a  coal-boat,  and  so  grimy  and  black 
that  his  own  people  would  not  have  known  him.  But 
what  did  that  matter  ?    He  was  working  his  way  up. 

Years  went  by.  The  English  still  talked  of  the 
North-west  Passage  and  the  Pacific  coast,  and  Drake's 
voyage  was  not  forgotten.  At  last  came  a  time  when 
they  decided  to  send  out  an  expedition  to  explore  the 
north-west  coast  of  America,  to  search  for  the  North- 
west Passage  and  to  find  out  for  a  certainty  how  the 
coast-line  lay.  The  commander  chosen  for  this  import- 
ant expedition  was  Captain  James  Cook,  once  the  boy 
on  the  grimy  coal-boat,  but  now  one  of  the  most  highly 
honored  sea-captains  in  England. 

In  the  summer  of  1776  Cook  set  out  upon  his  jour- 
ney and  sailed  round  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  He 
could  not  go  direct  to  America,  for  he  had  a  load  of 
sheep,  pigs,  and  goats  to  put  off  at  New  Zealand,  and 
it  was  almost  two  years  before  he  reached  the  new  con- 
tinent. During  that  time  he  made  up  his  mind  to  try 
for  the  twenty  thousand  pounds'  reward  which  Eng- 


EXPLOEEKS  OJST  THE  PACIFIC  85 

land  had  offered  for  the  discovery  of  the  open-water 
passage  through  America. 

In  the  month  of  March,  1778,  Captain  Cook  began 
to  see  signs  of  the  new  land.  He  meant  first  to  explore 
the  Strait  of  Juan  de  Fuca,  which  he  named  after  the 
Greek  pilot  who  had  lived  years  before  and  had  declared 
that  he  had  discovered  such  a  strait ;  but  he  was  too  far 
out  to  find  the  opening,  and  a  storm  drove  him  north- 
ward. When  the  sky  cleared  he  saw  the  shore  of  what 
is  now  Vancouver  Island. 

Discovering  a  calm  bay,  the  navigator  turned  in. 
Indians  came  out  in  canoes  to  meet  him,  scattering 
white  feathers  in  the  air  as  a  sign  of  peace,  and  singing 
a  song  of  welcome  as  they  slowly  advanced.  One 
Indian,  whom  Cook  took  to  be  the  chief,  was  most 
elaborately  painted ;  his  hair  was  decorated  with  many 
feathers,  and  on  his  canoe  was  carved  an  enormous 
head.  He  made  a  long  speech  during  which  he  shook 
a  rattle  in  each  hand.  The  white  men  did  not  under- 
stand a  word  he  said,  for,  coming  by  sea  as  they  did, 
they  had  had  no  chance  to  get  interpreters.  However, 
they  took  his  speech  to  be  an  invitation  to  land. 

Cook  did  not  know  that  he  had  come  to  a  great 
island  which  would  afterwards  be  called  Vancouver, 
but  thought  he  was  on  the  shore  of  the  mainland.  He 
learned  that  the  Indians  called  the  bay  ]NTootka,  after 
their  tribe,  a  name  it  still  bears. 

Though  the  Indians  showed  but  little  surprise  at 
the  white  strangers,  some  stayed  beside  the  big  boat  all 
night.  They  all  wished  to  trade  with  the  white  men, 
but  what  they  wanted  most  was  any  kind  of  metal. 
They  were  glad  to  give  the  sailors  beaverskins  for  the 


86       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

brass  buttons  on  their  clothes.  These  buttons  they 
would  at  once  use  to  decorate  their  noses  and  ears. 
When  the  white  men  began  to  repair  their  boat,  they 
came  crowding  about  to  bargain  for  the  old  rusty  nails, 
and  Cook  and  his  men  soon  had  a  valuable  pile  of 
beaverskins  that  would  make  them  rich  in  other  lands, 
though  very  few  had  any  buttons  left  to  wear  home  to 
England,  and  not  an  old  rusty  nail  was  to  be  found 
about  the  ship ! 

These  Indians  had  elaborate  costumes.  Most  of  them 
wore  caps  made  of  matting,  shaped  like  a  flower-pot 
turned  upside  down,  and  garments  trimmed  at  the 
upper  edge  with  fur  and  at  the  lower  edge  with  fringe. 
Over  this,  when  it  was  not  too  hot,  they  wore  their  bear 
or  sea-otter  robes.  Some  had  bracelets  of  sea-shells,  and 
all  had  feathers  in  their  hair. 

They  did  much  singing  for  their  visitors,  keeping 
time  with  their  paddles  or  their  hands.  Their  voices 
were  soft  and  sweet,  and  the  singing  was  like  church 
music.  They  gave  the  white  men  no  trouble,  except 
that  a  few  of  the  weaker  ones  could  not  resist  the  temp- 
tation of  trying  to  steal  the  wonderful  things  on  the 
big  boat. 

Cook  was  delighted  to  see  that  two  of  the  Indians 
had  spoons  which  white  men  had  made.  They  wore 
these  spoons  as  ornaments  strung  about  their  necks. 
It  never  occurred  to  him  that  they  might  get  the  spoons 
from  the  Spaniards  to  the  south,  or  from  the  Russian 
traders  who  had  followed  Bering  to  the  north;  but  he 
felt  sure  they  had  got  them  from  the  Hudson  Bay 
traders  whom  they  had  reached  by  means  of  a  water  pas- 
sage.    He  hurried  on  the  repairs  of  the  boat  that  he 


EXPLORERS  ON  THE  PACIFIC  87 

might  search  for  that  passage.  Going  ashore  for  wood 
was  pleasure  as  well  as  work  for  the  men.  They  were 
never  tired  of  wandering  through  the  magnificent 
forests,  or  of  gazing  at  the  hills  covered  with  evergreen 
trees. 

Before  the  1st  of  May  Cook  was  ready  to  start 
northward  and  continue  his  exploring.  Indians  crowded 
round  to  say  good-bye  and  to  give  and  receive  pres- 
ents. The  chief  who  had  welcomed  him  on  his  arrival 
there  was  among  the  last  to  leave  the  ship.  As  a  part- 
ing gift  he  gave  Cook  his  new  beaverskin  robe,  and  was 
made  perfectly  happy  when  Cook  in  return  presented 
him  with  his  broadsword. 

Had  Cook  known  how  truly  the  porpoises  could 
foretell  bad  weather  he  would  have  listened  to  their 
warning  and  stayed  in  port  longer.  No  sooner  was  he 
fairly  started  than  a  storm  came  up,  and  he  did  not  see 
land  again  for  several  days.  Far  north  he  sailed  now, 
where  Bering  had  been.  He  saw  the  great  snow-capped 
mount  of  St.  Elias  reaching  up  to  the  clouds,  and  the 
bright  lights  from  the  burning  volcanoes  which  Bering 
had  gazed  upon.  He  saw  the  rocks  and  icebergs  and 
heard  the  breakers  roar. 

Though  there  were  no  lighthouses  to  warn  him  of  the 
dangerous  coast  in  foggy  weather,  he  was  not  ship- 
wrecked, for  the  walruses  were  there,  lying  upon  the 
ice  or  rocks  in  herds  of  many  hundreds.  Their  roaring 
could  be  heard  at  a  great  distance,  and  at  night,  or  in 
a  heavy  fog,  the  sailors  knew  by  that  noise  when  they 
were  near  dangerous  rocks.  Some  of  the  walruses  were 
always  on  the  watch,  and  if  a  boat  came  near  would 
waken  those  beside  them,  and  in  that  way  the  alarm 


88   WHEKE  THE  BUFFALO  KOAMED 

was  passed  along.  They  thus  served  as  fog-horns  for 
the  Indians  and  the  early  explorers. 

If  you  look  at  the  map  of  Alaska  you  will  see  Cook's 
Inlet.  It  was  there  that  he  thought  he  had  come  to  a 
water  passage  through  the  continent.  He  sailed  up  the 
inlet  until  he  found  to  his  disappointment  that  it  ended 
in  a  river.  Afterwards  he  went  through  Bering  Sea  and 
Bering  Strait  and  learned  that  Bering  was  right  when 
he  declared  that  there  was  no  water  passage  which 
would  take  ships  through  to  the  Atlantic. 

He  then  turned  his  course  from  these  cold  regions 
of  fogs,  storms  and  icebergs  toward  the  warm  Sand- 
wich Islands.  Poor  Cook  never  reached  England  again. 
He  had  not  been  wise  in  his  treatment  of  the  natives 
of  the  Sandwich  Islands,  and  was  killed  by  them  while 
stopping  there  on  his  way  home. 

Vancouvee. 

The  search  for  rich  furs  brought  many  Spanish  and 
Russian  fur-traders  to  the  west  coast  of  America,  and 
after  Cook's  voyage  there  was  some  trouble  at  Nootka. 
The  Spaniards  seized  the  ship  and  little  fort  of  Captain 
Meares,  an  English  fur-trader.  The  English  became 
alarmed,  fearing  that  Spain  and  Russia  would  have  all 
the  coast,  and  that  in  spite  of  Cook's  discovery  England 
would  be  left  with  no  foothold  on  that  coast. 

Captain  George  Vancouver  was  then  sent  to  this 
western  coast  to  look  after  the  rights  of  England.  He 
was  also  to  search  for  the  water  passage,  for  Cook's 
report  that  there  was  none  had  met  with  much  the  same 
fate  as  Bering's.  People  said  Cook  could  not  find  it 
because  he  was  too  busy  trading  rusty  nails  for  furs. 


EXPLOKEES  ON  THE  PACIFIC  89 

Captain  Vancouver  had  been  with  Cook,  and  knew 
that  he  was  right ;  so  when  he  found  that  he  was  to  go 
again,  he  declared  that  he  would  explore  the  North- 
West  so  thoroughly  that  all  the  world  would  have  to 
admit  there  was  no  open-water  passage. 

In  the  spring  of  1791  he  reached  the  western  coast 
of  America.  First  he  explored  Juan  de  Fuca  Strait, 
and  learned  for  himself  that  it  was  between  the  main- 
land and  a  great  island.  The  huge  mountain  peak, 
which  in  clear  weather  is  seen  from  many  miles  out  at 
sea,  he  named  Mount  Baker,  after  his  lieutenant,  who 
was  first  to  catch  sight  of  it.  They  also  discovered 
Puget  Sound,  and  named  it  for  one  of  the  men. 

Afterwards  he  went  round  to  Nootka  to  meet  the 
Spaniard,  Don  Quadra.  Indians  came  in  their  painted 
and  carved  canoes  to  see  him  off.  On  his  way  he  passed 
some  of  their  villages  of  square  log  houses,  built  in 
rows  as  straight  as  a  white  man's  street.  As  he  neared 
Nootka  his  vessel  and  Don  Quadra's  saluted  each  other 
with  a  great  roar  of  guns.  Vancouver  then  sent  Don 
Quadra  an  invitation  to  breakfast  with  him  on  his  ship, 
the  Discovery. 

Now  the  great  Indian  chief  Maquinna  had  been 
watching  what  was  going  on,  and  made  up  his  mind 
that  he  was  not  going  to  have  white  men  come  to  his 
country  and  give  breakfasts  without  inviting  him.  He 
went  out  in  his  canoe  and  climbed  aboard  the  Discovery. 
As  it  was  a  warm  day,  he  was  not  wearing  his  sea-otter 
robe,  or  his  gay  paint  and  feathers,  and  the  sailors  who 
saw  him  coming  had  no  idea  he  was  the  chief,  but  sup- 
posing him  to  be  only  some  ordinary,  inquisitive  Indian, 
tumbled  him  overboard.     Maquinna  was  now  doubly 


90       WHEEE   THE  BUFFALO  KOAMED 

insulted,  and  made  sure  that  the  "  white  chiefs  "  should 
hear  what  had  happened  and  how  he  felt  about  it. 

"  It  will  never  do  to  offend  the  Indians,"  thought 
the  white  men.  So  when  Don  Quadra  gave  a  dinner 
for  the  English,  a  special  invitation  was  sent  Maquinna. 
Afterwards  Vancouver  and  Don  Quadra  visited  his 
village,  and  Don  Quadra  gave  a  dinner  there  and  took 
the  chief's  daughter  to  the  feast.  Maquinna  was  flat- 
tered by  the  attention  and  forgot  the  incident  of  the 
morning.  Later  he  returned  the  visit  in  the  most 
amiable  manner.  Indeed  he  and  his  family  came  to 
see  the  white  men  so  often,  and  stayed  so  late,  that 
Vancouver  became  very  tired  of  them,  for  they  were 
great  beggars.  They  wanted  everything  they  took  a 
fancy  to,  and  if  told  they  could  not  have  the  particular 
object  they  had  set  their  hearts  upon,  they  would  pre- 
tend to  be  greatly  offended.  But  as  soon  as  they  saw 
something  else  they  wanted  they  would  come  back  and 
beg  again. 

Vancouver  and  Don  Quadra  gave  their  names  to  the 
great  island,  but  the  Spanish  part  of  the  name  was  soon 
dropped,  and  it  has  ever  since  been  known  as  Vancou- 
ver Island.  With  regard  to  the  international  agreement 
between  England  and  Spain,  the  opinions  of  the  two 
men  differed  so  widely  that  all  they  could  do  was  to 
send  messages  home  for  instructions. 

Vancouver  then  began  to  explore  the  coast.  He 
worked  northward  from  New  Spain,  and  when  fall 
came  went  to  the  Sandwich  Islands  for  the  winter.  In 
the  spring  he  sailed  north  and  worked  towards  the 
south  until  he  came  to  the  same  place  where  he  had 
left  off  when  exploring  northward.    Amidst  loud  cheers 


EXPLORERS  ON  THE  PACIFIC  91 

they  named  that  spot  Point  Conclusion.  The  work  was 
finished  now.  He  had  carefully  explored  the  west 
coast.    Every  bay  and  inlet  had  been  tried. 

That  night  Vancouver  gave  his  men  a  grand  dinner 
on  board  the  ship  in  honor  of  having  at  least  obtained 
sure  proof  that  no  one  could  ever  sail  through  America. 
By  taking  home  such  correct  charts  of  the  country  that 
everyone  had  to  admit  there  was  no  open-water  passage 
through  the  continent,  Vancouver  accomplished  the  task 
he  had  undertaken. 


CHAPTEK  XI. 

The  Selkirk  Settlers. 

You  have  all  heard  the  story  of  King  Bruce  and  the 
spider,  the  spider  that  tried  nine  times  before  it  suc- 
ceeded in  reaching  its  web,  and  that  never  once  during 
its  many  tumbles  stopped  for  a  moment  to  crawl  into 
a  crack  for  a  rest,  or  to  grumble  to  the  other  spiders 
about  the  hard  time  it  was  having.  When  King  Bruce 
saw  it  at  last  reach  its  web,  he,  too, 

"  Tried  once  more,  as  he  tried  before, 
And  that  time  he  did  not  fail." 

ISTow,  this  is  not  the  story  of  a  spider,  nor  yet  of  a 
king,  but  of  a  colony  of  people  whose  best  efforts  fell 
quite  as  flat  as  the  spider's,  and  just  as  many  times,  but 
who  kept  on  trying  until  they,  like  it,  won  their  way  to 
success.  That  success  was  the  settling  of  a  country 
much  larger  than  King  Bruce' s  lands. 

Ear  away  in  Scotland  and  Ireland  lived  many  people 
who  had  only  small  farms,  not  much  larger  than  a  gar- 
den, and  others  who  had  no  farms  at  all.  A  good  man, 
Lord  Selkirk,  seeing  what  a  hard  time  they  had  to  earn 
a  living,  made  up  his  mind  to  give  these  poor  men  each 
a  whole  farm  in  the  land  of  animals  and  Indians,  where 
there  was  plenty  of  room.  This  colony,  or  settlement 
of  people,  he  decided  to  establish  at  the  junction  of  the 

02 


THE   SELKIRK  SETTLERS  93 

Red  and  Assiniboine  rivers,  near  where  La  Verendrye 
built  Fort  Rouge. 

Some  people  laughed,  and  said  the  idea  was  ridicu- 
lous, as  it  was  too  cold  there  for  people  to  live  and  raise 
crops,  and  any  who  tried  it  would  certainly  be  frozen 
out  or  driven  away  by  the  Indians.  Others  were  unkind 
enough  to  say  Lord  Selkirk  was  doing  it  in  order  to 
make  something  for  himself.  Such  talk  made  no  differ- 
ence in  his  lordship's  plans.  He  looked  forward  to  see- 
ing the  poor  people  happy  and  golden  grain  growing 
on  the  prairie  along  the  banks  of  these  rivers. 

The  first  thing  was  to  get  the  land ;  for,  as  we  know, 
the  spot  chosen  by  Lord  Selkirk  was  in  Rupert's  Land 
and  belonged  to  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company.  For- 
tunately for  his  scheme,  this  great  company  was  pleased 
to  have  a  settlement  there.  They  saw  that  the  wild 
animals  were  being  driven  farther  back,  and  knew  that 
if  they  disappeared  from  that  part,  food  and  clothing 
could  not  be  had  unless  someone  worked  the  land  and 
raised  wheat,  barley  and  flax,  and  kept  cattle  and  sheep. 
Besides,  a  colony  would  be  a  place  where  the  officers  of 
the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  could  live  in  comfort  with- 
out leaving  Rupert's  Land.  So  they  were  ready  to  be 
interested  in  Lord  Selkirk's  colony,  and  willingly  sold 
him  for  that  purpose  over  one  hundred  thousand  square 
miles  of  land. 

Now  that  the  first  step  had  been  taken,  the  next 
thing  was  to  place  the  people  there.  This  is  why  one 
gray  day,  in  a  Scotch  village  called  Helmsdale,  a  little 
band  was  waiting  for  a  vessel  that  was  to  take  them 
away  to  the  great  new  country.  Life  had  not  been  easy 
for  them,  and  some  had  recently  been  turned  off  their 
7 


94   WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

tiny  f anns ;  yet  it  was  their  homeland,  and  they  might 
never  see  it  again.  Sadly  they  bade  a  last  good-bye  to 
their  native  hills  and  vales  and  lovely  glens.  Among 
them  were  children  too  young  to  understand  what  it 
all  meant,  and  who  were  delighted  at  the  prospect  of  a 
long  boat-ride.  Many  were  hugging  in  their  arms  the 
treasures  of  their  childhood,  and  here  and  there  were 
boys  tugging  at  the  collars  of  the  faithful  collie  dogs 
they  would  not  leave  behind. 

A  tall,  pleasant-faced  man  was  going  about  among 
them,  and,  in  the  Gaelic  tongue  they  spoke  and  loved  so 
well,  was  telling  them  of  the  new  country  and  promis- 
ing to  do  all  he  could  to  help  them  make  a  start,  assur- 
ing them  that  he  would  visit  them  soon  in  their  new 
prairie  homes.  This  tall  man  was  Lord  Selkirk,  who 
had  come  to  see  his  people  safely  off. 

At  last  the  boat  arrived  and  all  was  ready  for  the 
start.  As  they  were  slowly  taken  out  from  the  shores 
of  their  beloved  Scotland  they  sang  the  familiar  psalms 
which  they  had  sung  so  often  in  the  village  church. 
On  the  shore,  watching  until  they  were  out  of  sight,  was 
a  group  of  sorrowing  friends  and  relatives.  In  their 
midst  stood  Lord  Selkirk.  His  great  enterprise  was 
now  begun. 

On  the  coast  of  Ireland  they  were  joined  by  their 
Irish  companions  who  were  going  with  them  to  find 
new  homes.  The  whole  company  was  under  the  direc- 
tion of  Captain  Macdonell,  who  had  been  chosen  by 
Lord  Selkirk  as  leader. 

The  route  taken  to  Red  River  at  that  time  was  by 
way  of  Hudson  Bay.  So  the  little  vessel,  dependent 
upon  wind  and  weather,  was  sixty  days  in  crossing 


THE  SELKIRK  SETTLERS  95 

the  ocean.  The  children  who  had  wanted  a  long  boat- 
ride  had  their  wish,  and  more  than  their  wish,  for  they 
had  never  dreamed  of  such  huge  icebergs  as  they  saw 
when  sailing  towards  the  great  bay  in  the  north. 

The  rivers  were  already  frozen  when  they  reached 
York  Factory,  on  Hudson  Bay,  where  they  found 
shelter  until  houses  could  be  built  for  them,  and  in 
which  they  might  remain  till  the  ice  broke  up  in  the 
spring.  Here  the  boys  who  had  brought  their  dogs  had 
a  lively  time  keeping  them  out  of  fights  with  the  wild 
"  Husky  "  dogs  that  lived  about  the  fort.  The  men  were 
kept  busy  getting  wood  for  fuel.  The  intense  cold 
of  that  first  winter  was  the  beginning  of  all  their  hard- 
ships. 

Directly  after  New  Year's  they  began  to  make  flat- 
bottomed  boats  for  the  journey  up  the  river  and  across 
Lake  Winnipeg  to  their  new  homes.  It  was  the  1st  of 
July  before  the  ice  was  away  so  that  they  could  set  out. 
To  the  poor  people,  travelling  in  a  way  entirely  new 
to  them,  the  boats  seemed  very  heavy,  and  it  was  diffi- 
cult to  get  them  over  the  many  portages  and  rapids. 
Though  very  tired  when  they  reached  Red  River,  they 
had  only  a  few  hours  to  rest  before  their  first  mis- 
fortune befell  them. 

The  North-West  Company  had  heard  of  their  coming 
and  were  greatly  displeased.  They  thought  a  colony 
would  help  their  rival,  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company, 
to  grow  and  prosper,  and  would  drive  the  wild  animals 
away  so  that  they  would  have  to  move  their  trading- 
posts  farther  back.  Moreover,  they  considered  the  Hud- 
son's Bay  Company  had  no  right  to  the  land  they  had 
sold  Lord  Selkirk,  because  the  North-West  Company, 


96       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

following  Verendrye,  had  reached  the  Red  River  first. 
Declaring  that  Lord  Selkirk  should  start  no  colony 
there,  they  hired  a  band  of  half-breeds — or  Metis,  as 
they  were  called — to  drive  his  colonists  away. 

After  painting  their  faces  and  putting  feathers  in 
their  hair  to  make  them  look  like  savage  Indians,  the 
Metis  appeared  on  the  scene  a  few  hours  after  the  tired 
colonists  had  reached  their  destination,  and  told  them 
they  must  go  away  at  once  or  else  be  driven  off  with 
guns  and  tomahawks.  The  colonists  were  terrified, 
especially  as  they  could  not  understand  the  mixture  of 
Indian  and  French  the  Metis  spoke.  However,  after 
much  talking  and  sign-making,  they  learned  that  these 
people  were  willing  to  guide  them  to  Pembina,  a  Hud- 
son's Bay  Company  post  seventy  miles  away. 

The  Metis  offered  to  carrv  the  children,  but  for  doinsr 
so  wanted  evervthins:  which  took  their  fancv.  Before 
they  could  set  out,  the  men  parted  with  their  guns  and 
the  women  with  their  wedding-rings.  One  little  girl 
had  brought  her  only  toy,  a  tiny  sheep,  which  she  kept 
tied  to  a  string  about  her  neck.  The  half-breed  who 
took  her  up  on  his  horse  wanted  that  sheep.  Putting 
his  ugly  painted  face  and  feathered  head  very  near  to 
hers,  he  made  signs  that  he  would  run  away  with  her 
if  he  did  not  get  it.  Her  mother  told  her  to  give  it  to 
him.  He  held  it  up  and  laughed,  and  then  put  the 
string  about  his  own  neck,  but  the  little  girl  cried  when 
she  saw  her  poor  sheep  dangling  there.  He  soon  gave 
it  back  to  her.  It  may  be  that  he  never  meant  to  keep 
it,  or  perhaps  he  had  a  kind  heart  and  did  not  wish  to 
make  her  unhappy. 

It  was  a  strange  procession  that  started  off  that  day. 


THE   SELKIRK  SETTLERS  97 

The  savages  of  the  wilderness  were  riding  on  fine  horses, 
and  the  white  people  were  trudging  along  behind  like 
servants.  Sometimes  a  mischievous  half-breed,  wanting 
a  little  fun,  would  ride  out  of  sight  with  one  of  the 
children,  and  the  mother,  fearing  he  would  take  her 
darling  away  to  his  lodge,  would  run  screaming  after 
him.  However,  no  harm  was  done  the  little  ones. 
Though  it  was  a  terrible  tramp  over  the  rough  ground, 
they  all  reached  Pembina  in  safety.  There  they  spent 
the  winter,  living  in  tents  like  the  Indians.  Being  as 
yet  unable  to  hunt  or  drive  dog-sleighs,  they  had  to 
take  what  they  were  given  to  eat,  and  in  return  bring 
wood  and  water  for  the  Indians  and  half-breeds. 

Early  in  May  they  went  back  to  the  Red  River  to 
make  a  beginning.  That  year  both  fish  and  berries 
were  scarce,  and  often  they  had  nothing  to  eat  but  the 
Tasteless  wild  parsnips  or  boiled  nettles.  But  hopes 
were  high  when  the  grain  began  to  grow.  Long  before 
it  was  ready  to  harvest,  hungry  blackbirds  came  in  great 
flocks,  and  though  all  sorts  of  startling  scarecrows  were 
made,  men,  women  and  children  had  to  watch  from 
morning  till  night  while  the  precious  little  crop  was 
ripening. 

Though  their  seed  wheat  yielded  abundantly,  they 
had  not  raised  enough  both  for  food  and  seed  for  another 
crop ;  so  in  the  fall  they  went  again  to  Pembina  to  spend 
the  winter  with  the  friendly  Indians  and  half-breeds. 
The  following  spring  they  returned  to  labor  on  their 
farms.  They  had  no  trees  to  cut  down  before  they  could 
plant  their  crops,  but  neither  had  they  horses  nor  oxen 
yet,  and  sowing  and  reaping  by  hand  was  slow  work. 
The  Indians  would  sometimes  walk  about  the  settle- 


98       WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

ment  to  see  how  their  white  neighbors  were  getting 
along,  and  were  always  ready  to  tell  them  how  much 
easier  it  was  to  live  by  hunting. 

As  the  first  crops  were  not  large  enough  to  support 
the  settlers,  Governor  Macdonell  issued  a  proclama- 
tion— that  is,  sent  out  an  order — that  no  one  should 
send  fish  or  game  away  from  Lord  Selkirk's  colony. 
Upon  hearing  this,  the  North-West  Company,  who  con- 
sidered the  territory  their  own  to  do  with  as  they 
wished,  again  determined  to  put  an  end  to  the  colony. 

First  they  coaxed  a  large  number  of  the  colonists 
to  go  away  by  telling  them  how  much  easier  they  would 
have  it  in  some  other  parts  of  the  country.  To  those 
who  would  not  be  coaxed  they  issued  a  proclamation 
ordering  "  all  settlers  to  retire  immediately  from  the 
river,  and  no  appearance  of  a  colony  to  remain." 
Because  the  settlers  would  not  heed  this,  they  drove 
them  away,  spoiled  their  crops,  and  burned  their  houses. 
The  poor  people  took  refuge  at  Norway  House,  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company's  post  north  of  Lake  Winni- 
peg- 

Soon  after,  a  man  whom  Lord  Selkirk  had  sent  out 
to  help  them  brought  them  back  tired  and  wretched, 
but,  like  the  spider,  not  discouraged  by  the  fall.  To 
make  matters  worse,  others  arrived  just  at  this  time. 
All  through  the  weary  journey  the  new-comers  had  been 
looking  forward  to  a  good  rest  and  a  long  talk  round  the 
hearth-fires  of  their  friends,  whom  they  now  found 
homeless  and  more  miserable  than  themselves.  There 
could  be  no  rest  for  anyone  at  Red  River  yet.  Once 
more  all  must  go  away  for  the  winter. 

Early  the  next  spring  they  were  back  toiling  from 


THE  SELKIRK  SETTLERS  99 

morning  till  night  to  get  the  seed  into  the  ground  at 
the  proper  time,  and  to  make  the  most  of  the  short 
season.  One  evening,  when  most  of  the  work  was  over, 
some  women  and  children  saw  a  party  of  men,  hideous 
with  paint  and  feathers,  and  armed  with  guns,  toma- 
hawks, and  bows  and  arrows,  coming  toward  the  settle- 
ment on  horseback.  Though  they  looked  like  Indians 
on  the  war-path,  even  the  children  knew  they  were  the 
JSTor'- Westers  and  their  Metis,  and  rushed  everywhere 
giving  warning. 

When  the  boy  in  the  watch-tower  of  Fort  Douglas, 
the  Hudson's  Bay  Company's  post  at  Red  River,  gave 
the  alarm,  Governor  Semple  at  once  looked  through 
a  spy-glass,  and  seeing  the  painted  and  feathered  band 
of  men  approaching,  gathered  together  about  twenty 
of  his  best  men  and  marched  out,  armed,  to  meet  them, 
hoping  to  arrange  for  the  safety  of  the  settlers.  The 
Nor'-Westers  circled  round  his  little  band  asking  what 
he  wanted.  He  replied  by  asking  what  they  wanted. 
In  some  way  a  shot  was  fired,  and  in  the  noise  and 
confusion  and  the  war-whoops  of  the  Nor' -Westers  that 
followed,  no  one  knew  just  who  fired  first — but  it  was 
supposed  to  be  one  of  the  Nor'-Westers.  The  Governor 
and  many  of  his  men  were  killed,  and  the  rest  taken 
prisoners.  This  engagement  is  known  in  history  as  the 
battle  or  skirmish  of  Seven  Oaks.  As  none  were  now 
left  to  defend  the  settlers,  the  Nor'-Westers  soon  drove 
them  off  in  any  way  they  liked  and  burned  the  few  huts 
that  had  been  put  up  since  their  last  raid.  They  then 
took  possession  of  all  that  was  left  of  Eort  Douglas. 

But  help  was  coming.  Ear  away  in  Scotland  Lord 
Selkirk  had  heard  of  the  treatment  his  colony  was 


100     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

receiving,  and  was  now  on  his  way  to  them.  He  was 
already  in  Canada  when  news  of  this  last  outrage 
reached  him.  With  well-armed  soldiers  he  started  at 
once  for  Red  River.  On  his  way  he  took  possession  of 
Fort  William,  the  ISTorth-West  Company's  headquarters, 
arrested  some  who  had  been  leaders  in  abusing  his 
colony,  and  sent  them  to  Montreal  for  trial. 

At  Fort  William  Lord  Selkirk  was  obliged  to  wait 
till  the  ice  cleared  away  in  the  spring  before  he  could 
go  on  to  his  poor  people.  He  then  brought  them  back 
from  Norway  House,  gathered  them  all  together,  talked 
with  them,  and  made  plans  for  their  future  welfare. 
He  assured  them  a  Scotch  minister  would  be  sent  to 
them.  "  Here,"  he  said  to  them  at  one  meeting,  "  you 
shall  build  your  church,"  and  on  that  spot  they  soon 
after  built  St.  John's  church.  He  laid  out  sites  for 
schoolhouses,  roads,  mills  and  bridges ;  and  to  that 
first  settlement  in  all  Rupert's  Land  he  gave  the  name 
Kildonan,  a  name  taken  from  their  old  Scottish  home, 
and  very  dear  to  them. 

Lord  Selkirk  also  had  a  meeting  with  the  Indians, 
and  smoked  the  peace-pipe  with  them.  Though  he  had 
bought  the  land  from  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company,  it 
had  really  belonged  to  the  Indians  first.  As  they  had  a 
rightful  claim  to  the  country,  and  must  be  kept  on 
friendly  terms,  he  made  a  treaty  with  them.  By  this 
treaty  Lord  Selkirk  promised  to  give  each  of  the  two 
tribes  having  a  claim  on  that  territory  one  hundred 
pounds  of  tobacco  each  year,  and  they  in  return  were  to 
give  up  the  right  to  the  land.  Like  all  grown-up  white 
people's  agreements,  it  was  written  in  so  many  large 
words  that  it  was  difficult  to  understand.     Of  course 


\ 


THE  SELKIRK  SETTLERS  101 

it  was  carefully  explained  to  the  Indians,  who  thought 
it  a  fine  bit  of  writing,  and  all  said,  "Ho !  Ho !"  to  the 
part  about  the  tobacco,  y 

Lord  Selkirk  wrote  his  name  on  the  treaty  papers, 
but  the  five  chiefs  signed  theirs  in  a  different  way. 
Instead  of  writing  his  name  each  made  his  mark, — that 
is,  he  drew  a  picture  of  the  animal  or  bird  which  was 
his  family  crest,  or  totem,  as  Indians  say.  When  you 
see  the  long  hard  names  the  chiefs  had,  you  will  think 
that  the  drawings  were  much  easier  to  put  down,  even 
if  the  Indians  could  have  written  them.  They  were: 
Mache  Wheseab,  Mechkaddewikonaie,  Kay aj  iskebinoa, 
Pegowis,  and  Ouckedoat. 

Delighted  with  the  "  Silver  Chief,"  as  they  called 
Lord  Selkirk,  the  Indians  made  their  finest  speeches 
for  him.  They  were  glad  of  a  chance  to  tell  him 
they  were  friendly  to  his  people.  Chief  Pegowis 
said  in  his  speech : 

"At  the  arrival  of  the  settlers  we  were  frequently 
solicited  by  the  North-West  Company  to  frighten 
them  away,  but  we  were  pleased  to  see  that  our  Great 
Father  had  sent  some  of  his  white  children  to  live 
among  us,  and  we  refused  to  do  or  say  anything 
against  them.  .  .  .  We  refused  to  acknowledge 
the  speeches  they  wished  to  put  into  our  mouths.  We 
are  informed  that  they  told  a  tale  that  it  was  the 
Indians  who  drove  them  away  and  murdered  the 
children  of  our  Great  Eather,  but  it  is  a  falsehood." 

Others  expressed  themselves  in  much  the  same  way. 
One  said,  among  other  things:  "We  have  often  been 
told  you  were  our  enemy ;  but  to-day  we  have  the  hap- 


102     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  EOAMED 

piness  to  hear  from  your  own  mouth  the  words  of  a 
true  friend." 

Mechkaddewikonaie  in  his  speech  said :  "  I  am  happy 
to  see  here  our  father.  Clouds  have  overwhelmed  me. 
I  was  a  long  time  in  doubt  and  difficulty,  but  now  I 
begin  to  see  clearly.  We  have  reason  to  be  thankful 
this  day.  We  know  the  dangers  you  must  have  en- 
countered to  come  this  far.  The  truth  you  have 
spoken  pleases  us.  There  seems  an  end  to  our  dis- 
tress, and  it  is  you  who  have  relieved  us." 

By  this  time,  you  may  be  sure,  the  members  of  the 
North-West  Company  were  not  feeling  friendly  towards 
Lord  Selkirk,  and  while  the  settlers  and  Indians  were 
receiving  him  so  kindly  they  were  making  him  all  the 
trouble  they  could.  In  Montreal  even  those  who  had 
done  the  most  to  send  the  Metis  against  the  colony 
were  declaring  it  was  the  Indians  who  had  driven  away 
the  settlers,  and  that  Lord  Selkirk  had  no  right  to 
arrest  their  men.  Though  they  knew  they  were  telling 
falsehoods,  they  kept  on  talking  until  the  bad  men  who 
had  been  arrested  at  Fort  William  for  causing  the 
trouble  were  let  go  free,  and  the  good  Lord  Selkirk 
had  to  hurry  away  to  defend  himself. 

Meanwhile  the  settlers  must  make  a  fresh  start  on 
the  long,  steep  road  to  success;  but  this  time  Lord 
Selkirk's  visit  made  it  much  easier  to  be  like  the 
spider,  when 

"  Up,  up  it  ran,  not  a  second  it  stayed, 
To  utter  the  least  complaint." 

They  returned  from  Norway  House  so  late  in  the 
spring  that  they  could  get  but  little  grain  in,  and  were 


THE  SELKIRK  SETTLERS  103 

obliged  to  go  again  to  Pembina  for  tbe  winter  and 
fetch  the  water  and  keep  the  fires  going  for  the 
Indians,  who  thought  it  very  fine  to  have  "  palefaces  " 
for  their  servants. 

In  the  spring  (1818)  they  were  back  in  time  to 
sow  all  their  grain  and  make  a  splendid  beginning, 
and  it  did  seem  as  if  no  misfortune  could  befall 
them  this  time.  But  you  remember  the  spider  had 
more  than  four  tumbles,  and  so  had  they.  The  next 
one  came  in  July,  when  everything  was  looking  its 
best.  The  corn  was  in  ear,  the  barley  almost  ripe, 
the  wheat  a  more  abundant  crop  than  ever  before, 
and  visions  of  roasted  corn,  barley  soup,  and  of  fresh 
bread  were  beginning  to  rise  before  the  eyes  of  the 
settlers. 

But  these  visions  were  rudely  broken.  About  five 
o'clock  one  afternoon  it  became  unusually  dark.  Fear- 
ing a  bad  storm,  they  looked  anxiously  at  the  sky.  A 
huge  cloud  was  moving  towards  them  from  the  west. 
A  few  moments  later  it  looked  like  a  snowstorm,  but 
as  it  came  nearer  they  saw  that  the  snowflakes  were 
alive!  It  was  a  storm,  truly,  but  a  storm  of  grass- 
hoppers, millions  and  millions  and  millions  of  them. 
They  covered  the  land  and  devoured  every  green  blade. 
The  settlers  were  helpless.  They  could  only  look  on 
while  their  hard-earned  crops  disappeared.  In  the 
morning  nothing  was  left  but  a  few  heads  of  barley 
that  had  been  missed  by  the  grasshoppers.  These  the 
women  carefully  gathered  in  their  aprons. 

Once  more  the  fruit  of  their  weary  labors  was 
lost.  This  time  they  were  not  at  all  like  the  spider, 
but    like    King    Bruce,  completely    discouraged,   and 


104     WHERE   THE   BUFFALO   ROAMED 

"flung  themselves  down  in  a  lonely  mood,"  not  "to 
think,"  but  to  weep,  the  men  as  well  as  the  women 
and  children.  So  it  happened  that  they  did  not  give 
up  Pembina,  as  they  had  hoped  to  be  able  to  do,  but 
again  took  that  long,  weary  journey  of  seventy  miles 
to  spend  another  winter. 

The  next  summer  was  no  better  for  them.  The 
grasshoppers  of  the  summer  before  had  laid  their  eggs 
in  the  sod  of  the  grassy  plains,  and  the  young  ones  were 
now  hatching.  As  early  as  the  middle  of  June  they 
over-ran  the  harvest-fields  in  greater  numbers  than  in 
the  summer  before.  Nothing  could  grow.  Dozens  of 
hungry  grasshoppers  were  waiting  to  devour  each  green 
blade  as  soon  as  it  appeared.  A  little  later  dead  grass- 
hoppers lay  in  heaps  along  the  river  banks,  making 
both  air  and  water  impure. 

Again  the  settlers  were  quite  like  King  Bruce,  and 
declared  they  would  never  try  again.  Now  the  Indians 
said :  "  Come  buffalo-hunting  with  us,  and  you  will  be 
much  happier."  By  this  time  they  had  learned  to 
hunt  better,  to  walk  on  snowshoes,  and  to  manage  dog- 
sleighs,  and  so  had  a  happier  winter  at  Pembina  than 
they  had  ever  spent  before.  But  the  Indians  could 
all  tell  of  days  of  famine,  and  the  settlers  well  knew 
that  at  such  a  time,  if  without  crops,  they  must  go 
hungry,  and  perhaps  starve  miserably,  as  many  Indians 
had  done;  besides,  living  the  life  of  the  Indians  would 
not  please  the  good  Lord  Selkirk.  So  when  spring 
came  they  returned  to  their  farms. 

To  get  seed  wheat  they  must  go  so  far  south  that, 
though  the  men  started  off  on  snowshoes,  they  brought 
it  back  in  June  in  flat-bottomed  boats.     Fortunately 


THE   SELKIRK  SETTLERS  105 

growth  is  so  rapid  in  that  western  country  that  some 
of  the  grain  ripened,  and  never  again  were  they  with- 
out seed  wheat. 

About  this  time  Lord  Selkirk  sent  out  a  windmill ; 
but  as  no  one  at  Red  River  knew  how  to  set  it  work- 
ing, it  stood  idle  till  a  millwright  from  Scotland  set  it 
going  ten  years  later.  By  that  time  the  crops  were  so 
much  larger  that  they  were  greatly  in  need  of  this 
means  of  getting  help  from  the  Red  River  winds. 

The  windmill  was  one  of  Lord  Selkirk's  last  gifts 
to  the  colonists.  In  1820  he  died.  A  few  years 
later  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  bought  back  the 
country.  In  the  year  1821  the  Hudson's  Bay  Com- 
pany and  the  North-West  Company  were  united.  The 
colonists  then  were  no  longer  troubled  by  the  Nor'- 
Westers,  and  days  of  peace  and  prosperity  followed. 
]STew  settlers  came.  Better  houses  were  put  up.  Cattle 
were  brought  in  until  all  hod  cows  and  oxen  for  the 
farm  work. 

Indians,  gay  and  ugly  in  their  paint  and  feathers, 
would  come  from  their  wild  haunts  and  wander  about 
the  settlement,  watching  everything  that  was  going  on; 
perhaps  telling  the  colonists  that  they  would  not  drudge 
that  way,  nor  give  up  buffalo-hunting  for  all  the  civili- 
zation in  the  world.  But  what  did  the  colonists  care? 
This  was  the  seventh  time  they  had  climbed  up,  and 
they  were  feeling  much  like  the  spider  when  only  "a 
foot  from  his  cobweb  door."  They  had  no  idea  they 
were  so  near  another  fall. 

The  cause  of  the  next  disaster  began  in  the  month 
of  December,  when  a  heavy  snowstorm  came.  For 
several  days  the  snow  fell  steadily,  making  the  day 


106     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

almost  as  dark  as  the  night.  Now  it  happened  that 
those  who  were  living  like  Indians,  hunting  the  buffalo, 
had  gone  to  the  plains.  Of  course  the  animals  felt 
the  storm  long  before  it  came,  and  made  off  to  their 
hidden  shelters.  But  the  hunters,  not  having  the  same 
instinct,  were  overtaken  by  great  clouds  of  snownakes 
that  seemed  to  pour  from  the  sky.  No  food  could  then 
be  found  for  man  or  beast. 

News  reached  the  colony  that  the  hunters  were 
starving.  Though  many  miles  away,  and  dog-sleighs 
the  only  means  of  reaching  them,  the  colonists  gladly 
gave  them  what  help  they  could.  The  poor  hunters 
who  were  found  alive  had  eaten  their  horses,  their 
dogs,  and  even  their  moccasins,  to  keep  from  starving, 
and  were  crawling  along  miserably  through  the  snow. 
Some  were  saved  from  starvation  by  the  few  mouth- 
fuls  of  bread  the  rescuers  could  give  them.  A  man 
and  woman  with  their  three  children  were  dug  out  of  the 
snow,  where  they  had  been  buried  for  three  days  and 
three  nights.  The  woman  and  two  of  the  children  lived. 
Little  did  the  colonists  think,  when  saving  the  lives 
of  the  poor  hunters,  who  were  mostly  half-breeds,  that 
their  own  homes  would  soon  be  swept  away. 

In  the  spring,  when  the  ice  was  breaking  up  and  the 
great  depth  of  snow  was  melting,  the  Red  River  began 
to  rise.  It  went  up  nine  feet  in  twenty-four  hours.  It 
overflowed  the  banks,  and  spread  over  the  fields  till 
even  the  Indian  braves  looked  at  it  with  amazement 
and  exclaimed:  "Yea,  ho!  Yea,  ho!  What  does  it 
mean,  what  does  it  mean?" 

By  the  5th  of  May,  when  in  other  years  the  dry 
clay  on  the  river  banks  was  gleaming  in  the  sun,  the 


THE  SELKIRK  SETTLERS  107 

water  became  so  deep  in  the  settlement  that  the  colon- 
ists had  to  leave  their  homes  and  escape  to  higher 
ground,  leaving  their  property  behind  them.  Every 
boat  in  the  settlement  was  out,  and  the  men  of  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company  were  doing  their  best  in  help- 
ing to  save  lives  and  property.  Screaming  children 
were  taken  to  any  dry  spot  that  could  be  found.  Cattle 
were  hurriedly  driven  through  the  water  out  of  danger, 
while  the  dogs  had  to  save  themselves  by  swimming 
or  by  jumping  on  floating  pieces  of  furniture.  Most 
of  the  houses  were  being  carried  along  by  the  flood. 
Others  were  broken  down  by  floating  ice  and  trees 
that  crashed  against  them.  In  some  of  the  floating 
houses  poor  dogs  were  howling;  in  others  cats  were 
crawling  about;  on  the  roofs  of  others  a  few  chickens 
were  perched. 

Though  many  were  the  narrow  escapes,  only  one 
person  was  drowned.  A  writer  of  these  times  tells  us 
that  a  man  who  had  no  boat  tied  his  oxen  together  and 
put  his  wife  and  children  on  their  backs,  hoping,  as 
indeed  proved  the  case,  that  the  frightened  animals 
would  swim  or  wade  out  of  danger.  One  man,  in  his 
hurry  to  get  out  of  his  already  moving  house,  over- 
turned a  light  and  set  the  house  on  fire.  It  floated 
along  after  the  others,  one  half  under  water,  the  other 
half  in  flames. 

The  colonists  were  almost  discouraged  enough  by 
this  seventh  misfortune  to  leave  Red  River  forever, 
but  when  at  last  the  water  lowered  they  took  heart 
again  and  went  back  to  their  land,  which  was  now  as 
bare  as  when  they  first  went  to  it.  However,  the  hard 
times  coming  after  this  misfortune  were  followed  by 


\ 


108     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

better  days  than  ever.  The  people  began  to  build 
larger  houses  out  of  stone  and  mortar,  with  glass 
windows,  and  these  were  much  brighter  and  pleasanter 
than  the  dull  little  places  they  had  lived  in  before. 
Churches  and  schoolhouses,  too,  were  built.  In  1831, 
the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  erected  a  stronghold  which 
was  to  be  a  place  of  safety  if  the  water  should  rise 
again,  or  if  they  should  be  attacked  by  an  enemy. 
There  were  now  two  parts  to  the  village,  called  Upper 
and  Lower  Fort  Garry. 

Though  the  colony  was  becoming  so  much  larger, 
it  was  only  a  tiny  spot  in  the  country  of  the  Indians. 
The  white  man  may  call  them  "  savages,"  yet  it  must 
be  remembered  that  they  never  harmed  the  settlers, 
whom  they  could  easily  have  wiped  out  of  existence 
had  they  so  wished.  Instead,  they  watched  the  colony 
stretch  back  from  the  Red  River,  taking  in  more  and 
more  of  their  land.  They  moved  back  to  give  the 
white  man  room,  but  they  did  him  no  injury. 

Everything  went  well  at  Red  River  until  the  spring 
of  1852.  It  was  now  twenty-six  years  since  the  great 
flood,  and  they  were  hoping  never  to  have  another. 
But  one  night  in  May  many  of  the  settlers  were 
awakened  by  the  sound  of  splashing  water  in  their 
rooms.  In  the  darkness  those  who  could  reach  their 
boats  hurried  into  them  to  escape  to  the  high  land,  or  to 
the  stronghold  of  Fort  Garry.  Those  who  were  without 
boats  were  in  serious  danger.  Many  waited  on  the  house- 
tops for  help,  while  others  climbed  trees  and  clung 
there  until  a  boat  came  or  daylight  showed  them  some 
way  of  escape. 

It  was  a  worse  flood  than  the  one  in  1826.  The 
channel  of  the  river  had  become  choked  with  floating 


THE   SELKIRK  SETTLERS  109 

ice,  causing  the  water  to  rise  with  great  rapidity,  at 
one  time  going  up  at  the  rate  of  seven  feet  an  hour. 
For  a  distance  of  fourteen  miles  the  water  spread  out 
for  six  miles  on  each  side  of  the  river.  Fences,  houses 
and  barns  floated  off  much  as  they  had  done  twenty- 
six  years  before,  the  only  difference  being  that  there 
were  so  many  more  to  be  carried  away.  Carts,  boxes 
and  cupboards,  chairs,  tables  and  feather  beds  were 
seen  floating  on  the  water. 

So  quickly  did  the  river  rise  that  many  of  the  cattle, 
pigs,  and  even  horses,  were  drowned.  One  pig  was 
known  to  swim  for  two  days  and  two  nights,  and  was 
then  caught  alive  and  taken  in  a  boat  to  dry  ground. 
Over  the  fields  where  cattle  had  grazed  and  wheat  had 
grown,  fish  swam  and  boats  sailed,  while  down  the 
river  to  Lake  Winnipeg  floated  the  labor  of  twenty- 
six  years.  The  poor  people,  who  the  day  before  had 
been  happy  in  their  cozy  homes,  were  now  huddled  on 
dry  spots  of  land,  with  the  cattle  and  goods  they  had 
saved  beside  them.  All  were  cold  and  wet,  and  every  bit 
of  their  firewood  had  floated  away.  One  man  burned  up 
his  plough  to  keep  his  little  girl  from  perishing.  Not 
until  the  12  th  of  June  could  the  settlers  go  back  to 
their  desolate  homes. 

This  was  the  last  disaster  that  befell  the  Selkirk 
settlers.  Like  the  spider,  they  had  come  to  their 
last  fall,  and  were  now  on  the  sure  way  to  success. 
What  that  success  has  been  may  be  learned  by  a  trip 
to-day,  not  only  through  Manitoba,  but  far  beyond. 
The  Selkirk  Colony  was  the  beginning  of  all  settle- 
ments in  the  great  North-West.  Surely  those  who 
read  its  history  will  say  with' King  Bruce,  "Bravo, 
bravo !     All  honor  to  those  who  try." 


CHAPTER  XII. 
Two  Explorers  and  an  Artist. 

Simon  Fkaser. 

One  bright  day,  early  in  the  summer  of  1808,  a 
young  fur-trader,  named  Simon  Eraser,  was  starting 
down  the  great  river  of  rocks  and  rapids  that  Mac- 
kenzie had  followed  until  he  left  it  to  take  the  overland 
trail  to  the  western  coast.  His  orders  were  to  follow 
the  river  to  the  sea.  As  yet,  no  one  had  dared  to  ven- 
ture down  that  treacherous  current.  So  little  was 
known  of  the  river  that  it  was  supposed  to  be  the 
Columbia.  Men  from  the  United  States  had  found 
the  mouth  of  the  Columbia  and  were  claiming  the 
territory  about  it.  Eraser's  trip  was  to  explore  the 
river  for  the  North-West  Company,  and  see  if  it  would 
give  them  a  canoe  route  to  and  from  the  coast. 

The  accounts  of  the  river  which  he  and  his  men 
could  gather  from  the  Indians  were  not  encouraging. 
However,  before  they  had  gone  far  they  heard  of  an 
Indian  who  had  come  from  near  the  sea,  and  had  him 
brought  to  them,  hoping  he  might  tell  a  more  favorable 
story.  Eraser  spread  an  oilcloth  on  the  ground  and 
made  signs  to  him  to  draw  a  map  of  the  river.  This 
Indian  did  not  seem  to  know  very  much  about  it,  but 
another  Indian  stood  beside  him  and  told  him  how 

110 


TWO  EXPLORERS  AND  AN  ARTIST    111 

to  draw  the  map.  When  finished  it  showed  all  the 
dangerous  places  of  which  the  white  men  had  heard. 

After  looking  at  the  map,  Fraser  hinted  to  the 
Indians  that  some  day  his  people  would  come  and 
build  a  fort,  and  they  would  then  all  be  able  to  get 
such  guns  as  they  had  seen  him  fire  off.  The  Indians 
were  delighted  with  the  prospect,  and  the  chief,  wish- 
ing to  please  the  white  men,  said  that  he  and  the  Indian 
from  near  the  sea  would  go  along  to  guide  them  down 
the  river. 

/  In  a  short  time  they  came  to  a  terrible  rapid  about 
two  miles  long.  On  each  side  were  steep  banks,  which 
in  some  places  were  only  forty  or  fifty  yards  apart. 
Through  that  narrow  space  the  water  dashed  in  a  whirl 
of  angry,  foaming  waves.  The  chief  said  that  the 
rapid  would  overpower  any  Indians  and  swallow  their 
canoes,  but  that  as  white  men  were  so  great,  perhaps 
they  could  cross  it  in  safety.  Five  of  the  best  men 
embarked  in  a  canoe,  but  lost  power  over  it  and  were 
dashed  against  a  rock.  The  men  saved  themselves  by 
springing  to  the  rock,  but  their  comrades  had  great 
difficulty  in  getting  them  ashore  and  saving  the  canoe. 
The  bank  was  so  steep  that  in  going  down  they  had  to 
plunge  their  daggers  in  to  keep  from  slipping  and  fall- 
ing headfirst  into  the  river.'  Of  the  trouble  they  had 
in  landing  the  canoe  Fraser  wrote : 

"  We  cut  steps  in  the  declivity ;  fastened  a  line  to  the 
front  of  the  canoe,  with  which  some  of  the  men  ascended 
in  order  to  haul  it  up  while  the  others  supported  it 
upon  their  arms.  In  this  manner  our  situation  was 
most  precarious.  Our  lives  hung,  as  it  were,  upon  a 
thread,  as  the  failure  of  the  line  or  a  false  step  of  one 


112     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

of  the  men  might  have  hurled  the  whole  of  us  into 
eternity.  However,  we  fortunately  cleared  the  bank 
before  dark." 

After  this  experience  they  met  with  Indians  who 
assured  them  that  for  some  distance  the  river  was  so 
rough  they  could  not  possibly  go  down  by  canoe,  and 
told  them  of  an  overland  trail  which  would  take  them 
past  the  rapids  and  down  to  that  part  of  the  river  where 
it  was  smooth  sailing  on  to  the  sea.  But  Fraser  said 
his  orders  were  to  follow  the  river,  and  he  would  take 
no  other  route. 

To  make  matters  worse,  the  river  was  rising.  When 
it  went  up  eight  feet  in  twenty-four  hours  one  of  the 
lieutenants  proposed  that  they  should  try  going  along 
the  bank  with  pack-horses.  They  succeeded  in  getting 
four  horses  from  the  Indians,  but  found  that  way  of 
travelling  almost  as  bad  as  by  canoe.  The  path  was 
so  narrow  and  the  precipice  so  steep  that  one  of  the 
horses  fell  over  and  was  lost,  knd  a  man  who  was  carry- 
ing a  heavy  pack,  taking  a  misstep,  got  into  such  a 
dangerous  position  that  he  dare  not  move  until  Fraser 
crawled  out  and  loosened  his  load.  The  load  dropped 
into  the  river  and  was  washed  away,  but  the  man,  free 
of  his  burden,  was  able  to  save  himself. 

When  travelling  by  canoe  again  they  were  continually 
coming  to  rocks,  whirlpools,  and  foaming  cascades.  In 
toiling  over  the  portages  they  had  to  climb  up  and  down 
steep  rocky  precipices  where  their  moccasins  wore  out 
in  less  than  a  day  and  their  feet  were  cut  by  the  sharp 
stones. 

Farther  on  the  channel  narrowed  to  about  forty  yards. 
On  each  side  towered  great  rocks,  bending  toward  each 


TWO  EXPLOKEKS  AND  AN  ARTIST    113 

other,  thus  making  the  opening  narrower  above  than 
below.  Through  this  passage  the  boiling  water  rushed 
with  terrific  force,  and,  as  Fraser  said,  "  had  a  frightful 
appearance."  To  carry  the  canoes  past  by  land  was 
out  of  the  question.  There  was  nothing  to  do  but  take 
their  chances  on  that  awful  tide.  Of  this  experience 
Fraser  wrote  in  his  journal :  "  Thus  skimming  along 
fast  as  lightning,  the  crews,  cool  and  determined,  fol- 
lowed each  other  in  awful  silence,  and  when  we  arrived 
at  the  end  we  stood  gazing  at  each  other  in  silent  con- 
gratulation at  our  narrow  escape  from  total  destruction." 
They  now  hoped  the  worst  was  over,  but  Indians  told 
them  they  could  not  proceed  by  way  of  the  river,  and 
drew  a  map  showing  more  cascades,  rapids  and  whirl- 
pools ahead.  Instead  of  a  beach  or  shore,  there  were 
mountains  and  precipices  on  each  side  which  they  could 
not  climb  up  and  down  without  the  aid  of  rope-ladders. 
However,  Fraser  and  his  men  struggled  on,  travelling 
sometimes  by  canoe  and  sometimes  on  foot,  until  at 
last  they  came  upon  Indians  who  said  the  sea  was  only 
ten  nights  from  their  village.  One  old  brave  declared 
he  had  been  to  the  sea,  and  had  seen  white  men  there 
who  were  very  proud.  He  put  his  hands  on  his  hips 
and  strode  about  with  an  air  of  great  importance,  saying 
to  Fraser,  "  This  is  the  way  they  go."  It  was  good  news 
to  the  tired  explorers,  and  they  hurried  on,  grudging 
even  the  time  they  had  to  spend  in  shaking  hands  with 
the  natives.  One  of  the  longest  delays  was  where  a  chief 
invited  Fraser  across  the  river  and  then  took  him  by 
the  arm  and  led  him  to  the  camp,  where  about  twelve 
hundred  Indians  were  sitting  in  rows  waiting  to  shake 
hands  with  him ! 


114     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

Toward  the  end  of  the  journey  another  canoe  was 
needed.  So  far,  when  they  had  broken  their  canoes, 
they  had  been  able  to  trade  their  night-robes  to  the 
natives  for  new  ones,  but  the  Indian  from  whom  they 
now  tried  to  get  one  would  not  let  them  have  it  at  any 
price.  They  took  it  by  force,  and  he  followed,  sobbing, 
and  begging  them  to  come  back  lest  they  should  be 
killed  by  warlike  Indians  at  the  coast.  Near  the  mouth 
of  the  river  they  found  that  his  warning  was  well 
founded.  The  natives  there,  who  had  seen  "  proud  " 
white  men  from  foreign  trading  vessels,  were  not 
friendly,  like  the  Indians  of  the  interior,  and  instead 
of  coming  up  to  shake  hands,  nourished  weapons  and 
tried  to  upset  the  canoes  of  the  white  men. 

As  nothing  was  to  be  gained  by  stopping  there  and 
running  the  risk  of  an  attack,  Fraser  turned  back.  By 
this  time  he  knew  that  the  river  he  had  explored  was 
not  the  Columbia,  for  he  had  found  that  it  emptied 
into  the  Pacific  several  degrees  of  latitude  north  of 
the  mouth  of  the  Columbia.  It  has  ever  since  been 
called  the  Fraser  River  in  honor  of  the  man  who  defied 
its  treacherous  rocks  and  angry  rapids  and  followed  it 
to  the  sea. 

Sir  John  Fkanklin. 

Somewhere  in  the  snow  and  ice  of  the  cold  northland 
is  a  lonely  grave.  The  story  of  Sir  John  Franklin, 
who  lies  buried  there,  is  one  of  the  saddest  in  our 
country's  history.  He  lost  his  life  while  exploring  in 
search  of  the  long-talked-of  North-west  Passage.  Until 
his  travels,  little  was  known  of  the  Arctic  regions.  Over 
all    that  northern  coast  hung  a  mist  which  had    been 


TWO  EXPLORERS  AND  AN  ARTIST    115 

lifted  only  twice;  once  when  Hearne  reached  the  Cop- 
permine, and  again  when  Mackenzie  followed  to  the 
sea  the  great  river  to  which  his  name  was  afterwards 
given.  The  Arctic  coast-line  between  these  two  rivers 
and  beyond  was  still  a  blank  on  the  white  man's  map. 
But  even  to  that  day  some  were  still  dreaming  poor 
Henry  Hudson's  dream  of  an  open  Polar  Sea. 

On  his  first  journey  Franklin  was  directed  to  sail 
to  America,  travel  overland  to  the  Arctic  Ocean,  and 
sketch  that  unknown  coast-line  from  the  Coppermine 
River  eastward,  marking  the  position  of  the  capes,  bays 
and  rivers  which  he  passed.  He  left  England  in  the 
month  of  May,  and  by  the  end  of  August  was  at  York 
Factory,  on  Hudson  Bay.  From  there  he  set  out  across 
the  country,  and  late  in  the  winter  reached  Fort  Chip- 
ewyan,  Mackenzie's  old  post.  In  his  journal  of  that 
winter  trip  are  found  such  entries  as :  "  The  depth  of 
snow  made  the  task  of  beating  the  track  for  the  dogs 
so  very  fatiguing  that  each  of  the  men  took  the  lead  in 
turn  for  an  hour  and  a  half."  ..."  We  were 
constantly  rubbing  the  exposed  parts  of  the  skin  to  pre- 
vent their  being  frozen,  but  some  of  the  party  suffered 
in  spite  of  every  precaution."  ..."  Provisions 
becoming  scarce ;  dogs  without  food  except  a  little  burnt 
leather ;     .  tea  froze  in  the  tin  teapot  before  we 

could  drink  it." 

In  the  spring  Franklin  continued  his  journey,  but  so 
great  were  his  difficulties  in  securing  guides  and  sup- 
plies that  he  did  not  reach  the  coast  that  summer,  and 
was  obliged  to  winter  at  Fort  Enterprise.  Of  that 
dreary  season  he  wrote :  "  The  trees  froze  to  their  very 
centres,  and  became  as  hard  as  stone  and  more  difficult 


116     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

to  cut.  Some  of  the  axes  were  broken  daily,  and  by 
the  end  of  the  month  we  had  only  one  left  that  was  fit 
for  felling  trees."  .  .  .  "A  thermometer  hung  in 
our  bedroom,  at  a  distance  of  sixteen  feet  from  the  fire, 
stood  even  in  the  daytime  occasionally  at  fifteen  degrees 
below  zero."  .  .  .  "  It  is  half-past  eleven  before  he 
[the  sun]  peeps  over  a  small  ridge  of  hills  opposite  to 
the  house,  and  he  sinks  in  the  horizon  at  half-past  two." 

At  last  the  long  winter  was  over  and  they  set  out 
upon  their  long  journey  to  the  coast,  dragging  their 
canoes  and  carrying  their  small  store  of  provisions.  In 
July  they  reached  the  Arctic  Ocean.  You  will  remem- 
ber that  Mackenzie  did  not  find  the  Eskimos  at  home, 
and  Hearne  could  not  talk  with  those  he  saw,  owing  to 
their  being  killed  before  his  eyes  by  his  Indian  escort. 
Franklin's  party,  however,  met  with  some  of  these 
people.  Those  near  the  Coppermine  were  afraid  of  the 
white  men,  and  all  ran  away  except  one  old  man  who 
was  too  lame  to  run.  He  was  terrified  at  first,  but  when 
they  treated  him  kindly  and  gave  him  presents,  he  gave 
them  some  of  his  dried  meat  and  talked  with  the  inter- 
preter. Among  other  things,  he  said  that  in  the  summer 
his  people  went  there  to  fish,  but  when  winter  came 
they  moved  farther  down  the  coast  and  built  their  snow 
houses.  Not  far  away  Franklin  had  found  broken 
skulls  lying  about,  and  so  concluded  that  he  was  meet- 
ing the  old  Eskimo  near  the  very  spot  where,  fifty 
years  before,  Hearne's  Indian  party  had  massacred  the 
Eskimo  band. 

The  explorers  now  travelled  eastward  along  the  coast, 
skirting  the  rocky  capes  and  bays  and  learning  all  they 
could  of  that  northern  sea.     Often  they  came  upon  a 


TWO  EXPLORERS  AND  AN  ARTIST    117 

seal  or  a  polar  bear  taking  her  cubs  for  a  swim,  and 
when  on  shore  they  startled  many  an  unsuspecting  rein- 
deer or  musk-ox.  As  they  advanced  they  met  with 
more  and  more  floating  ice,  and  the  winds  became 
colder.  Owing  to  the  distance  they  must  go  before  they 
could  gain  a  place  of  shelter  for  the  winter,  which 
would  soon  set  in,  they  were  obliged  to  turn  back  as 
early  as  the  18th  of  August.  The  point  where  the 
return  journey  began  was  named  Point  Turnagain. 

Before  reaching  Fort  Enterprise  the  party  had  the 
most  terrible  experiences.  Some  died  from  the  hard- 
ships they  encountered,  and  the  others  were  nearly 
starved  to  death.  At  one  time  they  were  so  weak  from 
hunger  that  when  the  reindeer  passed  near  they  were 
unable  to  shoot  them.  Indians  arrived  with  meat  just 
in  time  to  save  their  lives. 

The  sufferings  of  that  toilsome  journey  did  not  pre- 
vent Franklin  from  going  again.  Three  years  later 
he  set  out  determined  to  clear  away  the  mist  in  the 
northland.  This  time  he  travelled  overland  from  east- 
ern Canada  to  the  mouth  of  the  Mackenzie  River.  At 
the  lonely  spot  where  the  great  river  empties  into  the 
ocean,  he  unfurled  a  silken  Union  Jack  which  his  wife 
had  worked  and  given  him  to  display  when  he  reached 
the  Polar  Sea.  Then,  at  last,  that  symbol  of  British 
rule  waved  proudly  over  the  far-away  home  of  the 
Eskimos  and  polar  bears.  As  it  was  August  and  the 
northern  summer  almost  over,  Franklin  had  barely  time 
to  explore  the  coast  near  the  mouth  of  the  river  before 
returning  to  Fort  Franklin,  on  Great  Bear  Lake,  for 
the  winter. 

In  the  spring,  when  again  on  the  Arctic  coast,  he 


118     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

divided  his  men.  One  party,  under  Dr.  Richardson,  set 
out  to  survey  the  coast  to  the  Coppermine  River,  where 
Franklin's  last  exploration  had  begun;  and  the  other, 
under  Franklin  himself,  went  westward  along  the  coast 
from  the  Mackenzie  River.  In  this  way  they  hoped  to 
make  a  thorough  search  for  the  North-west  Passage. 
The  party  which  travelled  east  reached  the  Coppermine, 
but  the  others  were  detained  so  often  by  fogs  and  ice 
that  they  were  able  to  follow  the  coast-line  only  three 
hundred  and  seventy-four  miles  west  of  the  Mackenzie, 
about  half  as  far  as  Franklin  had  hoped  to  go.  They 
were  then  obliged  to  turn  back,  for,  though  it  was  but 
little  more  than  the  middle  of  August,  the  dread  Arctic 
winter  would  soon  be  setting  in.  Both  parties  met  at 
Fort  Franklin,  where  another  winter  was  spent.  In 
the  summer  they  returned  to  England. 

Over  twenty  years  after,  another  expedition  was  sent 
out  to  trace  the  still  unexplored  portion  of  the  Arctic 
coast,  and  to  find  out  for  a  certaintv  whether  the  North- 
west  Passage  led  from  the  Polar  Sea.  Sir  John  Frank- 
lin, though  nearly  sixty  years  of  age,  gladly  took  the 
post  as  leader.  "  No  service,"  he  said,  "  is  nearer  my 
heart."  With  every  hope  of  success  he  and  his  men 
prepared  for  the  voyage.  They  were  so  sure  of  finding 
the  North-west  Passage  and  sailing  across  to  Asia, 
that  one  of  his  captains  left  instructions  for  his  letters 
to  be  sent  by  way  of  St.  Petersburg  to  Kamchatka. 

Leaving  England,  May  26th,  1845,  in  two  ships, 
named  the  Erebus  and  the  Terror,  they  sailed  across  the 
ocean,  all  in  the  best  of  spirits,  and  then  turned  north- 
ward through  Baffin  Bay  and  Lancaster  Sound.  Soon 
their  progress  was  stopped  by  ice.     Summer  was  over 


TWO  EXPLORERS  AND  AN  ARTIST    119 

and  new  ice  was  forming  thick  and  fast.  In  a  sheltered 
harbor  of  Beechey  Island  they  prepared  to  spend  the 
winter.  There  three  of  their  number  died.  Five  years 
later,  when  men  came  to  search  for  the  missing  explor- 
ers, they  found  the  headstones  over  the  graves  of  these 
three  men  and  knew  the  party  had  wintered  there. 

It  was  supposed  that  the  next  summer  the  explorers 
tried  to  push  on,  but  that  the  ships  were  frozen  in 
for  a  second  long  winter,  and  that  the  following  summer 
ice  still  blocked  their  way.  Two  successive  winters  of 
cold  and  hardships  had  proved  too  much  for  the  strength 
of  Sir  John  Franklin.  He  became  ill,  and  in  the  month 
of  June  he  died.  After  this  every  effort  to  release  the 
ships  must  have  been  in  vain.  They  probably  drifted 
about  helplessly  in  the  grip  of  the  ice-pack.  From  the 
stories  afterwards  told  by  the  Eskimos,  and  the  skele- 
tons found,  it  is  known  that  the  following  spring  the 
men  abandoned  their  ships  and  died  in  an  attempt  to 
travel  southward  overland. 

In  England  great  anxiety  was  felt  when  two  years 
passed  without  bringing  any  news  of  Sir  John's  party. 
Hoping  that  the  whaling  vessels  that  went  to  Baffin  Bay 
might  find  some  trace  of  the  missing  men,  large  rewards 
were  offered  by  the  British  Government  and  by  Lady 
Franklin  for  news  of  the  Erebus  and  the  Terror.  But 
the  reward  brought  no  tidings,  and  expeditions  were 
sent  out  to  search.  One  of  these  ships  chanced  to  pass 
Beechey  Island.  The  men  saw  the  headstones  of  the 
three  lonely  graves,  but  of  the  ships  that  had  been  shel- 
tered there  they  could  find  no  trace.  Four  years  later 
Dr.  Rae,  one  of  the  searchers,  met  a  young  Eskimo  who 
told  him  that  in  the  spring  of  1850  about  forty  white 


120     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

men  were  seen  dragging  a  boat  southward.  They  had 
bought  a  seal  from  some  Eskimo  hunters,  to  whom  they 
said  they  were  going  to  a  land  where  they  could  shoot 
deer.  Some  of  the  other  Eskimos  showed  Dr.  Rae  silver 
spoons  and  forks  which  undoubtedly  had  belonged  to 
Franklin's  party. 

Captain  McClintock,  the  leader  of  another  expedi- 
tion sent  out  by  Lady  Franklin,  heard  more  Eskimo 
stories  and  got  some  pieces  of  silverplate  on  which 
was  Sir  John  Franklin's  family  crest.  They  also 
came  upon  a  human  skeleton  lying  face  downwards, 
which  showed  there  might  be  some  truth  in  the  story 
that  the  white  men  had  "  fallen  as  they  walked." 

Such  traces  of  the  lost  expedition  are  all  that  were 
ever  found,  except  that  a  paper  enclosed  in  a  bottle  was 
picked  up,  which  must  have  been  dropped  by  Frank- 
lin's men  the  year  he  died.  It  stated  where  they  had 
wintered,  and  in  several  different  languages  the  request 
was  written  that  whoever  found  it  should  forward  it 
to  the  Secretary  of  the  Admiralty.  Round  the  margin 
was  a  notice  of  Sir  John  Franklin's  death,  with  the 
date,  June  11th,  1847.  ISTow  at  last  the  fate  of  the 
brave  explorer  was  known. 

Of  the  sad  funeral  in  the  Arctic  nothing  has  ever 
been  learned.  But  one  thing  is  certain,  our  hero  was 
buried  by  the  men  who  loved  him,  while  the  good  old 
Union  Jack,  under  which  he  had  served  so  long,  flut- 
tered at  half-mast  from  the  solitary  ships  imprisoned  in 
that  sea  of  ice. 

It  remained  for  a  gallant  Norwegian,  Captain 
Amundsen,  following  the  Franklin  route,  to  make  his 
way  through  the  entire  passage  to  the  Western  Sea, 


PAUL    KANE. 
(From  a  portrait  in  the  Paul^Kane  collection  in  Toronto  University,  by  permission.) 


TWO  EXPLORERS  AND  AN  ARTIST    121 

which  he  did  in  1904-06.  And  we  now  know  that  had 
Sir  John  Franklin  been  able  to  work  his  ships  only 
ninety  miles  farther  westward  he  would  have  sailed  into 
the  Western  Sea,  and  have  reached  home  to  enjoy  his 
well-earned  honors. 

Paul  Kane. 

Nearly  forty  years  after  Fraser's  famous  voyage,  a 
young  artist  from  Toronto  was  travelling  through  the  ftx^l  Icaod 
North-West  and  past  the  great  mountains,.    Though  he    c  /iAflA 
was  not  searching  for  a  nortn-wes|;  passage,  nc^r  tracing 
an  nnl<nlTim--r4v^^-4o--the  sear-ire^  deserves "a'"ptace~tg"'     ^ck^vav 
history  withjl^rayj^^  Paul  Kane, 

t"Be°^rtist,  had  grown  up  with  one  ambition.  This  was 
to  make  a  series  of  paintings  of  the  Indians  which 
should  live  when  the  country  had  passed  away  from 
them  and  they  no  longer  would  pitch  their  tents  in  the 
forests  and  on  the  plains. 

In  those  days,  to  travel  through  the  country  with 
canvas  and  paints  was  not  an  easy  matter,  and  Kane 
had  no  money  to  fit  out  canoes  and  hire  men.  However, 
a  way  opened.  After  working  for  some  time  among 
the  Indians  near  his  home  in  Ontario,  he  showed  his 
sketches  to  Sir  George  Simpson,  the  Governor  of  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company,  and  told  him  of  his  desire  to 
paint  pictures  descriptive  of  the  habits  and  customs  of 
the  Indians  of  the  North-West.  Sir  George  was  pleased 
with  the  idea,  and  to  help  the  ambitious  young  man, 
offered  him  a  passage  with  him  in  the  spring  brigade 
of  canoes.  The  following  May  the  delighted  artist  set 
out  with  the  Governor  to  meet  the  canoes  at  Sault  Ste. 
Marie. 


122     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

y 

At  Mackinaw  Paul  Kane  met  with  his  first  misfor- 
tune. As  the  Captain  told  him  that  the  boat  would  not 
leave  until  nine  the  next  morning,  he  went  ashore  to 
paint  a  sunset  and  to  sleep  on  land.  Coming  down  at 
the  hour  next  morning,  he  found  to  his  great  dismay 
that  the  steamer  had  gone  twenty  minutes  before.  This 
was  indeed  a  bad  beginning.  The  Governor,  he  knew, 
was  always  in  a  hurry,  and  would  remain  only  one  night 
at  the  Sault.  Unless  he  could  find  some  way  of  getting 
there  by  the  next  morning,  he  would  lose  his  passage 
with  the  canoe  brigade.  As  he  walked  along  the  shore 
wondering  what  to  do,  his  eyes  fell  upon  a  small  skiff. 
He  hired  it  at  once. 

With  three  boys  for  a  crew,  a  blanket  for  a  sail,  and 
a  loaf  of  bread  and  some  tea  for  breakfast,  dinner  and 
supper,  he  started,  though  Indians  and  voyageurs  who 
had  often  taken  that  trip  said  it  was  a  wild-goose  chase, 
for  he  could  never  get  there  in  time.  After  sailing 
forty-five  miles  across  the  lake,  they  reached  the  St. 
Mary  river  at  sunset.  Now,  if  they  were  going  to 
overtake  the  Governor  at  the  Sault  by  morning,  they 
must  go  forty-five  miles  up  that  river  in  one  dark  night. 
The  river  was  dotted  with  small  islands,  and  the  current 
was  strong.  Moreover,  the  boys  had  never  sailed  there 
before. 

As  they  ate  their  bread  and  drank  their  tea  the 
voyagers  counted  the  difficulties  in  the  way.  Even  to 
their  hopeful  minds  the  chances  were  small.  But  they 
started  in  good  spirits  and  made  fair  progress  for 
a  time.  As  it  grew  darker  they  bumped  into  islands, 
and  lost  time  in  backing  out.  Floating  brushwood 
struck  the  boat,  and  in  places  the  current  almost  forced 


TWO  EXPLORERS  AND  AN  ARTIST    123 

them  back.  Many  times  they  gave  up  in  despair,  but 
always  took  courage  and  pushed  on  again.  It  was  the 
hardest  night  Paul  Kane  had  ever  spent,  but  he  had  his 
reward.  When  day  dawned  he  saw  the  Governor's 
steamer  just  ahead. 

Throughout  all  his  long  journey  he  was  willing  to 
work  as  hard  for  success  as  he  did  that  night.  ~No 
amount  of  discomfort  could  discourage  him.  He  trav- 
elled through  districts  where  the  air  was  so  thick  with 
mosquitos  that  he  had  to  wear  a  veil  day  and  night. 
He  went  through  swamps  where  he  had  to  strain  every 
drop  of  water  he  drank,  because  there  were  poisonous 
insects  in  it  that  could  cause  death  to  both  man  and 
beast.  He  travelled  on  snowshoes,  and  learned  what 
it  was  to  go  for  days  without  food  in  the  depth  of  win- 
ter, and  he  crossed  rivers  by  plunging  through  their 
icy  current. 

Though  he  was  used  to  all  manner  of  bed-fellows,  he 
was  startled  when  one  morning  before  daybreak  he  was 
awakened  by  something  cold  and  clammy,  and  dis- 
covered that  a  snake  had  curled  up  and  slept  at  his  side, 

Paul  Kane's  paintings  were  a  wonder  to  the  Indians. 
They  thought  the  Great  Spirit  helped  him  to  make  them, 
and  they  would  put  their  hands  over  their  faces  and  look 
at  them  through  their  fingers,  which  was  the  way  they 
always  looked  at  those  whom  the  Great  Spirit  had  taken 
to  the  Happy  Hunting  Ground.  They  thought  he  must 
be  a  great  medicine-man  to  make~such  pictures,  and  he 
was  very  glad"~tEat  they  had  that  idea,  for  it  meant 
tbaF EiiTsketches  and  painting- materials  wouldJ)e  safe 
among  _the.nL — 

Often  he  found  it  hard  to  persuade  the  Indians  to 


124     WHEEE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

sit  for  him,  as  they  were  afraid  the  "  second .,.  sel£^L_as 
they  called  a  portrait,  would  have  some  evil  influence 
over  them.  Paul  Kane  found  that  a  good  way  was  to 
go  into  a  tepee  and  begin  work  without  saying  a  word, 
for  the  Indians  would  then  pretend  not  to  see  him,  and 
he  could  usually  finish  his  painting.  Once,  when  among 
a  very  superstitious  tribe,  an  Indian  annoyed  him  by 
following  him  about,  telling  all  the  Indians  he  met  not 
to  let  the  artist  sketch  them,  for  it  would  bring  them 
ill-luck.  As  Kane  could  get  no  models,  he  made  up  his 
mind  he  would  put  a  stop  to  this.  With  pencil  and 
paper  in  his  hand  he  looked  closely  at  the  troublesome 
Indian.  The  man  asked  him  what  he  was  doing.  He 
replied :  "  Because  you  have  kept  your  people  from 
sitting  for  me  I  am  going  to  draw  your  picture  whether 
you  like  it  or  not."  Then  the  Indian  was  frightened, 
and  promised  the  artist  that  he  would  never  again 
interfere  if  he  would  only  stop  making  his  "  second 
self."  Another  man,  who  consented  to  have  his  portrait 
painted,  was  so  sorry  afterwards  that  he  followed  Paul 
Kane  about  begging  him  to  destroy  it.  To  satisfy  him 
the  artist  made  a  copy  of  the  picture,  which  he  tore  up 
before  the  eyes  of  the  relieved  Indian. 

Nor  were  the  wild  animals  more  willing  to  pose  as 
models.  Once  when  he  had  settled  down  to  paint  a 
buffalo  it  made  a  sudden  dash  at  him,  and  he  had  just 
time  to  mount  his  horse  and  get  away,  leaving  the 
partly  finished  sketch  in  the  possession  of  the  enraged 
animal. 

A  medicine-man  who  one  day  chanced  to  look  at  his 
collection  of  paintings  greatly  admired  them,  and  offered 
to  help  him  on  his  way  by  giving  him  three  days'  fair 


FLATHEAD   WOMAN   AND   CHILD. 
(From  a  painting  by  Paul  Kane,  by  permission.) 


TWO  EXPLORERS  AND  AN  ARTIST    125 

wind;'  but  in  return  he  asked  for  a  pound  of  tobacco.- 
The  artist  bargained  with  him  until  he  promised  six 
days'  fair  wind  for  a  small  plug.     The  tobacco  was 
handed  over,  and  it  is  to  be  hoped  the  winds  were  favor- 
able for  the  promised  length  of  time. 

After  an  absence  of  over  two  years,  Paul  Kane 
reached  his  home  in  Toronto  with  a  large  number  of 
paintings.  Among  those  he  valued  most  was  one  of 
the  back  view  of  a  chief's  head  which  showed  his  war- 
cap  and  a  little  bag  containing  the  bones  and  hair  of 
his  departed  relatives.  Another  was  of  a  Flathead 
woman  and  her  child,  with  its  head  strapped  to  a  board 
to  make  it  grow  flat.  Other  sketches  were  of  various 
chiefs  and  of  Indians  travelling,  fishing,  and  dancing. 

The  hopes  and  desires  of  boyhood  days  had  now  been 
realized.  The  pictures  he  had  painted  under  such  hard- 
ships and  difficulties,  and  carried  over  the  mountains 
and  plains  of  the  wilderness,  show  how  the  Indian 
appeared  when  he  roamed  the  land  at  his  own  sweet 
will.  To-day  they  arc  of  the  greatest  value  to  students 
of  the  red^ajj^j3Jalar^_,Paul  Kane  will  be  remem- 
bered as  the  first  artist  to  put  on  canvaj„iJxa-nicturesque 
Indians,  ot 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
Early  Days  in  British  Columbia. 

There  was  no  Lord  Selkirk  to  establish  a  colony  in 
the  country  west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  but  some- 
thing was  there  which  has  never  failed  to  draw  men 
from  all  over  the  world.  Back  along  the  river-banks 
Indians  had  found  gold,  no  one  knows  how  long  ago. 
The  red  men  had  no  idea  of  its  value,  but  thought  it  a 
bright,  pretty  metal  to  use  for  their  ornaments.  As 
time  went  by,  white  men  saw  these  ornaments  and 
learned  that  gold  was  there.  The  news  soon  spread 
far  and  wide,  and  people  came  hurrying  to  that  country 
in  great  crowds  that  would  have  amazed  the  Selkirk 
settlers  had  they  been  there  to  see. 

This  was  not  the  beginning  of  the  history  of  British 
Columbia.  The  work  which  the  white  men  were  doing 
there  before  they  saw  the  gold  must  not  be  passed  by. 
After  the  voyages  of  Cook  and  Vancouver,  the  whaling 
vessels  and  sea-otter  hunters  came  to  the  Pacific  coast ; 
and  after  the  long  journey  of  Alexander  Mackenzie, 
the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  built  their  forts  on  the 
lakes  and  rivers  west  of  the  mountains.  On  Vancouver 
Island,  James  Douglas,  a  chief  factor  of  the  Hudson's 
Bay  Company,  chose  a  beautiful  spot  for  a  fort,  and 
men  were  set  to  work  to  build  it.  They  erected  a  small 
tower,  cottages,  buildings  for  the  men  to  sleep  in  and 

126 


EARLY  DAYS  IN  BRITISH  COLUMBIA    127 

to  eat  in,  a  carpenter's  shop,  and  a  blacksmith's  shop. 
Surrounding  it  all  were  high  palisades.  In  the  build- 
ing of  the  whole  fort  not  a  single  iron  nail  was  used; 
the  logs  were  held  together  with  pegs  made  of  wood. 
When  finished  the  fort  was  named  Fort  Victoria,  after 
the  Queen,  and  has  always  been  an  important  place  on 
the  Pacific. 

The  Indians  looked  on  with  curious  interest  during 
the  building  of  the  fort,  and  all  went  well  until  the 
white  men  brought  some  cattle  in  their  boats  to  the 
island.  The  cattle  were  frightened  when  first  landed, 
and  rushed  into  the  woods  with  head  and  tail  in  the  air. 
However,  in  time  they  grew  accustomed  to  their  new 
home,  and  became  useful  in  ploughing  and  drawing 
logs.  Of  this  the  Indians  did  not  approve.  To  them 
it  was  pure  waste  to  work  animals  that  made  such  good 
food  when,  from  their  standpoint,  the  Indian  women 
could  do  the  work ;  and  so,  to  change  this  absurd  condi- 
tion of  affairs,  they  dined  one  day  on  roast  beef.  When 
the  fort  builders  went  to  get  the  oxen  to  draw  more  logs 
they  found  they  were  missing.  They  promptly  told  the 
Indians  to  either  pay  for  the  cattle  they  had  taken  or 
to  send  the  thieves  over  to  them.  The  chief  replied : 
"  What !  these  animals  yours  ?  Did  you  make  them  ?  I 
consider  them  all  the  property  of  nature,  and  whatever 
nature  sends  I  slay  and  eat." 

The  white  men  explained  that  the  cattle  came  from 
beyond  the  sea  and  did  not  belong  to  the  Indians,  and 
that  unless  they  made  up  for  what  they  had  done  the 
fort  gates  would  be  closed  against  them. 

The  Indians  angrily  replied :  "  Close  your  gates  and 
we  will  batter  them  down.     Think  vou  we  did  not  live 


128     WHEEE  THE  BUFFALO  EOAMED 

before  the  white  man  came  ?    And  think  you  we  should 
die  were  he  swept  away  from  these  shores  ?" 

Then  the  Indians  gathered  round  the  fort  and  fired 
upon  it,  but  as  the  white  men  would  neither  surrender 
nor  fight,  they  stopped  shooting,  not  caring  to  waste 
their  powder  and  shot.  When  the  white  men  showed 
them  their  big  gun  they  decided  to  give  furs  for  the 
cattle  they  had  killed.  Afterwards  they  all  smoked 
the  peace-pipe  together,  and  so  the  first  battle  ended 
without  bloodshed. 

Another  difficulty  was  also  settled  without  fighting. 
An  Indian  tribe  was  very  angry  with  John  Tod,  a 
Hudson's  Bay  Company  officer  in  charge  of  a  fort  on 
the  mainland,  and  three  hundred  of  their  warriors  were 
preparing  to  stealthily  swoop  down  upon  the  fort  and 
rob  and  murder  the  white  men.  The  officer  heard  of 
it.  He  knew  what  a  serious  time  the  Indians  had  when 
smallpox  broke  out  among  them,  and  he  determined 
to  make  their  dread  of  this  disease  his  means  of  escape. 
He  at  once  called  for  his  swiftest  horse  and  rode  to 
their  camp.  Galloping  into  their  midst,  he  threw  his 
rifle  and  pistol  to  the  ground,  and  before  the  amazed 
warriors  realized  who  he  was,  he  announced  that  he  had 
brought  an  important  message.  He  then  told  them 
that  smallpox  was  coming  to  them,  and  that  he  had 
hurried  out  to  reach  them  first  with  medicine  which 
would  save  them.  The  Indians  believed  it  all,  and 
allowed  him  to  vaccinate  them,  which  he  did,  making 
their  right  arms  so  sore  that  for  a  time  at  least  they 
could  not  have  used  their  weapons  against  him.  How- 
ever, they  had  no  wish  to  do  so  now,  for  as  smallpox 
did  not  come  to  them,  they  looked  upon  him  as  their 
deliverer. 


EARLY  DAYS  IN  BRITISH  COLUMBIA     129 

The  early  settlers  and  fur-traders  in  British  Colum- 
bia had  greater  trouble  with  white  men  than  with  the 
Indians.  The  chief  difficulty  was  over  the  boundary 
of  the  colony.  According  to  agreement,  British  Colum- 
bia had  the  coast-line  from  the  mouth  of  Columbia  River 
north  to  the  Russian  territory.  But  the  United  States 
people  began  to  claim  the  coast  as  far  up  as  the  Rus- 
sian possessions,  about  54  degrees  40  minutes  north 
latitude.  This  would  leave  the  British  colony  on  the 
Pacific  with  no  Pacific  coast  at  all.  When  their  south- 
ern neighbors  took  up  the  warlike  cry,  "  Fifty-four  forty 
or  fight!"  the  British  Government  knew  that  they  were 
in  earnest,  and  began  to  make  preparations  for  war. 
However,  there  was  no  fighting;  the  matter  was  settled 
in  1846  by  an  agreement,  called  the  Treaty  of  Oregon, 
which  made  the  49th  parallel  the  boundary  between  the 
two  countries. 

Now,  in  this  treaty  it  was  not  definitely  stated  that 
the  British  should  own  the  little  island  of  San  Juan, 
though  of  course  they  claimed  it  as  their  right,  for  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company  had  occupied  it  since  1843. 
Ten  years  after  the  Treaty  of  Oregon  was  signed  trouble 
began  over  this  island.  Settlers  had  gone  there  from 
the  United  States,  claiming  it  as  their  own.  These 
"  squatters,"  as  they  were  called,  went  so  far  as  to  put 
up  their  flag.  As  the  British  were  careful  to  keep  the 
Union  Jack  flying,  two  flags  were  then  floating  over 
the  little  island. 

At  this  time  lived  the  pig  that  became  famous  by 
almost  causing  war.  One  of  the  United  States  squatters 
had  a  potato  patch  partly  enclosed.  A  British  pig, 
living  under  the  British  flag,  wandered  out  of  its  pen 


130     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

one  night  and  had  a  midnight  feast  on  the  United  States 
squatter's  potatoes.  After  its  stolen  meal  it  went  to 
sleep  in  a  cool  woods  near  by,  and  was  found  there 
next  morning  by  the  angry  squatter.  It  happened  that 
he  owned  a  gun,  and  so  piggie  never  awoke  from  his 
sleep.  When  the  owner  learned  what  had  happened  he 
demanded  pay  for  his  pig,  but  the  squatter  refused, 
claiming  that  the  island  and  the  pigs  on  it  belonged  to 
the  United  States. 

Much  trouble  followed.  The  United  States  sent 
soldiers  out,  and  British  warships  came  to  the  island. 
However,  it  was  finally  decided  to  settle  the  dispute 
without  war,  and  the  case  was  laid  before  the  Emperor 
of  Germany,  who  acted  as  arbitrator.  In  spite  of  the 
British  having  held  the  island  for  so  long,  he  decided 
in  favor  of  the  United  States,  though  it  was  not  until 
the  year  1872  that  his  decision  was  made  known. 

In  the  year  1849  an  important  bit  of  information 
came  to  the  white  men  on  Vancouver  Island.  One  day, 
towards  the  end  of  the  year,  an  old  [Nanaimo  chief  from 
another  part  of  the  island  visited  Fort  Victoria,  and 
while  there  went  into  a  shop  to  have  his  gun  mended. 
As  he  stood  waiting  he  watched  the  men  put  fresh  coal 
upon  the  fire.  Picking  up  a  lump,  he  looked  closely  at 
it  and  said  to  them :  "  There  is  plenty  of  stone  like 
that  where  I  live."  The  men  told  him  that  if  he  would 
bring  them  some  of  it  they  would  charge  him  nothing 
for  repairing  the  gun,  and,  in  addition,  would  give  him 
a  bottle  of  rum.  Promising  to  do  this  the  Indian 
departed.  But  upon  his  return  home  he  became  ill,  and 
it  was  spring  before  he  came  down  to  Victoria  with  his 
canoe-load  of  "black  stone,"  which  was,  in  fact,  found 


EAKLY  DAYS  IN  BRITISH  COLUMBIA    131 

to  be  coal.  He  got  his  bottle  of  rum  and  guided  the 
white  men  back  to  what  became  one  of  the  richest  mines 
of  the  country.  Soon  a  fort  was  built  there.  That  was 
the  beginning  of  the  city  of  Nanaimo,  which  to  this  day 
is  famous  for  its  coal. 

About  seven  years  after  the  white  men  found  the 
Nanaimo  coal-mine,  the  greatest  discovery  of  all  was 
made  known.  The  Hudson's  Bay  Company  traders 
had  seen  Indians  with  bits  of  gold,  and  for  some  time 
had  known  that  the  precious  metal  was  to  be  found  in 
the  country,  but  little  was  said  of  it  until  1857.  About 
that  time  a  trader  at  Kamloops  got  enough  from  the 
Indians  to  send  three  hundred  ounces  to  Victoria;  and 
two  United  States  prospectors  also  found  the  precious 
metal  on  the  Thompson  River,  and  carried  some  of  it 
to  their  country.  Other  miners  sent  samples  of  gold- 
dust  home  to  San  Francisco  in  letters.  By  the  next 
summer  news  of  gold  along  the  Thompson  and  Fraser 
rivers  spread  far  and  wide,  and  people  from  all  parts  of 
the  continent  were  hurrying  there.  Nearly  the  entire 
population  of  San  Francisco  were  trying  to  sell  out  and 
go  to  the  new  gold-fields. 

Neither  houses  nor  tents  could  be  put  up  quickly 
enough  for  the  crowds  that  rushed  to  Victoria,  where 
the  Governor  granted  the  permits,  or  mining  licenses. 
Shanties  and  tents  of  all  shapes  and  sizes  were  to  be 
seen,  and  yet  many  had  to  sleep  with  only  the  sky  for 
a  roof.  The  little  trading-post  soon  had  inhabitants 
enough  for  a  city.  The  newcomers  all  wanted  to  hurry 
on  to  the  mainland,  but  there  were  not  nearly  enough 
boats,  and  some  set  out  in  little  skiffs  they  had  made 
for  themselves. 


132     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

On  the  mainland  other  difficulties  arose.  There  were 
no  roads  to  the  mines,  and  no  supplies  had  been  taken 
up  the  rivers.  The  miners  had  to  depend  upon  the  food 
they  could  carry  on  that  rough,  pathless  journey,  or  the 
hunting  they  could  do  by  the  way.  Later,  when  a 
supply  of  food  was  taken  to  the  gold-fields,  it  sold  there 
at  enormous  prices.  At  one  time  a  pound  of  beans 
could  not  be  bought  for  less  than  a  dollar,  and  other 
things,  if  to  be  had  at  all,  were  equally  dear. 

Though  the  country  was  rich  in  gold,  all  did  not  suc- 
ceed in  finding  it.  Some,  after  enduring  all  manner 
of  hardships,  gave  up  and  left  in  despair.  One  man, 
who  had  been  digging  for  months,  went  away  tired,  dis- 
couraged and  poor.  Another,  who  passed  that  spot  soon 
after,  went  on  with  the  digging  at  the  same  place.  In 
a  few  days  he  came  to  gold  enough  to  make  him  one  of 
the  richest  men  in  the  country. 

Many  times  it  was  through  the  Indians  that  the  valu- 
able discoveries  were  made.  One  day  a  man  who  had 
been  toiling  with  pick  and  shovel  far  up  on  the  Fraser 
was  resting  a  few  moments,  wondering  whether  he  could 
ever  get  enough  gold  to  pay  him  for  his  trouble.  A 
young  Indian  passed  by,  and  seeing  the  gold-dust  in  the 
pan,  said  he  knew  of  a  place  where  there  was  a  great 
quantity  of' the  yellow  metal.  He  drew  a  rough  map 
in  the  sand,  and  told  the  white  man  that  if  he  would 
meet  him  after  sixteen  days  at  a  certain  place,  which  he 
had  marked  on  the  map,  he  would  take  him  to  the 
yellow  metal.  At  the  appointed  time  and  place  they 
met.  The  Indian,  who  was  the  son  of  a  Kamloops  chief, 
guided  the  white  man  to  what  was  afterwards  known 
as  the  Horse  Fly  mine,  one  of  the  most  famous  in  the 
country. 


w 

V  0-1 


Pi 


o 


Pn 

o 

cfl 

<J 

fc 

g 

> — 1 

w 

rv 

Pi 

iz; 

>, 

<! 

M 

X> 

£ 

P 
15 

V 

H 

5 

£ 

Q 

y 

<! 

fc 

-< 

Q 

< 

3 

£ 

H 

>> 

l-H 

rt 

^ 

<T 

o 

bo 

^ 

H 

o 

O 

'-£ 

M 

p 

£> 

£ 

rt 

Pi 

CC 

p 

O 

H 

H 

ft 

s 

EARLY  DAYS  IN"  BRITISH  COLUMBIA    133 

It  was  chiefly  men  from  across  the  border  who  flocked 
to  the  gold-mines  during  those  first  years.  The  Cana- 
dians in  the  East  had  heard  the  good  news,  but  they 
could  not  reach  British  Columbia  as  easily  as  the  people 
from  the  Western  States.  However,  hundreds  of  miles 
of  prairie  and  the  great  barrier  of  the  Rocky  Mountains 
were  not  enough  to  keep  them  back  long. 

In  the  year  1862  a  little  company  started  out  from 
Ontario  and  Quebec  to  cross  the  continent  to  the  gold- 
mines. Their  journey  was  full  of  adventure.  They 
reached  the  Red  River  in  time  to  take  passage  to  Fort 
Garry  on  the  first  steamer  that  ever  plied  on  that  river. 
Before  they  had  gone  far  it  was  evident  that  the  boat 
would  not  answer  her  helm  properly,  for  at  every  bend 
of  the  river  she  ran  into  the  shore  and  had  to  be  shoved 
off.  Progress  was  so  slow  that  in  order  to  make  the 
provisions  last,  the  passengers  were  allowed  only  two 
meals  a  day. 

At  Fort  Garry  the  travellers  got  oxen  and  Red  River 
carts,  flour  and  pemmican,  and  set  out  across  the  prairie. 
Dozens  of  times  they  stopped  to  bridge  rivers,  each 
bridge  causing  a  long  delay.  When  they  had  to  leave 
the  carts  behind,  the  oxen  objected  to  carrying  packs  on 
their  backs,  and  some  of  the  men  knew  so  little  about 
either  fastening  the  packs  or  managing  the  oxen  that 
as  soon  as  they  thought  they  had  them  ready  to  start, 
the  animals  would  kick  their  heels  in  the  air  and  send 
the  loads  flying.  One  man  was  foolish  enough  to  try 
to  hold  his  ox  by  the  horns.  He  was  knocked  down  and 
badly  hurt.  They  had  a  terrible  time  crossing  the 
mountains  and  going  down  the  Fraser  River,  but 
though  many  were  the  narrow  escapes,  only  a  few  lives 
were  lost. 


134     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

Among  those  who  took  this  long  journey  were  three 
little  children,  who  reached  the  gold-fields  happy  and 
well  and  in  time  learned  to  prospect  like  their  fathers. 
Most  of  the  party  afterwards  became  wealthy  in  the 
gold-fields  of  British  ^Columbia,  and  helped  to  build  up 
the  country. 

When  crowds  rush  to  a  gold-field  there  is  always 
danger  of  trouble.  Some  are  sure  to  be  the  worst  class 
of  men,  who  expect  to  do  as  they  please  back  in  the 
lonely  places  where  there  are  no  policemen  or  law  courts 
to  keep  them  in  order.  At  the  beginning  of  the  gold 
rush  in  British  Columbia  the  miners  sometimes  took 
the  law  into  their  own  hands.  They  did  this  once 
during  their  first  summer  at  the  mines,  when  a  man 
took  a  boat-load  of  whiskey  up  the  river  and  began 
trading  it  off  to  the  Indians.  It  made  the  poor  red 
men  crazy,  and  the  lives  of  the  miners  were  not  safe. 
To  prevent  the  Indians  from  getting  it  they  offered  to 
buy  it  all,  but  the  owner  liked  the  fun  of  making  the 
Indians  drunk,  and  would  not  sell  to  the  miners.  The 
miners  marched  down  to  the  boat  with  their  guns  loaded. 
Some  stood  guard  over  the  owner  while  the  others 
broke  the  whiskey  kegs.  Then  they  ordered  the  man 
to  go  home,  and  he  was  only  too  glad  to  make  his  escape 
from  the  array  of  firearms  pointed  so  dangerously  at 
his  head. 

But  the  Indians  were  angry.  Having  had  a  taste 
of  whiskey,  they  wanted  the  rest  of  it.  One  took  a  pick 
from  a  miner,  and  the  miner  broke  a  shovel  over  his 
head.  Then  the  Indians  gathered  excitedly  together. 
The  chief  got  on  i  stump  and  made  a  regular  stump 
speech,  urging  his  braves  to  massacre  the  whites.     The 


EARLY  DAYS  IN  BRITISH  COLUMBIA    135 

few  poor  miners  armed  themselves  as  well  as  they  could 
and  wondered  how  much  longer  they  had  to  live.  Just 
then  a  barge  came  in  sight  round  the  bend  of  the 
river.  It  was  the  good  Governor,  James  Douglas, 
arriving  in  time  to  save  them.  He  knew  that  the  best 
way  to  manage  Indians  was  to  treat  them  like  children, 
so  he  persuaded  them  to  go  away  to  Fort  Yale,  and  there 
gave  them  such  a  grand  feast  of  hard-tack  and  molasses 
that  they  forgot  about  the  whiskey  and  were  willing  to 
leave  the  white  men  alone. 

Besides  soothing  the  ruffled  feelings  of  the  Indians, 
the  Governor  gave  help  and  encouragement  to  his  people. 
He  arranged  to  have  roads  and  portages  made  between 
the  lakes,  and  he  appointed  justices  of  the  peace  back 
among  the  mines  to  see  that  the  laws  were  kept. 

You  last  heard  of  James  Douglas  when,  as  chief 
factor  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company,  he  chose  the  site 
of  Victoria.  Soon  after  there  came  a  higher  office  for 
him  to  fill.  It  happened  that  a  governor  was  needed, 
first  for  Vancouver  Island,  and  then  for  British  Colum- 
bia. After  Victoria  was  built,  the  members  of  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company  were  given  a  grant  of  Van- 
couver Island,  on  condition  that  they  should  settle  it 
within  five  years.  James  Douglas  was  made  Governor 
under  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company.  However,  the  Com- 
pany did  not  settle  the  island,  and  by  the  time  of  the 
gold  rush  only  a  few  hundred  acres  of  land  were  being 
tilled.  Then  the  British  Government  took  the  control 
of  the  island  away  from  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company, 
and  ISTew  Caledonia,  as  the  mainland  west  of  the  Rockies 
was  called,  was  made  the  Colony  of  British  Columbia. 


136     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

The  next  thing  was  to  appoint  a  governor.  The  choice 
fell  upon  James  Douglas. 

There  was  a  reason  why  he  was  chosen.  When  a 
boy  he  was  told,  as  most  small  boys  are,  that  "  a  thing 
worth  doing  is  worth  doing  well."  He  must  have  heard 
the  old  saying  very  often,  for  all  through  life  he  put 
it  in  practice.  He  rose  in  power  because  he  did  every- 
thing as  carefully  as  he  had  done  the  choosing  of  the 
site  of  Fort  Victoria.  It  was  because  he  had  shown 
himself  worthy  that  he  was  given  the  highest  office  in 
the  colony.  For  governing  the  country  so  wisely  during 
the  inrush  of  miners,  and  guiding  it  safely  through 
the  boundary  troubles,  he  was  knighted  by  good  Queen 
Victoria.  Sir  James  Douglas  is  called  the  "  Father  of 
British  Columbia." 

Another  man  who  took  an  important  part  in  the 
building  up  of  British  Columbia  was  the  Chief  Justice, 
Sir  Matthew  Begbie.  With  such  care  did  he  see  that 
the  laws  of  the  country  were  kept,  that  miners  grew 
afraid  to  settle  their  quarrels  with  knives  and  revolvers, 
and  many  lawless  characters  became  good  men  and 
valuable  citizens.  The  Indians  had  great  respect  for 
him,  for  he  was  always  just  with  them.  They  knew 
that  if  a  white  man  broke  the  laws  and  wronged  an 
Indian  he  went  to  jail  just  as  surely  as  if  he  had 
wronged  a  white  man.  It  was  due  to  Sir  James 
Douglas  and  Sir  Matthew  Begbie  that  throughout 
British  Columbia  travellers  needed  no  weapons  except 
those  necessary  to  protect  themselves  from  the  wild 
animals. 

There  is  a  little  story  told  about  New  Westminster, 
the  first  capital  of  British  Columbia.     It  seems  that 


EAKLY  DAYS  IN  BEITISH  COLUMBIA    137 

the  fort  first  decided  upon  was  thought  by  some  to  be 
on  the  wrong  side  of  the  river,  and  Colonel  Moody,  who 
had  been  sent  out  to  survey,  chose  another  site.  As 
Captain  Grant,  who  was  to  have  the  honor  of  making 
the  first  cut  in  one  of  the  trees  growing  on  the  spot,  was 
in  the  very  act  of  swinging  his  axe,  he  stopped  suddenly 
and  told  the  Colonel  that  he  could  not  be  the  one  to 
start  the  capital  there,  for  he  felt  that  it  was  not  the 
best  place.  A  site  farther  down  the  river,  he  said,  could 
be  more  easily  defended,  and  large  vessels  could  come 
up  to  it.  They  listened  to  him,  rowed  down  the  river, 
made  the  first  cut  in  one  of  the  trees  there,  and  named 
the  place  Queensborough.  As  miners  were  flocking 
into  the  country,  it  was  not  long  before  there  were  hun- 
dreds of  wooden  buildings  standing  where  that  tree  and 
its  forest  companions  had  grown. 

Now,  the  people  of  Victoria  strongly  objected  to  the 
name  of  the  new  capital.  "  Our  city  has  the  Queen's 
name ;  why  have  another  Queen  city  ?"  they  said.  The 
name  Queensborough  caused  so  much  trouble  that  the 
matter  was  taken  up  by  the  Government  in  England, 
and  Queen  Victoria  chose  the  name  New  Westminster. 
New  Westminster  was  not  long  the  capital.  Seven  years 
later  Vancouver  Island  was  made  part  of  British 
Columbia,  and  Victoria  was  chosen  as  the  capital. 

In  the  beautiful  country  west  of  the  mountains, 
where  game  and  fish  were  plentiful  and  the  climate 
was  mild,  the  Indians  had  time  to  sit  about  the  camp- 
fires  watching  the  evening  shadows  grow  deeper,  and 
wondering  where  the  moon  rose  from,  where  the  sun 
went  to,  and  why  the  wind  blew.  At  such  times  the  old 
Indians  would  tell  the  legends  or  stories  which  had 


138     WHEEE   THE  BUFFALO  KOAMED 

been  told  about  the  camp-fires  of  their  tribe  for  many 
generations. 

These  legends  the  busy  miners  and  fur-traders  never 
heard.  The  Indians  talked  to  them  about  their  furs, 
their  game,  the  angry  rapids  down  the  river,  or  the 
storms  that  raged  about  the  mountain  peaks,  but  not 
of  the  stories  which  had  come  down  from  their  grand- 
fathers. Though  the  Indians  lived  wild,  savage  lives, 
and  were  cruel  and  stealthy  in  their  warfare,  they  had 
their  finer  feelings,  and  did  not  talk  to  everyone  of  those 
things  which  were  nearest  and  dearest  to  them.  Their 
legends  were  too  sacred  for  all  ears.  But  as  time  went 
by,  men  came  to  their  country  who  had  time  to  win 
their  friendship,  and  when  the  Indians  had  learned  to 
love  and  trust  these  men,  they  told  them  many  of  their 
quaint  old  legends. 

On  a  night  when  the  wind  swept  down  from  the  moun- 
tain peaks  and  whistled  in  the  forest,  the  white  men 
heard  this  story  of  the  lad  who  caught  the  wind :  "  Long 
ago  the  wind  did  much  harm.  It  blew  violently  over 
the  country  and  killed  many  people,  and  blew  away 
their  homes.  IvTow,  it  happened  that  there  was  an 
Indian  boy  who  was  always  trying  to  do  great  things. 
One  night  he  said,  '  I  am  going  to  catch  the  wind.' 
They  all  laughed  at  him.  However,  after  trying  several 
nights,  he  snared  the  wind  and  got  it  into  his  blanket 
and  took  it  home.  To  show  that  it  was  really  there,  he 
opened  the  blanket  the  least  little  bit  and  let  the  wind 
blow  some.  When  it  nearly  blew  the  lodge  over,  his 
people  begged  him  to  tie  it  up  again,  which  he  did.  At 
last  he  let  it  go,  on  condition  that  it  would  never  blow 


EARLY  DAYS  IN  BRITISH  COLUMBIA    139 

strongly  enough  to  hurt  people  in  the  Indian  country." 
This  promise  they  believe  the  wind  has  kept. 

At  another  time  they  told  how  the  grizzly  bear  was 
responsible  for  the  chipmunk's  striped  back.  One  day 
the  bear  found  a  log  burning.  He  tried  to  put  the  fire 
out  by  scraping  up  earth  with  his  paws  and  throwing 
it  on  the  log.  A  chipmunk  came  along  and  began  throw- 
ing sticks  on  the  fire  to  make  it  burn  up.  The  bear 
could  not  put  it  out,  and  became  so  angry  that  he  threw 
earth  at  the  chipmunk.  The  chipmunk  threw  wood- 
dust  at  the  bear  and  then  ran  away.  The  grizzly  chased 
it,  and  just  as  it  was  going  into  a  hollow  log,  made  a 
stroke  at  it  with  his  paw  and  tore  the  skin  off  its  back 
in  stripes.  Ever  since  chipmunks  have  had  striped 
backs. 

These  Indians  believed  that  in  the  beginning  of  the 
world  their  people  were  without  fire,  and  as  nothing 
would  burn,  a  cheery  camp-fire  was  unknown  among 
them.  One  cool  night,  when  they  were  gathered  about  a 
bright  blaze,  they  told  the  white  man  how  their  ancestors 
came  to  have  their  first  fire.     This  is  the  legend: 

"  One  day  two  young  braves  said  they  would  learn 
where  fire  could  be  found,  so  they  sent  the  swift  swallow 
flying  over  the  country  to  search.  At  last  the  swallow 
came  back  with  the  news  that  fire  was  in  the  possession 
of  a  family  living  some  distance  away.  Then  these 
braves  said  they  would  find  a  way  to  get  some.  One 
changed  himself  into  a  beaver,  and  the  other  changed 
himself  into  an  eagle.  The  eagle  sailed  away  through 
the  air  and  found  a  clam-shell.  The  beaver  started  off, 
and,  travelling  by  land  and  water,  came  to  the  place 
where  the  people  had  the  fire.     In  the  morning  the  girl 


■■ 


140     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

who  went  to  the  creek  for  water  ran  back  with  the 
news  that  a  beaver  was  at  the  watering-place.  A  young 
man  went  out  with  bow  and  arrow,  shot  the  beaver,  took 
him  to  the  lodge,  and  began  to  skin  him. 

" '  Oh,  my  elder  brother,  the  eagle,  he  is  long  in 
coming;  I  am  nearly  gone,'  thought  the  beaver. 

"  Just  then  the  eagle  perched  on  the  top  of  the  ladder 
and  attracted  the  attention  of  the  people.  They  forgot 
about  the  beaver  and  tried  to  shoot  the  eagle.  But 
though  they  fired  many  arrows,  they  could  not  kill 
him.  While  this  was  going  on  the  beaver  caused  the 
water  to  come  up  and  flood  the  house.  The  people 
became  so  excited  at  this  that  the  eagle  had  a  chance  to 
drop  his  clam-shell  unnoticed  into  the  fire.  The  beaver, 
who  was  watching  for  it,  filled  it  with  fire,  put  it  under 
his  arm,  and  put  off  in  the  water.  The  eagle  followed, 
and  together  they  spread  the  fire  over  all  their  country. 
They  put  a  little  into  all  the  grass  and  sticks  and  trees, 
everything  that  nowadays  can  burn ;  the  beaver  putting- 
it  in  the  low  parts,  and  the  eagle  doing  the  same  in 
the  high  tree-tops.  Ever  after  all  that  tribe  could  have 
camp-fires." 

This  is  the  reason  why  they  see  a  woman's  face  in 
the  moon :  "  The  moon,"  they  say,  "  used  to  be  an 
Indian,  and  at  one  time  had  a  face  as  bright  as  the  sun. 
He  would  be  just  as  bright  now,  but  a  younger  sister 
sits  on  his  face  and  darkens  it.  When  the  moon  was  a 
handsome  white-faced  Indian  the  stars  were  his  friends. 
Once  he  invited  all  the  stars  to  visit  him.  Only  the 
Pleiades  came,  yet  the  house  was  quite  crowded.  When 
the  moon's  younger  sister  came  in  with  the  water  she 
had  gone  for,  there  was  no  place  left  for  her  to  sit,  so 
the  moon  said,  '  Sit  here  on  my  face,  for  there  is  no 


EARLY  DAYS  m  BRITISH  COLUMBIA     141 

room  elsewhere.'  She  did  so,  and  she  may  still  be  seen 
sitting  on  her  brother's  face,  holding  her  water-bucket, 
thus  making  the  moon  darker  than  the  sun.  From  the 
day  the  Pleiades  gathered  in  the  moon's  house  they  have 
formed  a  cluster  and  travelled  together." 

The  Indians  in  that  country  still  say  that  when  it  is 
going  to  snow  or  rain  the  moon  builds  a  house  for  him- 
self. This  house  is  the  halo  you  see  when  a  storm  is 
coming.  They  also  think  the  clouds  are  the  smoke  from 
the  moon's  pipe.  If  the  weather  has  been  clear  and 
clouds  arise,  they  will  declare  it  is  the  moon  beginning 
to  smoke. 


10 


CHAPTER  XIV. 
The    Fur-Traders. 

Fab  away  in  distant  parts,  where  the  country  was 
still  "  ISTo  Man's  Land,"  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company 
had  their  trading-posts.  These  "  forts,"  as  they  were 
called,  were  small  log  buildings,  much  like  those  which 
were  built  on  Hudson  Bay  when  the  Company  was  first 
formed.  Over  each  floated  the  flag  of  the  Company, 
a  red  flag  on  which  were  the  letters  H.  B.  C.  and 
the  Union  Jack.  It  was  a  flag  the  Indians  had  learned 
to  know  and  respect,  and  that  they  were  glad  to  wel- 
come to  their  land. 

In  charge  of  these  forts  were  the  traders,  solitary 
white  men,  leading  a  lonely  existence  in  that  great 
land.  Through  the  dreary  winters,  when  the  Indians 
were  away  in  distant  hunting-grounds,  the  traders  at 
many  of  the  forts  saw  no  living  thing  except  the  wild 
animals  which  wandered  past.  But  early  in  the  spring, 
when  the  snow  and  ice  showed  signs  of  melting,  the 
Indian  hunters  came  bringing  in  their  furs  on  dog- 
sleighs.  The  loads  were  heavy,  for  besides  the  furs 
the  Indians  carried  along  their  household  goods.  Piled 
on  the  himter's  sleigh  might  be  seen  his  dried  meat, 
the  skin  covering  of  his  tepee,  his  battered  copper  kettle, 
and  the  little  puppy  dogs  too  young  to  follow.  But 
the  baby  in  the  moss-bag  was  carried  on  its  mother's 

142 


THE   FUR-TRADERS  143 

back,  and  the  little  children  of  four  or  five  years  walked 
on  snowshoes  like  their  mother  and  father.  To  reach 
the  fort  they  had  toiled  on  day  after  day,  at  night  mak- 
ing camp  in  the  snow  and  sleeping  wrapped  in  furs 
about  the  fire.  But  they  were  happy  through  it  all, 
for  they  were  thinking  of  the  wonderful  things  they 
were  soon  to  get  from  the  white  man.  The  visit  to 
the  fort  was  the  great  event  of  the  season. 

At  the  fort  they  sat  about  on  the  floor,  resting  and 
waiting  their  turn  to  do  their  trading,  while  the  blaz- 
ing logs  in  the  fire-place  brightened  up  the  room  and 
shed  a  glow  over  their  dusky  faces.  As  each  Indian's 
turn  came,  the  trader  looked  over  his  furs  to  see  how 
many  beaverskins  the  pile  was  worth,  and  then  the 
Indian  and  his  squaw  chose  what  they  wished  from 
the  store-room  in  exchange  for  them.  Powder  and  shot 
came  first,  for  the  Indian  must  hunt  if  he  and  his 
family  were  to  live.  Tobacco  was  usually  the  next 
thing  he  thought  of,  for  all  Indians  are  great  smokers. 
After  this  they  got  a  little  tea  and  sugar  and  some 
flour,  which  they  tied  up  in  an  old  cloth ;  then,  perhaps, 
if  there  were  furs  enough,  a  blanket-coat  for  the  little 
boy.  By  this  time  the  squaw  was  sure  to  have  caught 
sight  of  a  bright-colored  handkerchief.  It  was  what 
she  wanted  more  than  anything  else  for  herself  and  the 
baby  papoose  in  the  moss-bag.  It  may  be  that  she  had 
kept  back  a  skin  for  just  such  a  handkerchief,  and  if 
so  she  was  made  the  proudest  and  happiest  squaw  in 
the  north.  When  the  visit  to  the  fort  was  over,  they 
shook  hands  with  the  trader  and  cheerfully  went  back 
to  the  woods  or  the  plains  for  another  season  of 
hunting. 


144     WHEKE  THE  BUFFALO  EOAMED 

What  a  pile  of  furs  they  had  to  give  for  those  things ! 
But  the  price  in  furs  for  a  cup  of  tea,  sweetened  with 
sugar,  and  for -flour  enough  to  give  the  Indians  a  treat 
of  pancakes,  is  not  to  he  wondered  at  when  one  remem- 
bers that  these  supplies  were  taken  across  lakes  and  up 
and  down  streams  in  canoes,  and  carried  past  rapids 
and  through  the  woods  by  men  or  dogs,  and  loaded  and 
unloaded  dozens  of  times,  before  they  could  make  some 
red  man  happy  in  his  wigwam. 

The  work  the  trader  was  doing  far  away  in  that 
lonely  land  was  a  joy  to  the  Indians.  A  gun,  a  little 
tea  and  sugar,  a  red  cotton  handkerchief,  were  worth 
living  for.  But  surely  the  trader  was  not  adding  to 
the  comfort  of  the  animals  ?  Many  a  little  sable's  soft, 
warm  coat  went  for  a  cotton  handkerchief,  and  often 
the  busy  ermine's  white  fur  paid  for  the  Indian's  pipe 
of  tobacco.  Much  the  same  fate  was  befalling  all  the 
other  animals.  The  poor  beaver,  since  his  coat  became 
dollars  and  cents  for  the  Indians  and  the  trader,  had 
difficulty  in  finding  a  safe  place  to  dam  a  stream  and 
build  his  house. 

Not  only  the  traders  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Com- 
pany, but  foreigners,  too,  were  on  the  Pacific  coast, 
and  sea-otters  were  being  killed  when  storms  drove 
them  ashore.  Such  high  prices  were  paid  for  their 
beautiful  skins  that  traders  lost  sight  of  the  fact  that, 
if  they  were  not  careful,  a  day  would  come  when  no 
sea-otters  could  be  found.  On  that  same  coast  vessels 
were  wrecked  that  might  have  sailed  home  in  safety 
had  the  walrus  been  left  in  peace  to  sound  his  warning. 

Some  trading-posts  were  so  far  north  that  the  Eski- 
mos visited  them.     It  was  a  red-letter  day  to  those 


A   VISIT   TO   AN    INDIAN   ENCAMPMENT. 
(From  an  old  print.) 


A   FUR    BRIGADE. 


-    I 


THE  FUK-TKADEBS  145 

people  when  they  took  their  furs  to  the  white  man  and 
got  some  of  the  wonderful  things  he  had.  Their  odd 
ways  amused  the  trader.  One  of  their  queer  customs 
was  to  rub  the  articles  they  got  all  over  with  their 
tongues,  much  as  a  haby  might  do  with  a  piece  of  taffy. 
Even  needles  they  treated  in  this  way.  It  was  their 
manner  of  showing  that  the  things  then  belonged  to 
them. 

At  a  trading-post  among  the  distant  Eskimos  and 
Indians,  Donald  Smith  (now  Lord  Strathcona)  began 
his  work  in  Canada.  At  the  age  of  eighteen  he  left  his 
home  in  Scotland  to  become  a  Hudson's  Bay  Company 
trader  in  bleak  Labrador,  where  in  summer  the  air  is 
thick  with  mosquitos  and  the  winters  are  long  and  cold 
and  dark.  There  he  remained  for  many  years.  His 
spare  time  was  spent  in  writing,  reading,  and  studying, 
all  the  while  slowly  gaining  the  knowledge  of  the 
country  which  in  after  years  enabled  him  to  give  so 
much  help  to  the  ISTorth-West,  of  which  you  will  read 
later. 

Another  name  well  known  in  the  annals  of  the  Hud- 
son's Bay  Company  is  that  of  Sir  George  Simpson, 
who  became  governor  of  the  great  Company  just  after 
the  ISTorth-West  Company  united  with  it.  He  held 
that  office  for  some  thirty-nine  years.  Under  his  wise 
leadership  a  successful  trade  was  carried  on  and 
many  new  forts  were  built.  He  never  failed  to  take 
his  yearly  journey  across  the  continent  to  visit  the 
different  trading-posts.  As  he  had  great  distances  to 
travel,  it  is  little  wonder  that  he  was  always  in  a 
hurry.  It  is  said  that  one  day,  when  he  had  been 
persistently  urging  on  his  canoe-men,   one  big  voya- 


I  1)1  II  li 


146     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

geur  ducked  him  in  the  water  to  teach  him  to  keep 
quiet  when  they  were  all  doing  their  best.  Sir 
George  was  wise  enough  to  know  that  in  spite  of 
his  hurry  he  must  take  time  to  make  an  impression. 
He  always  entered  a  fort  in  grand  style,  to  the 
strains  of  the  bagpipes,  and  with  his  men  dressed 
in  their  best.  He  made  his  dog  an  object  of  wonder 
to  the  Indians  by  fastening  to  its  collar  a  music-box, 
which  he  wound  up  when  he  came  to  a  fort  or  an 
Indian  village.  In  amazement,  the  red  men  called 
him  "  the  White  Chief  with  the  dog  that  sings." 

Apart  from  the  "  dog  that  sang "  and  the  bagpipes, 
the  Indians  looked  up  to  the  "  White  Chief "  for  the 
same  reason  that  they  did  to  the  flag  and  the  Com- 
pany's traders.  It  was  because  the  great  Company 
always  dealt  fairly  with  them.  The  traders  did  not 
take  advantage  of  their  ignorance  of  the  value  of  goods 
to  cheat  them,  but  gave  them  the  worth  of  their  furs, 
and  were  always  ready  to  help  them.  !N"o  Indian  was 
ever  turned  away  empty-handed  and  hungry.  Those 
who  had  been  unsuccessful  in  the  hunt,  and  had  no 
furs  to  bring,  were  given  goods  on  credit.  The 
Indians,  in  return,  were  just  as  honest  with  the  traders, 
always  coming  back  with  furs  enough  to  pay  their 
debts. 

One  reason  why  the  Indians  on  the  coast  were 
found  to  be  so  treacherous  was  because  men  from 
foreiarti  trading-vessels  had  cheated  and  ill-used  them. 
In  the  far  north,  where  the  Indians  had  been  reached 
only  by  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  traders,  they 
were  so  honest  that  white  men  had  no  need  to  lock 
their   doors,   even  though  the   store-room  was  full   of 


THE  FUK-TKADERS  147 

flour,  tea,  sugar,  tobacco,  and  powder  and  shot,  and 
hungry   Indians   were   passing   every   day. 

A  writer  who  travelled  across  the  North-West  told 
the  following  story  of  an  honest  Indian  at  Hudson's 
Hope,  a  northern  trading-post: 

One  spring  an  Indian  brought  his  furs  from  far 
away  in  the  wilderness  to  a  little  trading-post  on  the 
Peace  River.  At  the  end  of  his  long  journey  he  found 
the  fort  closed.  The  trader  in  charge  had  not  yet 
come  up  the  river  from  the  trading-post  where  he  had 
spent  the  winter.  Only  a  bit  of  parchment  covered 
the  window,  and  the  Indian  could  look  in  and  see 
great  piles  of  the  things  he  most  wanted.  A  keg  of 
powder  and  many  bags  of  shot  were  there,  tobacco 
more  than  any  Indian  could  smoke  in  a  life-time,  and 
the  spotted  cotton  handkerchiefs  that  would  have  so 
pleased  his  wife.  He  looked  at  these  things  and  he 
looked  at  his  furs,  then  he  sat     down  and  thought. 

He  might  easily  have  helped  himself,  but  he  never 
dreamed  of  doing  so.  He  just  waited  and  waited. 
The  days  went  by  and  the  trader  did  not  come.  Now, 
what  was  to  be  done  ?  The  Indian  had  a  long  journey 
ahead  of  him,  and  he  knew  if  he  did  not  start  soon 
the  snow  would  be  gone  before  he  could  reach  home. 
But  he  was  out  of  powder  and  shot,  and  unless  he 
could  get  some  at  the  fort  he  could  not  supply  him- 
self with  food.  Still  he  waited.  The  snow  was 
becoming  soft,  and  travelling  would  be  harder.  He 
would  soon  be  too  weak  from  hunger  to  hunt.  Some- 
thing must  be  done.  After  a  last  weary  look  for  the 
expected  trader,  he  climbed  through  the  parchment 
window.    He  took  three  skins'  worth  of  powder,  plac- 


148     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

ing  the  skins  on  the  keg.  He  measured  out  three 
skins'  worth  of  shot,  and  placed  the  skins  beside  the 
bag.  A  little  tobacco  he  paid  for  in  the  same  way. 
After  hanging  up  the  rest  of  his  skins  to  go  to  the 
credit  of  his  account,  he  took  his  departure,  almost 
afraid  that  he  had  done  wrong. 

"  Oh,  red  man  of  the  woods,  the  credit  of  your 
twenty  skins  hanging  to  the  rafters  of  Hudson's  Hope 
is  not  a  large  one,  but  surely  there  is  a  hope  some- 
where else,  where  your  account  is  kept  in  golden 
letters,  even  though  nothing  but  the  clouds  had  bap- 
tized you,  no  missionary  had  cast  water  on  your  head, 
and  God  only  knows  who  taught  you  to  be  honest." 


CHAPTER  XV. 
The    Missionaries. 

"  The  voyageur  smiles  as  he  listens 
To  the  sound  that  grows  apace; 
Well  he  knows  the  vesper  ringing 
Of  the  bells  of  St.  Boniface. 

"  The  bells  of  the  Roman  Mission, 
That  call  from  their  turrets  twain, 
To  the  boatman  on  the  river, 
To  the  hunter  on  the  plain." 

The  plain  in  this  little  poem  was  the  buffalo's 
home,  and  the  river  the  famous  Red  River.  The 
vesper  bells  that  rang  out  at  eventide  and  were  heard 
by  the  hunter  far  away  on  the  silent  plain,  and  by 
the  boatman  on  the  river,  were  the  bells  of  the  Cathe- 
dral of  St.  Boniface,  the  first  Roman  Catholic  church 
in  the  North-West. 

The  mission  work  of  St.  Boniface  began  in  the 
early  days  of  the  Selkirk  colony.  It  was  the  old  pic- 
turesque cathedral  with  its  "  turrets  twain "  that  the 
first  half-breed  settlers  and  many  of  the  voyageurs 
and  hunters  attended,  and  it  was  there  that  many  an 
Indian  first  heard  of  the  white  man's  religion.  In 
1853,  the  year  after  the  second  disastrous  flood  at 
Red  River,  the  priest  who  began  the  work  at  St. 
Boniface  died,  and  Bishop  Tache  took  his  place.  The 
young  bishop,  who  had  already  travelled  much  among 

149  ' 


150     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

the  Indians,  worked  earnestly,  not  only  for  the  suc- 
cess of  the  church,  but  also  for  the  welfare  of  the  new 
country. 

Though  the  Selkirk  settlers  were  mostly  Presby- 
terians, and  had  been  promised  a  minister  of  their  own 
Church  by  Lord  Selkirk,  it  was  a  Church  of  England 
clergyman,  Rev.  Mr.  West,  who  was  first  sent  to  the 
little  church  of  St.  John's  that  they  had  built  on  the 
spot  chosen  by  Lord  Selkirk.  He  could  not  speak 
their  beloved  Gaelic,  and  they  were  not  accustomed 
to  his  prayer-book.  But  he  was  their  only  minister, 
so  differences  were  for  the  most  part  put  aside,  and 
for  several  years  he  labored  among  them  and  won 
their  sincere  regard. 

Among  the  first  settlers  so  many  nationalities  were 
represented  that  this  first  clergyman  distributed 
Bibles  in  English,  French,  Gaelic,  German,  Danish 
and  Italian.  Upon  his  leaving  Red  River  his  place 
was  filled  by  the  Rev.  D.  T.  Jones,  and  he  in  turn 
was  succeeded  by  the  Rev.  William  Cockran,  who 
spent  the  remainder  of  his  life  among  the  early  settlers, 
voyageurs  and  Indians  of  Rupert's  Land.  Just  after 
his  death  the  good  Bishop  Machray  arrived  at  Red 
River  and  began  his  invaluable  work  for  the  Wesfc. 

After  attending  the  Church  of  England  services 
for  nearly  forty  years,  the  Presbyterian  settlers  were 
overjoyed  to  hear  that  a  minister  of  their  own  Church 
was  at  last  coming  to  them.  The  Rev.  John  Black,  who 
had  been  sent  out  by  the  Presbyterian  Church  of  Can- 
ada, reached  the  settlement  on  the  19th  of  September, 
1851.  About  three  hundred  Presbyterians  who  had 
been  attending  St.  John's  Church  now  went  to  hear 


THE  MISSIONARIES  151 

their  own  minister.  The  Kildonan  church  was  not 
yet  finished,  and  for  a  time  services  were  held  in  the 
manse.  Rev.  John  Black  remained  at  Red  River  until 
his  death.  He  was  always  a  warm  friend  to  his 
people,  and  was  greatly  beloved  by  them.  He  was 
much  interested  in  missions,  and  gladly  did  what  he 
could  to  encourage  mission  work  among  the  Indians. 

Not  only  in  the  settlements  were  the  missionaries 
found,  but  back  in  the  wilds  among  the  red  men. 
They  had  been  following  the  fur-traders  far  into  the 
country  to  carry  the  Gospel  to  the  Indians.  At  their 
missions  they  tried  to  form  little  schools  where  Indian 
children  could  learn  to  read  the  Bible. 

In  their  work  the  missionaries  met  with  the  same 
trials  and  dangers  as  the  explorers,  and  often  more 
discouragements.  Many  of  the  Indians  did  not  wish 
to  become  Christians  and  go  to  a  heaven  where  they 
could  not  make  war.  They  would  say :  "  White  man's 
religion  not  good  for  Indians."  The  medicine-men, 
who  were  found  in  every  tribe,  worked  against  the 
missionaries.  They  saw  that  when  Indians  became 
Christians,  they  no  longer  believed  that  disease  was 
caused  by  evil  spirits  which  could  be  driven  away  by 
the  singing  and  blowing  of  medicine-men.  So  they 
tried  to  persuade  their  people  to  drive  the  mission- 
aries away.  However,  in  spite  of  these  things,  many 
Indians  were  glad  to  hear  the  Gospel,  and  tried  to  live 
better  lives.  The  Bible  stories  were  wonderful  to 
them.  To  listen  to  the  missionaries  they  would  some- 
times travel  hundred?  of  miles  in  the  coldest  weather, 
and  stand  upon  the  frozen  prairie  while  he  preached 
to  them.     Christianity  made  them  less  cruel  in  war, 


152     WHEEE   THE  BUFFALO  EOAMED 

more  refined  in  their  homes,  and  taught  the  men  how 
wrong  it  was  to  leave  all  the  hard  work  to  be  done  by 
the  women. 

The  Indians  found  it  difficult  to  believe  they  would 
not  need  their  warm  furs,  their  pipes,  their  weapons 
and  their  dogs  in  the  white  man's  heaven.  Some  said 
they  would  not  join  the  white  man's  church  unless 
they  might  be  buried  with  their  warm  robes  about 
them,  for  they  feared  they  would  be  cold  in  the  white 
man's  happy  hunting-grounds.  One  day,  when  a  mis- 
sionary was  resting  at  the  door  of  his  little  log  mission 
house,  an  Indian,  who  had  just  joined  the  church, 
appeared  carrying  a  black  dog  which  was  ill.  He 
astonished  the  missionary  by  asking  him  to  baptize  it. 
The  missionary  tried  to  explain  that  he  could  not  do 
so.  The  Indian  turned  away  saying,  "  If  my  dog 
cannot  go  to  white  man's  heaven,  neither  shall  I.  We 
both  go  to  Indian's  happy  hunting-ground."  Then 
he  made  his  way  back  into  the  forest,  and  for  months 
would  not  come  again  to  the  mission  church. 

Though  the  Indians  were  bright  and  quick,  it  was 
difficult  to  keep  them  at  school  long  enough  to  teach 
them  to  read.  The  children  did  not  want  to  sit  still 
and  study,  but  preferred  to  follow  their  fathers  to  the 
hunt,  and  very  few  of  the  older  Indians  ever  had 
time  to  study. 

James  Evans,  a  Methodist  missionary,  found  a  way 
to  overcome  this  difficulty.  The  Indians  about  Nor- 
way House,  where  he  worked  at  the  time,  really 
wanted  to  learn  to  read  the  Bibles  he  gave  them,  but 
before  they  had  mastered  more  than  a  few  words  they 
would  hear  that  moose-tracks  had  been  seeu,  perhaps 


THE  MISSIONAKIES  153 

many  miles  away.  Off  they  would  go,  and  it  might 
be  months  before  they  would  return  to  Norway  House. 
Now,  one  day  when  the  Indians  had  hurried  off 
suddenly  in  the  midst  of  their  study,  an  easy  way  of 
teaching  them  came  to  him.  For  some  time  he  had 
been  carefully  studying  the  Cree  language.  He  had 
iound  that  the  whole  language  consisted  of  only  about 
thirty-six  syllabic  sounds,  and  that  the  words  were 
simply  combinations  of  these  sounds.  His  method 
was  to  make  a  character  to  stand  for  each  sound,  and 
then  to  write  the  Cree  words  with  these  characters. 
For  instance,  for  a  word  of  three  syllables,  or  sounds, 
he  made  the  three  characters  which  stood  for  those 
sounds,  placing  them  in  the  order  in  which  the  sounds 
came  in  the  word.  It  was  a  sort  of  easy  shorthand  of 
the  Cree  language  which  he  had  invented.  By  this 
method,  all  he  needed  to  do  was  to  teach  the  Indians 
which  character  stood  for  each  sound. 

The  missionary's  invention  proved  a  great  success. 
The  Indians  were  all  delighted  to  learn  to  read  with- 
out first  learning  to  spell,  and  called  the  passages, 
which  he  wrote  on  birchbark,  "bark  which  could 
talk."  They  came  for  passages  of  the  Bible  and 
hymns  faster  than  Mr.  Evans  could  write  them  out. 
Even  though  some  of  the  Indians  were  soon  able  to 
help  him,  he  was  kept  busy  copying  hymns  and  scrip- 
ture texts. 

A  little  later  Mr.  Evans  made  himself  a  kind  of 
printing-press.  He  whittled  his  first  type  from  blocks 
of  wood,  mixing  soot  out  of  the  chimney  with  a  little 
water  to  make  ink  for  printing.  Birchbark  was  his 
paper.     He  afterwards  made  a  better  type  out  of  old 


154     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

bullets  and  lead  from  the  tea-chests.  With  his  home- 
made printing-press  he  made  some  birchbark  books 
which  greatly  delighted  the  Indians.  They  soon 
learned  to  sing  the  hymns  in  their  soft,  sweet  voices. 
Here  is  a  stanza  of  one  of  their  favorite  hymns  in  the 
Cree  syllables  as  Mr.  Evans  printed  it  in  his  home- 
made type: 

"«°,  LL"Cdr  <tpx, 

Cdt°   t>PL°; 

4'V-<nc  co  ru, 
ll°  o-b_rcx. 

Joy  to  the  world  I  the  Lord  is  come ! 

Let  earth  receive  her  King ; 
Let  every  heart  prepare  him  room, 

And  heaven  and  nature  sing. 

By  means  of  Mr.  Evans'  Cree  syllabic  alphabet,  a 
clever  Indian  could  learn  to  read  in  a  few  days.  In- 
deed, there  have  been  Indians  who  began  to  study 
in  the  morning  and  could  read  before  sunset  of  the 
same  day.  Many  missionaries  have  since  made  use 
of  this  system  to  help  them  in  their  work  among  the 
Crees. 

Far  through  the  country,  even  near  the  Rocky 
Mountains,  missionaries  travelled,  not  in  the  parlor- 
cars  which  now  go  through  the  country,  but  by  follow- 
ing the  hunter's  path  to  the  camp,  or  the  pack-trail 
from  one  fort  to  another;  and  often,  on  the  trackless 
plain,  guided  only  by  the  sun,  or  the  moon  and  the 
stars.  No  bridges  soanned  the  rivers  in  those  days. 
Some  missionaries  were  known  to   send  their  goods 


REV.    GEORGE    M'DOUGALL. 


FATHER   LACOMBE. 


WILLIAM    DUXCAN. 


REV.    JAMES    EVANS. 


REV.    JOHN    BLACK. 


AKCHBISHOP   TACIIE. 


c 

Pt  * 


V 


# 


ARCHBISHOP    MAC  1 1  RAY. 


FAMOUS   MISvSIONARIES. 


THE  MISSIONARIES  155 

over  in  a  boat  made  by  putting  an  oilcloth  over  a  large 
hoop.  They  crossed  over  themselves  by  holding  to  their 
horses'  tails  while  the  horses  swam  through  the  water. 

Prince  Albert,  on  the  Saskatchewan,  was  founded 
by  Rev.  James  Nisbet,  one  of  the  ministers  who  worked 
far  beyond  the  settled  parts  of  the  country.  Two 
well-known  missionaries  who  travelled  near  the  Rocky 
Mountains  were  Father  Lacombe  and  Rev.  George 
McDougall,  the  former  of  whom  is  still  living.  No 
matter  how  swollen  the  rivers,  or  how  rough  the 
track,  these  men  tried  to  reach  each  camp  at  the 
promised  time,  so  that  the  Indians  might  have  perfect 
faith  in  them.  The  Indians  called  them  "  Men  of  one 
word,"  their  way  of  denoting  men  who  kept  their 
word.  One  of  these  missionaries,  in  journeying  from 
one  mission  to  another,  swam,  waded  or  forded  thirty 
rivers.  Often  on  their  long  journeys  they  were  over- 
taken by  storms  and  lost  their  way  on  the  pathless 
plains,  and  towards  spring  they  were  always  in  danger 
of  snow-blindness. 

There  were  other  dangers  than  these.  When  Radis- 
son,  Yerendrye  and  other  early  fur-traders  went  into 
the  country,  the  Indians  were  delighted  to  have 
the  white  men  among  them.  But  when  so  many  came 
to  settle  in  their  country,  and  game  became  scarce, 
their  welcome  to  the  white  man  was  not  always  a  warm 
one.  At  one  time  a  missionary  was  busy  skinning 
buffalo  on  the  prairie.  Now,  Indians  in  their  moc- 
casined  feet  glide  so  quietly  along,  and  their  graceful 
movements  are  so  like  the  swaying  of  the  prairie 
grass,  that  they  can  come  very  near  without  being 
noticed.      The  missionary   saw  no   one  until   he  was 


156      WHERE   THE  BUFFALO   ROAMED 

startled  by  a  terrific  war-whoop,  and  almost  instantly 
he  was  surrounded  by  angry  Indians  ready  to  kill 
him  because  the  white  men  were  taking  their  buf- 
faloes. He  told  them  that  if  they  fought  it  would 
grieve  the  Great  Spirit,  who  had  made  them  friends 
and  brothers.  Then  they  laid  down  their  weapons 
and  sat  about  peacefully  listening  to  him  talk.  The 
red  men  were  always  reverential  when  the  Great  Spirit 
was  mentioned. 

Some  of  the  Indians  were  always  ready  to  believe 
the  medicine-men  when  they  said  the  missionaries  had 
induced  bad  spirits  to  spread  the  smallpox,  and  when 
it  broke  out  among  them  they  wanted  to  kill  the  mis- 
sionaries. At  one  time,  when  a  minister's  family  were 
at  work  in  the  garden,  Indians  who  had  come  to  kill 
them  were  hidden  all  about  in  the  long  grass,  yet  not 
a  shot  was  fired.  Possibly,  when  they  looked  at  the 
innocent  faces  of  their  white  friends,  they  could  not 
believe  they  had  tried  to  bring  them  disease.  The 
Indians  themselves  said,  "  The  Great  Spirit  will  not 
let  us  shoot." 

West  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  many  of  the  Indians 
welcomed  the  missionaries  to  their  lodges,  and  were 
glad  to  hear  of  the  white  man's  God.  Strange  to  say, 
among  some  tribes  in  that  country,  missionaries  heard 
legends  which  were  not  unlike  parts  of  the  white  man's 
Bible.  One,  which  had  been  told  from  grandfather 
to  father,  and  from  father  to  son,  for  no  one  knows 
how  long,  was  a  story  of  a  flood  which  makes  us 
think  of  Noah.  According  to  this  kitchi-a-tesoka,  or 
great  tale,  ages  ago  the  water  flowed  over  the  whole 
earth,   and  all  the  Indians  perished  but  one  family, 


THE  MISSIONAKIES  157 

who  got  into  a  great  canoe  and  took  with  them  all  the 
different  kinds  of  animals.  After  floating  about  a 
long  time,  one  little  muskrat  became  so  tired  of  being 
in  a  canoe  that  it  could  stand  it  no  longer,  and  dived 
into  the  water.  It  soon  reappeared  with  a  mouthful 
of  earth,  which  it  placed  upon  the  water.  From  this 
mouthful  of  earth  the  new  world  grew.  Little  Indian 
papooses  play  with  tiny  canoes  and  animals  cut  out 
of  wood  just  as  white  children  play  with  their  Noah's 
arks. 

Other  Indians  told  a  different  story  of  the  Flood. 
They  said  that  when  the  water  flowed  over  the  earth 
it  did  not  quite  cover  the  mountain-tops.  Some  of 
the  Indians  climbed  to  the  high  peaks  and  were  saved. 
Others  got  into  their  canoes  and  drifted  in  all  direc- 
tions. When  the  water  went  down  again  the  canoes 
were  left  on  dry  ground,  where  they  had  been  driven 
by  the  flood.  That  is  why  Indians  are  scattered  over 
the  different  parts  of  the  country,  but  all  are  the  same 
people,  and  all  have  much  the  same  customs. 

Another  tradition  was  that  the  world  was  once  a 
fluid  mass,  all  in  darkness,  with  no  living  thing  upon 
it.  Then  the  Great  Spirit  came  down  in  the  form 
of  a  huge  bird,  and,  spreading  its  wings  over  the 
earth,  made  land  and  water  as  they  now  are,  and 
created  the  sun  and  moon  and  all  living  things  upon 
the  earth. 

Some  missionaries  found  Indians  anxious  to  belong 

to  the  white  man's  church  until  they  were  told  that  in 

order  to  do  so  they  must  give  up  their  cruel  customs, 

their   wars,    and   their   gambling.      They   would   then 

lose  their  interest  in  religion  and  go  off  to  fight  their 
11 


158      WHERE   THE   BUFFALO  ROAMED 

enemies.  But  this  was  not  always  the  case.  One 
particularly  successful  missionary  in  the  early  days 
of  British  Columbia  was  Mr.  Duncan.  His  work  was 
among  the  Tsimpsean  tribe,  a  wild  and  savage  race  of 
Indians,  who  were  easily  made  angry,  and  when 
aroused  to  wrath  were  never  content  until  they  had 
committed  some  cruel  act.  One  of  the  first  things 
he  saw  at  their  camp  was  some  of  these  savages  ill- 
using  and  murdering  a  slave.  Though  they  had  many 
medicine-men,  who  in  cases  of  illness  were  continually 
singing,  dancing,  and  shaking  their  rattles,  and  declar- 
ing they  could  cure  all  diseases,  and  though  most  of 
their  young  braves  spent  their  days  in  gambling,  yet 
they  were  glad  to  see  the  missionary  and  give  him  a 
place  by  their  camp-fire. 

Shortly  after  Mr.  Duncan  went  there,  the  discovery 
of  gold  brought  in  the  rush  of  miners,  and  with  that 
the  Indians  began  to  get  "fire-water,"  which  made 
them  more  dangerous,  their  homes  more  miserable, 
and  the  missionary's  work  a  hundred  times  harder.  In 
spite  of  his  difficulties,  Mr.  Duncan  opened  a  little 
school  in  the  home  of  the  chief,  and  twenty-six  children 
came  to  it.  Before  the  end  of  the  year  five  times  as 
many  children  were  attending,  and  twice  that  number 
of  older  Indians. 

In  a  few  years  the  mission  had  grown  so  that  Mr. 
Duncan  decided  to  establish  a  mission  village  where 
the  Indian  village  of  Metlahkatlah  had  been.  On  the 
dav  when  he  invited  the  Indians  to  come  with  him 
and  live  as  Christians  in  the  mission  village,  all  the 
red  men  came  out  of  their  lodges  to  watch  what  was 
going  on.     They  sat  in  a  half -circle,  perfectly  motion- 


THE  MISSIONARIES  159 

less,  their  cloaks  about  them,  their  chins  resting  upon 
their  knees.  One  after  another  the  Indians  rose  and 
stood  beside  the  missionary,  until  there  were  about 
fifty,  who  in  six  canoes  paddled  to  Metlahkatlah. 
Others  joined  them  from  day  to  day,  and  when  the 
Bishop  came  to  visit  them,  so  many  wanted  to  be  bap- 
tized that  he  was  kept  busy  from  eight  in  the  morning 
until  one  o'clock  the  next  morning,  and  the  little  lamp 
was  quite  burned  out.  So  anxious  were  the  Indians 
that  they  all  forgot  that  sundown  was  their  bed-time. 

Before  Mr.  Duncan's  mission  had  been  long  estab- 
lished, there  were  one  thousand  Indians  in  the  village. 
All  of  these  had  promised  to  stop  gambling  and  drink- 
ing and  painting  their  faces.  These  pledges  were  by 
no  means  easy  for  a  coast  Indian  to  keep.  They  also 
promised  to  rest  and  go  to  church  on  Sunday. 

One  old  chief  who  visited  the  mission  some  years 
after  was  greatly  pleased,  and  asked  that  a  missionary 
might  be  sent  to  his  people.  In  speaking  of  it  he  said : 
"A  rope  has  been  thrown  out  from  Metlahkatlah  which 
is  encircling  and  drawing  together  all  the  Indian  tribes 
into  one  common  brotherhood." 

Mr.  Duncan  taught  the  Indians  to  live  in  a  more 
comfortable  way,  and  to  provide  for  the  future.  They 
had  dwelt  in  miserable  huts  before,  but  he  showed 
them  how  to  make  comfortable  houses.  Some  even 
had  an  upstairs,  with  a  guest-chamber  in  their  new 
homes.  He  taught  them  to  make  gardens  and  to  raise 
vegetables,  and  encouraged  them  in  their  weaving  of 
baskets  of  rushes,  and  mats  of  cedar  bark,  and  in  carv- 
ing, an  art  in  which  they  were  particularly  skilful. 
Many    of    them    were    able    to    carve    almost    perfect 


160     WHEKE   THE   BUFFALO  ROAMED 

beavers  out  of  wood,  or  model  them  in  silver.  In  time 
they  built  a  very  fine  church  and  had  an  Indian  band. 
The  young  people  in  the  school  learned  to  read  and 
write  in  the  English  language.  Though  their  expres- 
sion at  first  seems  very  curious,  we  can  readily  under- 
stand them.  Here  are  some  notes  from  a  letter  and 
diary  of  one  of  the  pupils*. 

"  April  4th. — Please,  Sir,  I  want  to  speak  to  you. 
I  wish  I  had  some  powder  for  my  gun.  All  done  shot. 
All  done  for  me.  What  for  you  want  to  shoot  ducks? 
Because  it  is  very  sweet.  Please,  Sir,  Mr.  Duncan, 
wili  you  give  me  a  little  powder  and  a  little  shot  ?  If 
you  will  give  me  any  powder,  then  I  will  be  happy." 

"April  10th. — I  could  not  sleep  last  night.  I  must 
work  hard  last  night.  I  could  not  be  lazy  last  night. 
No  good  lazy — very  bad.  We  must  learn  to  make  all 
things.  When  we  understand  reading  and  writing 
then  it  will  be  very  easy.  Perhaps  two  years,  then  we 
understand." 

"May  17th. — I  do  not  understand  some  prayers — 
only  a  few  prayers  I  understand,  not  all  I  understand, 
no.     I  wish  to  understand  all  prayers." 

When  the  Indians  came  to  be  well  acquainted  with 
their  missionary,  they  talked  to  him  more  freely  about 
themselves.  Perhaps  you  would  like  to  hear  their 
description  of  the  landing  of  the  first  white  man  along 
their  coast.  Many  children  say  they  "  just  died  laugh- 
ing." These  Indians,  as  you  will  read,  "  died "  from 
astonishment : 

"A  large  canoe  of  Indians  were  busy  catching  hali- 
but in  one  of  the  channels,  when  a  thick  mist  enveloped 
them.       Suddenly  they  heard   a  noise   as   if    a  large 


THE  MISSIONARIES  161 

animal  were  striking  through  the  water.  Immediately 
they  concluded  that  a  monster  from  the  deep  was  in 
pursuit  of  them.  With  all  speed  they  hauled  up  their 
fishing-lines  and  strained  every  nerve  to  reach  the 
shore.  Still  the  plunging  noise  came  nearer.  Every 
minute  they  expected  to  be  engulfed  within  the  jaws 
of  some  large  creature.  However,  they  reached  the 
land.  Soon  a  boat  filled  with  strange-looking  men 
emerged  from  the  mist.  The  pulling  of  oars  caused 
the  strange  noise. 

"  The  strangers  landed  and  beckoned  to  the  Indians 
to  bring  them  some  fish.  One  of  them  had  over  his 
shoulder  what  was  supposed  to  be  only  a  stick.  Pres- 
ently he  pointed  it  at  a  bird  that  was  flying.  A 
violent  l  poo '  went  forth.  Down  came  the  bird  to  the 
ground.     The  Indians  died. 

"When  they  revived,  the  whites  were  making  signs 
for  a  fire  to  be  lighted.  The  Indians  began  as  usual, 
rubbing  two  sticks  together.  The  strangers  laughed, 
and  one  of  them  snatched  up  a  handful  of  dry  grass, 
struck  a  spark  into  a  little  powder  placed  under  it. 
Instantly  another  '  poo '  and  a  blaze.    The  Indians  died. 

"After  this  the  newcomers  wanted  some  fish  boiled. 
The  Indians  put  the  fish  and  water  into  one  of  their 
square  wooden  buckets,  and  set  some  stones  on  the  fire, 
intending,  when  they  were  hot,  to  cast  them  into  the 
vessel  and  thus  boil  the  food.  The  whites  were  not 
satisfied  with  this  way.  One  of  them  fetched  a  tin 
kettle  out  of  the  boat,  put  the  fish  and  some  water  into 
it,  and  then,  strange  to  say,  put  it  on  the  fire.  The 
Indians  looked  on  with  astonishment.     However,  the 


162      WHERE   THE   BUFFALO  ROAMED 

kettle  did  not  burn  up.  The  water  did  not  run  into 
the  fire.     Then  again  the  Indians  died. 

"  The  Indians'  turn  had  now  come  to  make  the  white 
strangers  die.  They  dressed  their  heads  and  painted 
their  faces.  Nok-nok,  or  the  wonder-working  spirit, 
possessed  them.  They  came  along  slowly  and  solemnly, 
seated  themselves  before  the  whites,  and  suddenly  lifted 
up  their  heads  and  stared.  Their  reddened  eyes  had 
the  desired  effect — the  white  men  died." 

Before  the  Indians  really  understood  the  white 
man's  religion,  they  were  likely  to  mix  it  with  their 
own  belief.  Once  a  white  man  was  travelling  with  some 
Indians  in  a  canoe  when  a  thunderstorm  came  up. 
At  every  peal  the  Indians,  who  believed  thunder  was 
the  voice  of  the  Great  Spirit,  rested  on  their  paddles 
and  said  a  long  prayer  which  had  been  taught  them  by 
some  missionary.  The  rain  came  down  in  torrents, 
but  that  did  not  matter.  Each  time  the  prayer  must 
be  finished  before  they  went  on.  All  were  soaked, 
and  the  white  man  was  very  angry,  but  the  Indians 
were  happy,  for  they  believed  they  had  pleased  the 
Great  Spirit  by  saying  all  the  prayers  they  knew  when 
spoken  to  in  that  voice  of  thunder. 


f* 

rt 

« 

< 

o 

^ 

H 

~ 

— 1 

rt 

_o 

%, 

o 

ft 

X 

i~-\ 

£ 

0 

1/ 

n 

p< 

>-^ 

>> 

{-i 

t-T 

£ 

< 
0 

w 

B 

ca 

Pt 

■g 

2 

u 
w 

u 

.0 

bo 

•-s 

ft 

**"] 

w 

s 

= 

ry> 

o 

'rt 

hH 

n 

a 

a: 

1/2 

o 

0 

ft 

£ 

H 

£ 

o 

X 

in 

CHAPTEE  XVI. 
Trouble  at  Red   River. 

In  the  fall  of  1869  Fort  Garrv  was  all  in  confusion. 
The  people  there  were  busy  preparing  for  a  new  gov- 
ernor, but  all  were  not  doing  so  in  the  same  way. 
Some  were  making  ready  to  welcome  his  arrival,  but 
the  half-breeds  were  angry  and  said  they  would  not 
allow  the  governor  to  enter  the  settlement.  Taking 
their  weapons  with  them,  they  marched  out  and  built 
a  fence  across  the  road  by  which  he  would  come,  and 
waited  beside  it,  threatening  to  shoot  anyone  who  tried 
to  pull  it  down. 

You  will  remember  that,  after  Lord  Selkirk's  death, 
the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  bought  back  his  territory 
and  ruled  over  the  settlement.  Now,  the  governor  of 
the  Company  was  there  at  this  time,  lying  ill  in  his 
home  at  Fort  Garry.  /  Why  another  governor  was  sent, 
and  why  the  half-breeds  did  not  want  him,  is  a  long 
story.  To  understand  it  all,  one  must  go  back  to  a  great 
event  that  occurred  in  1867.  Until  that  year  the  prov- 
inces of  Canada  were  not  united.  There  was  no 
Dominion,  and  consequently  no  Dominion  Day.  But 
on  the  1st  of  July,  1867,  an  Act  of  the  British  Par- 
liament, called  the  British  North  America  Act,  came 
into  force  and  joined  the  scattered  provinces  into  the 
Dominion  of  Canada.  The  1st  of  July  then  became 
Dominion  Day,  our  great  national  holiday. 

The     Selkirk    settlement   did    not  come     into    the 

163 


164     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

Dominion  at  that  time,  but  remained  under  the  con- 
trol of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company.  However,  in  the 
year  1869,  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  agreed  to  give 
up  to  Canada  the  possession  of  Rupert's  Land  in 
return  for  the  sum  of  £300,000,  and  a  piece  of  land 
near  each  trading-post,  and  one-twentieth  of  the  land 
in  what  was  called  the  "  Fertile  Belt " — that  is,  the 
territory  between  Lake  Winnipeg  and  the  Rocky 
Mountains.  These  arrangements  were  to  come  into 
effect  on  the  1st  of  January,  1870,  when  the  colony 
was  to  become  a  part  of  the  Dominion  and  to  have  a 
lieutenant-governor  of  its  own. 

During  the  summer  of  1869,  the  Dominion  Govern- 
ment sent  surveyors  out  to  Red  River  to  measure  the 
land  into  square  lots.  ~Now,  the  half-breed  settlers 
living  there  had  taken  up  farms  of  any  shape  they 
liked,  mostly  in  long,  narrow  strips,  running  back  from 
the  river,  so  that  they  might  each  have  a  little  of  the 
river  front  and  build  their  houses  near  together  on 
the  river-bank.  They  had  not  been  consulted  about 
the  change  which  was  to  be  made.  It  had  not  even 
been  explained  to  them,  so  it  is  no  wonder,  when  they 
saw  strange  men  driving  stakes  here  and  there  on  their 
land,  that  they  feared  their  long  narrow  farms  were 
to  be  changed  into  square  ones,  or  that  the  land  was 
going  to  be  taken  away  from  them. 

About  this  time  William  Macdougall,  who  was  to 
be  governor  when  the  new  arrangements  came  into 
force,  decided  to  go  west  and  be  ready  for  his  duties. 
To  see  the  surveyors  at  work  was  bad  enough,  but  when 
the  half-breeds  heard  that  a  governor  was  coming  to 
rule  over  those  square  farms  they  were  greatly  excited, 


TEOUBLE  AT  RED  RIVER  165 

and  thought  the  country  would  be  made  into  some- 
thing altogether  different.  They  felt  much  as  the 
animals  did  when  they  saw  the  white  men  coming  into 
their  land  with  guns  and  steel  traps.  Among  the 
Erench  half-breeds  was  a  man  of  some  ability,  named 
Louis  Riel,  who  had  studied  at  Laval  University,  in 
Montreal,  and  was  better  educated  than  most  of  the 
others.  He  was  a  clever  speaker,  and  soon  made 
himself  the  leader  of  his  people  and  urged  them  to 
rebel  against  the  new  change.  This  is  the  reason  a 
fence  was  built  across  the  road  and  closely  watched 
by  the  angry  half-breeds./ 

When  Governor  Macdougall  with  his  family  was  near- 
ing  the  end  of  his  journey,  he  found,  instead  of  a  wel- 
come, a  carefully  guarded  fence  across  his  way.  His 
order  to  remove  it  met  with  such  prompt  refusal  and 
show  of  arms  that  he  was  obliged  to  go  back  to  Pembina 
and  spend  the  winter  there  at  the  fort,  where  Lord 
Selkirk's  colonists  had  so  often  taken  refuge.  It  was 
by  no  means  a  pleasant  time  for  him,  as  he  had  not 
been  expected  at  Pembina,  and  no  warm  house  was 
ready  for  him. 

Meanwhile,  as  winter  was  approaching,  the  people 
guarding  the  fence  found  it  rather  cold  there  and 
moved  into  Fort  Garry.  Riel  took  possession  of  the 
quarters  that  had  been  prepared  for  the  governor.  He 
talked  wildly  of  what  he  would  do  for  his  people,  and 
soon  had  the  poor  Erench  half-breeds  looking  upon  him 
as  their  protector.  It  was  an  anxious  time  for  the 
loyal  settlers,  for  they  had  no  idea  what  this  excited 
man  might  do ;  and  as  he  had  possession  of  the  strong- 
hold, they  knew  he  could  not  easily  be  put  down. 


166      WHERE   THE  BUFFALO   ROAMED 

Wishing  to  frighten  these  loyalists,  Riel  first  had 
a  number  of  them,  who  had  gathered  at  the  home  of 
Dr.  Schultz,  taken  prisoners  by  his  half-breeds.  They 
were  crowded  into  such  a  small  room  that  to  keep  from 
suffocating  they  had  to  break  a  pane  of  glass,  and  were 
then  nearly  frozen  by  the  cold  wind  blowing  into  the 
fireless  prison.  Throughout  their  imprisonment  they 
were  most  uncomfortable,  as  they  were  not  allowed 
proper  food,  nor  warmth  enough  for  winter  weather. 

Dr.  Schultz  was  placed  in  a  cold  room  by  himself. 
Kind  friends,  knowing  his  condition,  often  sent  him 
in  delicacies.  One  day  a  pudding  was  sent,  and  deep 
down  in  the  centre  he  found  a  knife  and  a  gimlet. 
With  the  knife  he  cut  the  buffalo  robe  he  slept  upon 
into  long  strips,  and  tied  these  together  to  form  a  rope. 
To  add  to  its  length,  he  cut  up  some  of  his  clothes. 
When  night  came  and  all  was  quiet,  he  fastened  one 
end  of  the  rope  through  a  hole  that  he  had  made  with 
the  gimlet  in  the  window  casing,  and  let  himself  down. 
His  rope  did  not  reach  to  the  ground,  and  at  the  end 
of  it  he  had  a  long  jump.  Though  hurt,  he  managed 
to  get  to  the  house  of  a  friend  in  Kildonan,  who,  regard- 
less of  Riel's  displeasure,  gladly  gave  him  shelter. 
But  Dr.  Schultz  could  not  remain  there  long,  as 
Riel's  men  were  soon  out  searching  for  him.  When  he 
learned  that  they  had  orders  to  shoot  him  on  sight,  he 
set  out  at  once,  with  a  faithful  half-breed  guide,  upon 
the  long  journey  across  the  country  to  Fort  William. 
After  tramping  five  hundred  miles  in  midwinter 
weather,  he  reached  his  destination  in  safety.  It  may 
be  interesting  to  the  reader  to  know  that  Mr.  MacBeth, 
the  writer  of  the  Introduction  to  this  book,  is  a  son  of 


TROUBLE  AT  RED  RIVER  167 

the  Kildonan  settler  in  whose  house  Dr.  Schultz  found 
refuge  after  escaping  from  the  fort. 

Kiel's  actions  continued  to  alarm  the  loyalists.  He 
forced  open  the  doors  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company's 
warehouses,  and  took  from  them  whatever  he  wished. 
Their  cattle  were  killed  to  supply  his  men  with  meat. 
He  raised  a  rebel  flag,  and  the  governor  of  the  Hud- 
son's Bay  Company  was  powerless  to  prevent  it,  though 
he  told  a  friend  that  when  he  saw  it  from  his  bedroom 
window  he  almost  choked  with  mortification.  Riel 
even  placed  a  guard  in  the  governor's  house  to  prevent 
the  visits  of  his  friends.  Eriends  of  the  prisoners  were 
not  allowed  to  visit  them  unless  a  guard  was  sent  in 
to  hear  what  was  being  said.  All  mail  coming  or  going 
passed  through  Eiel's  hands,  and  as  there  was  no  tele- 
graph line,  the  loyalists  had  no  sure  means  of  com- 
munication with  the  outside  world. 

When  the  Canadian  Government  heard  of  these 
serious  troubles  they  sent  messages  to  Eort  Garry  to 
quiet  the  half-breeds.  They  were  sent  by  a  special 
commissioner  who  was  to  explain  matters  to  the  people 
and  do  all  he  could  to  bring  peace  to  the  Red  River 
settlement.  The  man  chosen  for  this  important  mission 
was  Donald.  A.  Smith  (now  Lord  Strathcona),  who 
for  many  years,  as  we  have  seen,  had  been  a  fur-trader 
and  knew  the  country  well. 

Now,  Riel's  followers  were  many,  and  in  their 
excited  condition  the  slightest  thing  might  cause  an 
outbreak  of  violence.  There  was  always  danger,  too, 
that  they  might  get  the  Indians  to  join  them.  The 
loyalists  had  no  way  of  protecting  themselves.  Miles 
and  miles  of  deep  snow  and  frozen  lakes  and  rivers 


168     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

lay  between  the  little  colony  and  military  help.  For 
Mr.  Smith  to  take  a  message  from  the  Government  at 
such  a  time  was  like  carrying  a  lighted  match  through 
a  dark  place  full  of  gunpowder.  If  carried  aright  it 
would  show  the  way  out,  while  a  slight  misstep  might 
cause  a  terrible  explosion.  But  a  wise  man  had  been 
chosen  to  guide  the  people  in  this  time  of  danger, 
and  the  light  he  was  given  to  carry  was  the  brightest 
he  could  have,  for  it  was  the  message  from  the 
Dominion  Government,  and  another  from  Queen  Vic- 
toria, telling  the  people  to  be  good,  for  she  was  their 
Queen  and  no  injustice  should  be  done  them. 

Upon  reaching  Fort  Garry,  Mr.  Smith's  first  diffi- 
culty was  to  get  a  chance  to  read  the  messages  to  the 
people  without  making  Riel  angry  and  thus  exploding 
the  powder.  The  wily  leader  did  not  wish  the  messages 
read,  fearing  the  people  would  be  won  over  to  the 
loyalists'  side.  However,  when  he  saw  they  were  deter- 
mined to  see  what  was  in  those  papers,  he  consented 
to  a  meeting  being  held  on  the  19th  of  January  for 
the  purpose  of  having  them  read.  Messengers  were 
sent  far  and  wide  to  call  the  people  together.  So  many 
came  that  no  building  in  Fort  Garry  was  large  enough 
to  hold  them,  and  the  meeting,  which  lasted  five  hours, 
was  held  out  of  doors,  with  the  thermometer  20  degrees 
below  zero.  Mr.  Smith  refused  to  read  his  papers 
under  Riel's  rebel  flag,  so  it  was  pulled  down  and  the 
messages  from  the  Government  and  Queen  were  read 
under  the  Union  Jack.  This  did  much  toward  quiet- 
ing the  people  and  making  them  reasonable. 

Afterwards  a  bill  of  rights  was  drawn  up  and  dele- 
gates were  chosen  to  go  to  the  Canadian  Government 


TKOUBLE   AT  BED  RIVER  169 

at  Ottawa.  This  is  what  Mr.  Smith  most  wanted, 
because  it  would  bring  them  into  communication  with 
the  Government.  Though  Kiel  and  his  council  con- 
tinued to  rule,  many  of  the  prisoners  were  set  free,  and 
it  was  hoped  that  matters  might  be  smoothed  over 
and  peace  restored. 

Meanwhile,  at  Portage  la  Prairie,  friends  of  the 
prisoners  had  heard  that  they  were  shut  up  in  a  cold, 
draughty  place,  with  no  fire,  with  midwinter  winds 
blowing  through  the  cracks,  and  only  the  cold  floor 
to  sleep  upon.  As  Kiel  had  seized  the  mails,  they 
knew  little  of  what  was  being  done,  so  they  gathered 
together  a  band  of  men  to  march  to  Fort  Garry  to  try 
to  have  the  prisoners  released.  Major  Boulton,  who 
had  come  west  with  the  surveying  party,  was  chosen 
as  their  leader.  After  a  march  of  sixty  miles  through 
deep  snow,  they  took  up  their  quarters  in  the  church 
and  school  at  Kildonan.  Here  they  were  joined  by 
others,  and  a  cannon  was  drawn  up  to  the  church  by 
four  oxen. 

Towards  evening  an  unfortunate  circumstance 
occurred.  A  young  man,  suspected  of  being  a  spy  of 
Riel's,  was  taken  prisoner.  He  soon  made  his  escape, 
and  in  doing  so  seized  a  gun  lying  on  one  of  the  sleighs. 
Meeting  a  young  man  named  Sutherland  riding  towards 
Kildonan,  he  took  aim  and  shot  him.  Sutherland  was 
carried  to  the  Kildonan  manse,  and  died  soon  after. 
The  young  man  who  had  shot  him  was  wounded  in 
being  captured  again,  and  died  in  about  a  month. 

The  men  from  Portage  la  Prairie  afterwards  sent 
messages  to  Kiel  demanding  the  release  of  the  prison- 
ers.   Efforts  to  have  them  set  free  were  made  by  others, 


170     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

and  soon  they  were  all  liberated.  Having  accom- 
plished their  mission,  those  from  Portage  la  Prairie 
then  began  their  return  march,  travelling  with  diffi- 
culty through  the  deep  snow.  When  they  were  opposite 
the  fort,  men  rode  out  with  a  message  saying  that  Riel 
wished  to  see  them.  To  this  they  objected,  as  they 
had  a  long  journey  ahead.  However,  poorly  armed 
and  up  to  their  waists  in  snow,  they  saw  it  would  be 
useless  to  resist  double  their  number,  and  so  decided 
to  accept  Riel's  invitation. 

Once  inside  the  fort,  the  gates  were  swung  to  and 
they  were  prisoners.  Major  Boulton  was  placed  alone 
in  a  cold  room,  below  freezing  point,  with  his  legs 
chained.  The  others  were  equally  miserable.  When 
the  Major  rattled  the  chains  in  taking  off  his  wet 
stockings  to  wring  out  the  melted  snow,  the  sergeant 
in  charge  routed  up  all  the  guards  and  crowded 
them  into  his  room  to  see  if  he  were  trying  to  escape. 
Later  the  door  opened  and  Riel  put  his  head  in,  say- 
ing, "Major  Boulton,  you  prepare  to  die  to-morrow 
at  twelve  o'clock." 

Major  Boulton  said,  "  Very  well."  Then  the  door 
closed,  and  he  was  alone  again. 

Though  the  Major's  friends  went  to  Riel  begging 
that  his  life  might  be  spared,  it  was  not  until  Mrs. 
Sutherland,  mother  of  the  young  man  who  had  been 
killed  near  Kildonan,  went  to  him,  that  Riel  granted 
the  request.  He  then  promised  to  give  her  Major 
Boulton's  life  for  that  of  her  son. 

But  Riel  was  determined  to  show  his  power,  so  he 
made  up  his  mind  to  put  to  death  another  prisoner, 
a  young  man  named  Thomas   Scott.     Nothing  could 


TKOUBLE  AT  EED  RIVER  171 

turn  him  from  his  purpose  this  time.  On  the  night 
of  March  3rd,  he  had  his  men  hold  a  sort  of  trial. 
Scott  was  guilty  of  nothing  but  loyalty  to  his  Queen; 
nevertheless,  when  morning  came  he  was  told  he  must 
die  at  twelve  o'clock  that  day.  The  best  efforts  of 
Donald  A.  Smith,  Rev.  George  Young,  Archbishop 
Machray,  and  many  others,  were  useless.  When  Kiel 
entered  Major  Boulton's  room,  about  an  hour  before 
Scott's  death,  the  Manor  made  the  most  effective  remark 
he  could  think  of  when  he  said,  "  Don't  you  think  you 
are  doing  the  most  imprudent  thing  for  your  own 
safety?" 

"  I  did  not  come  here  to  talk  to  you  about  that,"  was 
all  the  reply  he  got. 

Scott  barely  had  time  to  write  home,  and  to  say 
good-bye  to  his  fellow-prisoners,  when  he  was  led  out 
into  the  snow  under  the  walls  of  Fort  Garry  and  shot. 
Kiel  even  refused  to  let  his  friends  have  the  body,  and 
no  one  knows  where  the  unfortunate  man  was  buried. 
A  grave  was  dug  in  the  courtyard,  but  as  it  was  after- 
wards learned  that  only  a  sham  burial  took  place. 
Scott's  body  was  not  placed  there. 

Riel  had  gone  too  far.  By  his  cruelty  to  others  he 
had  injured  himself.  Many  of  his  people,  as  greatly 
horrified  as  the  loyalists  at  his  actions,  turned  against' 
him.  When  the  news  reached  Canada,  the  country 
was  roused  to  its  real  danger,  and  troops  under  Colonel 
Wolseley  were  at  once  sent  to  Red  River.  But  at  that 
season  travelling  over  the  fur-traders'  route  was  espe- 
cially difficult,  and  it  was  weeks  before  they  reached 
Fort  Garry. 

This  delay  in  the  arrival  of  the  troops  made  but 


172     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

little  difference,  for  the  good  Bishop  Tache,  of  St. 
Boniface,  had  returned  from  his  visit  to  Rome.  The 
Bishop  had  great  influence  over  his  people,  and  so<M 
made  those  who  still  looked  to  Riel  for  guidance  under- 
stand that  his  course  was  wrong,  and  that  the  Govern- 
ment would  give  them  all  their  rights.  In  his  sermon 
on  the  first  Sunday  after  his  return,  he  told  them  that 
he  was  much  grieved  by  acts  committed  by  some  of 
his  people  during  his  absence,  and  showed  how  much 
trouble  might  be  saved  if  they  would  but  be  chari- 
table. The  only  way  to  build  up  a  country,  he  said, 
was  to  put  aside  all  differences  and  work  together  for 
the  common  welfare.  This  sermon  did  an  immense 
amount  of  good.  It  so  quieted  the  half-breeds  that 
Riel  could  no  longer  lead  them.  Upon  seeing  the 
forces  under  Col.  Wolseley  approaching,  Riel  fled  in 
haste  and  escaped  into  the  United  States.  So  it  hap- 
pened that  when  the  troops  marched  up  to  the  Fort 
they  found  no  one  there  to  oppose  them. 

It  was  owing  to  the  tact  of  Donald  A.  Smith  and 
others,  including  the  ministers  of  the  different  churches, 
that  only  one  man  was  shot,  instead  of  hundreds.  Had 
the  loyalists  risen  against  Riel,  or  angered  him  while  he 
and  his  men  were  in  possession  of  the  stronghold  and 
the  ammunition,  there  would  undoubtedly  have  been 
much  bloodshed.  For  his  invaluable  services  to  the 
country  at  that  time  of  danger,  and  later  important  ser- 
vice, Donald  A.  Smith  was  knighted. 

While  the  troops  were  on  their  way  to  Fort  Garry 
the  Manitoba  Act  was  passed,  making  that  country  a 
province  of  the  Dominion.  To  the  new  province  the 
name  of  Manitoba  was  given.     This  name  comes  from 


TROUBLE  AT  RED  RIVER  173 

two  Indian  words  which  mean,  "  The  straits  or  narrows 
of  the  Great  Spirit."  Fort  Garry,  the  capital,  was 
named  Winnipeg,  another  Indian  word. 

Adams  G.  Archibald  was  sent  out  as  lieutenant- 
governor  in  the  place  of  William  Macdougall,  who 
had  not  been  allowed  to  enter  the  country.  The  prov- 
ince was  divided  into  twenty-four  districts,  and  each 
district  elected  a  member  to  the  provincial  legislature. 
The  half-breeds  now  understood  the  new  form  of 
government,  and  were  satisfied  when,  by  the  Mani- 
toba Act,  a  large  tract  of  land  was  set  apart  for  them. 
Troubles  and  misunderstandings  had  at  last  come  to 
an  end.  The  people  of  Manitoba  settled  down  to  their 
occupations,  and  the  young  province  was  soon  on  the 
way  to  prosperity. 


12 


CHAPTEK  XVII. 

The  White  Man's  Progress. 

When  the  first  steamboat  which  plied  on  the  Red 
River  reached  Fort  Garry,  people  hurried  to  the  shore, 
while  bells  pealed  and  cannon  roared  in  honor  of  the 
event.      Domestic   animals,   taking  it  for   a  pursuing 
monster,  ran  off  in  fright,  and  for  days  some  of  the 
cows  did  not  venture  to  return  to  their  homes  by  the 
river.      The  children,  who  had  never  seen  a  steamer 
before,  called  it  "  a  big  barge  with  a  windmill  on  its 
stern."     The  first  telegraph  line,  a  few  years  later,  was 
another  surprise  to  most  of  the  children.    They  delighted 
in  trying  to  shoot  the  wire  with  their  arrows,  and  were 
always  wondering  what  effect  a  good  shot  would  have  on 
a  passing  message.    But  they  soon  became  used  to  steam- 
boats, to  all  kinds  of  mills,  and  to  telegraph  and  tele- 
phone lines,  for  white  men  were  now  streaming  into 
the  country,  bringing  with  them  the  latest  inventions. 
Bishop  Tache  was  right  when  he  said  of  the  first  steamer 
at  Fort  Garry,  "  Each  turn  of  the  engine  is  bringing 
us  nearer  the  civilized  world." 

The  first  legislature  of  Manitoba  also  brought  the 
new  province  more  in  touch  with  other  parts  of  the 
Dominion.  Her  people  were  now  governed  in  the  same 
way  as  the  provinces  in  the  East,  and  the  representatives 
they  sent  to  Ottawa  voiced  their  wishes  at  the  Dominion 
capital  and  helped  the  members  from  the  other  provinces 

174 


THE  WHITE  MAN'S  PROGRESS        175 

to  make  laws  for  the  welfare  of  Canada.  At  that  time 
there  were  over  six  times  as  many  half-breeds  as  white 
people  in  Manitoba,  and  few  of  them  had  ever  been 
out  of  their  native  land.  The  new  system  of  govern- 
ment was  a  great  change  to  those  who  had  seen  only  the 
wild  life  of  the  plains.  The  very  dress  of  the  members 
of  that  first  legislature  showed  the  mingling  of  the 
new  life  with  the  old.  Some  wore  broadcloth  and  linen, 
while  others  wore  red  flannel  and  buckskin  and  the 
picturesque  sash  of  the  plains. 

As  Manitoba  was  but  a  small  part  of  the  great  coun- 
try, arrangements  were  made  for  the  government  of  the 
territory  lying  beyond  the  new  province,  by  placing 
it  under  the  Lieutenant-Governor  of  Manitoba  and 
a  council  of  eleven  members.  Something  more  had 
to  be  done  before  the  lonely  West  would  be  a  safe 
place  for  settlers.  Bad  men,  who  had  learned  the  weak- 
ness of  the  Indians  for  "  fire-water,"  and  who  knew  they 
would  sell  all  their  possessions  for  it,  were  taking  whis- 
key into  the  North-West.  Now,  Indians  who  would 
come  and  shake  hands  in  the  friendliest  way  with  the 
lonely  settler  in  his  shack  were  just  as  likely,  when 
drunk,  to  murder  him  and  burn  his  little  house  to  the 
ground.  To  save  the  Indians  from  ruin,  and  protect 
the  white  men  in  that  country,  laws  were  made  prohibit- 
ing the  sale  of  liquor  to  the  Indians.  As  laws  alone 
were  useless  to  prevent  evil-doing  hundreds  and  hun- 
dreds of  miles  from  policemen  and  law  courts,  the 
Government  sent  out  about  two  hundred  Mounted 
Police  to  travel  over  the  country  and  see  that  the  laws 
were  kept. 

Up  to  this  time  British  Columbia,  beyond  the  great 


176     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

mountains,  had  little  in  common  with  the  Dominion. 
The  people  living  in  that  colony  on  the  Pacific  seemed 
very  far  away  from  those  in  the  eastern  provinces,  for 
they  could  not  visit  any  part  of  the  Dominion  without 
climbing  the  mountains.  And  then,  to  reach  the  prov- 
inces, they  must  travel  over  the  plains  on  horseback  or 
in  waggons ;  and  though  they  had  some  of  the  best  fish 
and  lumber  in  the  world,  pack-horses  and  "prairie 
schooners"  could  not  take  these  to  the  markets  in 
Eastern  Canada,  or  even  to  Manitoba  and  the  North- 
West  Territories.  The  great  ranges  of  the  Rocky  Moun- 
tains were  as  a  stone  wall  shutting  out  British  Columbia. 
But  this  could  not  last.  The  day  came  when  the  white 
man  set  about  making  a  gateway  through  the  wall 
which  the  Indians  had  scaled  for  generations. 

An  important  event  led  to  the  making  of  this  gate- 
way. The  very  year  after  Manitoba  became  a  province, 
confederation  was  being  considered  in  British  Columbia. 
Some  living  there  thought  they  were  too  far  from 
Eastern  Canada,  and  shut  out  by  too  high  a  wall,  for 
the  union  to  be  of  any  advantage  to  them.  Others  were 
anxious  for  the  change,  and  thought  that  because  they 
were  beyond  the  Rockies  and  just  across  the  border  from 
the  United  States,  this  was  all  the  more  reason  why  they 
should  have  the  protection  of  the  Dominion.  All  had 
the  welfare  of  British  Columbia  at  heart,  but  they 
could  not  all  agree  as  to  what  was  best  to  be  done. 

However,  after  a  debate  which  lasted  for  days,  terms 
were  agreed  upon,  and  British  Columbia  became  a  prov- 
ince of  the  Dominion,  with  a  lieutenant-governor  and 
legislature  similar  to  Manitoba,  and  was  allowed  to 
send  senators  and  members  to  the  Dominion  Parliament 


THE  WHITE  MAN'S  PROGRESS       177 

at  Ottawa  to  give  the  people  of  British  Columbia  a  voice 
in  the  governing  of  the  Dominion.  The  most  important 
condition  of  the  union  was  the  promise  of  the  Dominion 
Government  to  overcome  the  disadvantage  of  the  dis- 
tance from  British  Columbia  to  Eastern  Canada  by 
building  a  railway  across  the  continent  to  the  Pacific 
coast.  This  railway  was  to  be  the  gateway  through 
the  wall. 

When  the  first  Dominion  Day  was  celebrated  in  the 
new  province,  scarcely  a  child  lived  there  who  did  not 
spend  part  of  the  holiday  talking  of  a  future  trip  on 
the  railway  through  the  mountains,  across  the  continent 
and  down  to  Ottawa,  the  Dominion  capital.  However, 
they  grew  to  be  men  and  women  before  they  were  able 
to  take  this  journey.  The  Dominion  Government  had 
promised  to  begin  the  railway  in  two  years,  and  to 
finish  it  within  ten;  but  though  survey  parties  were 
sent  out  at  once  to  find  the  best  place  for  the  steel  to 
be  laid,  the  work  was  not  finished  so  soon.  Building  a 
railway  across  thousands  of  miles  of  unsettled  country 
and  through  a  mountain  wall  was  a  greater  undertaking 
than  anyone  had  realized  at  the  time,  and  it  was  fifteen 
years  instead  of  ten  before  it  was  completed. 

Not  long  after  British  Columbia  became  a  province 
the  North- West  Territory  was  given  a  governor  and 
council  of  its  own.  Four  districts  were  formed,  under 
the  names  of  Alberta,  Assiniboia,  Athabasca,  and  Sas- 
katchewan. Battleford,  in  Saskatchewan,  was  the  first 
capital  of  the  North-West  Territories,  but  in  a  few  years 
the  capital  was  moved  to  Regina,  in  Assiniboia,  as  the 
railway  was  to  pass  through  that  place.  The  new  capital 
was  at  that  time  only  a  small  village  of  wooden  build- 


178     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

ings  in  the  midst  of  an  unsettled  plain.  It  had  not 
always  been  called  Regina.  Years  before,  the  Indians 
had  named  the  place  Okanse,  meaning  a  pile  of  bones, 
because  the  ground  there  was  covered  with  bones.  ISTo 
Indian  war  had  laid  them  there.  It  is  said  that  at 
a  time  of  terrible  famine  among  the  buffaloes  many 
thousands  died  at  that  spot.  Indians  passing  by  long 
after,  when  the  bones  of  the  poor  buffaloes  were  bleach- 
ing in  the  sun,  called  the  place  Okanse,  and  so  it  became 
known  by  that  name.  Loads  and  loads  of  these  bones 
were  shipped  away  when  the  railway  came  through,  but 
many  remained  strewn  over  the  ground.  Though  the 
place  was  still  a  pile  of  bones,  people  became  tired  of 
calling  it  Okanse,  and  gave  it  the  greatest  name  they 
could  have  chosen,  Regina,  Avhich  is  the  Latin  word 
for  Queen. 

Many  new  names  were  given  to  localities  as  years 
went  by,  for  the  white  men  were  pushing  their  way  on 
through  the  country,  and  settlements  and  villages  were 
springing  up  far  from  Fort  Garry.  Frequently  the 
Indian  names  for  the  lakes,  rivers,  and  valleys  were 
kept,  and  that  is  why  Indian  stories  are  told  about  so 
many  names  in  the  West.  The  pretty  name  Qu'Appelle, 
a  French  word,  comes  from  an  Indian  legend.  Accord- 
ing to  the  story,  on  a  clear  night  an  Indian  brave  was 
paddling  in  his  canoe  near  the  shore  of  a  beautiful  lake 
when  he  heard  his  name  called  softly.  He  answered, 
"  Who  calls  ?"  ISTo  reply  came.  Three  times  his  name 
was  spoken,  and  each  time  he  shouted,  "Who  calls?" 
But  only  the  echoes  came  back  to  him.  Upon  return- 
ing home  he  learned  that  at  the  very  hour  when  far 
away  on  the  lake  shore  he  had  heard  his  name,  his  bride 


'Si 

W 

o 


Y* 
ti 


o 


*t 


i> 

15 

1- 

^ 

V 

ft 

<t) 

>. 

1 

.O 

s 

V 

o 

s 

33 

o 
u 

•0 

W 

t-T 

/-~\ 

■^ 

** 

i-4 

O 

<| 

« 

«    w 


$H 

CO 

<J 

0 

t—i 

r- 

X 

cd 

Ph 

H 

^H 

0 

M 

£ 

<j 

* — ' 

fc-i 

^ 

G 

£ 

P 

O 

Ph 


u 

CO 


THE  WHITE  MAN'S  PROGRESS       179 

in  their  tepee  home  had  died  calling  his  name.  French 
voyageurs  who  heard  the  story  named  the  valley  and  the 
lake  Qu'Appelle,  meaning,  "Who  calls?"  In  these 
lines  from  a  little  poem  on  the  legend  of  Qu'Appelle, 
Pauline  Johnson,  our  Indian  poet,  pictures  the  red  man 
thus  giving  voice  to  his  grief : 

"  Among  the  lonely  lakes  I  go  no  more, 

For  she  who  made  their  beauty  is  not  there; 
The  paleface  rears  his  tepee  on  the  shore 

And  says  the  vale  is  fairest  of  the  fair. 
Full  many  years  have  vanished  since,  yet  still 

The  voyageurs  beside  the  campfire  tell 
How,  when  the  moonrise  tips  the  distant  hill, 

They  hear  strange  voices  through  the  silence  swell. 
The  paleface  loves  the  haunted  lakes,  they  say, 

And  journeys  far  to  watch  their  beauty  spread 
Before  his  vision;  but  to  me  the  day, 

The  night,  the  hour,  the  seasons  all  are  dead. 
I  listen,  heartsick,  while  the  hunters  tell 

Why  white  men  named  the  valley  The  Qu'Appelle." 

The  lonely  settlers  far  out  on  the  prairies  sometimes 
saw  a  solitary  horseman  pass,  and  knew  by  the  uniform 
that  he  was  a  member  of  the  Mounted  Police  force. 
Because  he  rode  over  the  plains  they  felt  safe  in  their 
distant  homes,  and  the  Indians  lived  in  peace.  The 
work  of  the  Mounted  Police  was  an  important  factor  in 
the  progress  of  the  West.  Their  task  of  keeping  order 
over  that  vast  country  was  a  difficult  one.  Far  and  near 
lived  the  Indians,  ignorant  of  the  white  man's  laws. 
Lawless  men,  who  well  knew  that  liquor  was  prohibited, 
were  trying  to  get  it  into  the  country  by  some  untrav- 
elled  route,  so  that  they  could  enrich  themselves  at  the 


180     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

expense  of  the  poor  Indians.  The  Mounted  Police 
had  their  orders  to  prevent  this,  and  also  to  make  the 
Indians  understand  that  they  could  not  go  on  horse- 
stealing excursions,  or  wage  war  whenever  they  wanted 
to,  for  the  Queen  across  the  ocean  was  their  Great 
Mother,  and  they  must  obey  her  laws. 

Often  a  single  Mounted  Policeman  would  ride  into 
a  camp  of  Indians  and  explain  what  the  Government 
expected  of  them.  If,  months  after,  he  heard  that  some 
of  those  braves  had  been  stealing  horses,  he  would  ride 
back  and  fearlessly  pass  among  the  armed  and  painted 
red  men  until  he  came  to  the  chief's  tent.  There  he 
would  lecture  the  Indians  on  the  sin  of  breaking  the 
laws  of  the  country,  and  end  by  demanding  that  the 
thieves  should  be  handed  over.  So  carefully  had  the 
Indians  been  taught  that  the  Government  never  failed 
to  search  out  the  law-breakers,  that  they  would  listen 
respectfully,  and  usually  would  hand  over  their  thieves 
to  the  courageous  representative  of  the  Queen. 

The  life  the  Mounted  Police  were  obliged  to  live  was 
sometimes  as  hard  and  dreary  as  that  of  an  exile.  Many 
were  their  long,  hard  rides  in  all  kinds  of  weather. 
When  evening  came,  and  the  horse  was  tethered  on  the 
edge  of  some  stream,  there  was  nothing  to  do  but  lie 
down  and  watch  the  stars  or  dream  of  home.  Some- 
times the  dreams  were  rudely  disturbed  by  unwelcome 
storms.  One  night  some  Mounted  Police,  who  were 
camping  far  out  on  the  plains,  were  awakened  by  a 
tornado  and  lightning.  One  of  them  afterward  described 
their  experiences  in  this  way : 

"  The  rain  came  down  in  bucketfuls.  We  were  com- 
pelled to  rise  and  roll  up  our  blankets  and  hold  on  to 


THE  WHITE  MAN'S  PROGRESS       181 

the  pole  and  skirts  of  the  tent  to  prevent  it  being  blown 
away.  The  level  space  outside  was  soon  changed  into  a 
lake,  and  with  every  flash  we  could  see  our  poor  horses 
standing  in  this  sheet  of  water,  with  their  backs  humped 
up  and  turned  towards  the  pitiless  storm.  Morning 
brought  no  improvement.  Every  inch  of  horizon  was 
walled  in  with  black  masses  of  loaded  clouds. 

"  Our  breakfast  and  dinner  consisted  of  soaked  bis- 
cuits, nothing  else.  There  was  no  appearance  of  any 
break  at  one  o'clock,  so  it  was  decided  we  should  resume 
our  march.  We  struck  camp,  loaded  our  waggons,  and 
saddled  our  shivering  horses  amid  the  downpour  and 
terrible  wind." 

Ear  from  home  and  shut  out  from  human  companion- 
ship, these  men  become  greatly  attached  to  their  horses, 
and  give  a  kindly  welcome  to  homeless  dogs.  A  mem- 
ber of  the  Mounted  Police  force  once  said,  "  No  dog 
was  ever  refused  admittance  to  the  dreary  barracks  if 
he  but  pled  with  eyes  of  sorrow  and  tail  reversed." 

The  same  man  wrote  of  the  little  horse  he  had  ridden 
over  the  plains :  "  He  was  a  game  little  fellow,  and  many 
a  lonely  winter's  ride  we  had  together  over  the  prairie. 
You  could  rein  him  by  the  neck,  or  you  could  turn  him 
in  a  circle  with  either  leg.  If  he  were  at  a  full  gallop 
he  would  stop  if  you  drew  the  reins.  His  head  was  as 
pretty  as  a  deer's,  and  he  was  intelligent  and  docile  to 
perfection.  He  used  to  lift  his  foreleg  the  moment  you 
asked  him  to  shake  hands,  and  no  distance  and  no  con- 
tinued hard  riding  would  play  him  out.  After  a  rest 
he  would  start  again  as  fresh  as  ever. 

"  Poor  little  Bummer,  where  are  you  now  ?  Have 
you  been  '  cast,'  I  wonder,  and  sold  to  some  sordid  moss- 


182     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

back  ?  Or  has  your  brave  little  heart  given  way  at  last, 
and  do  your  bones  bleach  on  those  great  dreary  plains 
you  knew  so  well,  and  has  your  flesh  formed  food  for 
the  cowardly  coyotes?  Wherever  you  may  be,  'Waes 
hael !' " 

Carefully  the  Indians  watched  the  change  which  was 
taking  place  as  the  Mounted  Police  rode  over  the  coun- 
try and  more  and  more  settlers  came.  Some  of  the 
white  man's  ways  were  very  strange  to  them.  One  thing 
they  could  not  understand  was  why  each  white  man 
worked  for  himself  and  the  rich  did  not  share  with  the 
poor.  ]STor  could  they  see  the  reason  why  one  should 
go  hungry,  simply  because  he  had  no  money,  when  there 
was  food  in  plenty  at  the  store.  But  they  admired  much 
of  the  white  man's  work,  and  always  liked  to  watch 
what  was  going  on. 

Indians  did  not  consider  it  rude  to  go  into  a  house 
without  rapping,  and  many  a  woman  in  a  lonely  prairie 
home  had  her  doorway  suddenly  darkened  by  Indians 
who  would  enter  uninvited,  shake  hands  with  her,  and 
sit  round  on  the  floor,  leaving  her  scarcely  room  to  move 
about.  When  they  saw  her  sew  they  wondered  why  she 
cut  the  cloth  into  pieces  and  then  stitched  it  together. 
They  knew  any  sensible  Indian  would  let  it  fall  in  grace- 
ful folds  instead  of  going  to  the  trouble  of  cutting  and 
sewing.  Another  thing  they  did  not  approve  of  was  her 
husband's  stiff  black  hat.  The  braves  preferred  women's 
hats,  because  they  were  trimmed.  Indians  who  did  wear 
men's  hats  trimmed  them  with  feathers  and  cut  out  the 
crowns  to  keep  their  heads  cool,  for  they  were  not  used 
to  wearing  a  head-covering  for  warmth. 

Though  the  Indians  had  no  wish  to  give  up  hunting 


THE  WHITE  MAN'S    PROGRESS        183 

and  become  farmers,  they  soon  learned  to  raise  potatoes. 
It  was  not  always  that  their  first  crops  had  a  chance  to 
grow,  for  when  their  store  of  food  gave  out  they  were 
very  likely  to  dig  up  the  pieces  they  had  planted  and 
cook  them  for  dinner.  So,  while  the  Indians  were 
amused  at  the  white  men's  ways,  the  white  men  could 
also  laugh  at  the  ways  of  the  Indians. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 
Treaties  with  the  Indians. 

Do  you  wonder  how  the  Indians  felt  when  they  saw 
so  many  white  people  coming,  and  watched  them  slowly 
turning  their  hunting-grounds  into  wheatfields  ?  Surely 
you  will  not  be  surprised  to  hear  that  a  day  came  when 
the  red  men  living  nearest  the  settlements  became 
alarmed.  They  realized  that  soon  they  could  no  longer 
have  the  forest  and  prairie  to  themselves,  but  must  live 
as  the  white  man  lived,  or  else  die.  In  Manitoba  they 
became  uneasy  directly  after  the  change  of  govern- 
ment, for  their  Selkirk  treaty  was  then  useless.  They 
wondered  who  would  pay  them  their  tobacco,  and 
whether  there  would  be  a  spot  of  ground  left  where 
they  might  pitch  their  tents  and  smoke  their  pipes. 

They  were  not  left  long  in  this  unhappy  frame  of 
mind,  for  the  Government  found  a  way  to  provide  for 
them.  Between  1871  and  1877  seven  treaties  were 
made  with  the  Indians.  The  first  of  these  was  with  the 
Chippewas,  and  the  last  with  the  Blackfoot  tribe,  so 
that  all  the  Indians  from  Lake  Superior  to  the  Rocky 
Mountains  were  included  in  the  treaties. 

The  treaties  were  not  exactly  like  Lord  Selkirk's, 
and  though  each  of  the  seven  differed  slightly  from  the 
others,  they  were  all  alike  in  the  following  terms: 
The  Indians,  in  return  for  giving  up  their  right  to  the 
land,  were  given    reserves  of    land    consisting  of  six 

184 


TREATIES  WITH  THE  INDIANS       185 

hundred  and  forty  acres  for  each  five  Indians.  They 
also  retained  the  privilege  of  fishing  and  hunting  all 
over  the  country,  except  those  parts  which  were  taken 
up  by  the  settlers.  Every  year  the  Government  was  to 
pay  to  each  Indian  man,  woman  and  child  the  sum  of 
five  dollars,  and  to  each  chief  twenty-five  dollars,  and  to 
each  councillor,  or  head  man  of  a  chief,  fifteen  dollars. 
In  order  to  make  the  chiefs  and  their  councillors  feel 
that  in  a  sense  they  were  officers  of  the  Crown,  and 
shared  in  the  responsibility  of  helping  on  the  welfare 
of  the  country,  the  Government  promised  to  give  to 
each  an  official  suit  of  clothing,  and  to  every  chief  a 
British  flag  and  a  silver  medal.  The  Government  also 
promised  to  give  each  year  to  the  Indians  who  came 
into  the  treaties,  powder,  shot  and  twine,  and  to  give 
to  those  who  wished  to  farm,  seed  grain,  oxen,  dairy 
cattle  and  implements,  such  as  ploughs,  spades  and 
rakes.  Schools  were  to  be  established  for  Indian  chil- 
dren, and  no  intoxicating  liquors  were  to  be  sold  on 
the  reserves. 

At  each  meeting,  when  a  treaty  was  to  be  signed, 
the  Governor  was  careful  to  see  that  the  chiefs  thor- 
oughly understood  the  terms  before  putting  down  their 
marks.  He  explained  the  treaty  to  them,  and  assured 
them  that  it  was  all  written  down  so  that  it  could  not 
bp  rubbed  out.  The  Indians  always  listened  attentively. 
Then  perhaps  they  would  retire  to  think  it  over  and 
meet  again  the  next  day,  never  failing  to  besrin  the 
talk  by  shakinc  hands  with  the  Governor  and  his  com- 
pany. The  chiefs  would  then  make  speeches,  or  ask 
questions.  Often  they  made  requests  which  could  not 
possibly  be  granted,  and  the  Governor  would  have  to 


186     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

tell  them  why  they  could  not  have  what  they  wanted. 
When,  at  last,  all  understood  and  were  willing  to  agree 
to  the  terms,  the  treaty  was  signed.  The  chiefs  then 
received  their  flags  and  medals,  and  presents  were 
given  to  the  people.  The  hand  afterwards  played 
"  God  Save  the  Queen,"  and  all  went  home  happy. 

When,  in  1871,  the  Indians  met  at  Lower  Fort  Garry 
to  consider  the  "  Stone  Fort  Treaty,"  the  Governor, 
after  shaking  hands  with  them  all,  made  the  meaning 
of  the  treaty  very  clear  to  them  in  this  simple  speech: 

"  Your  Great  Mother,  the  Queen,  wishes  to  do  justice 
to  all  her  children  alike.  She  will  deal  fairly  with 
those  of  the  setting  sun  just  as  she  would  with  those 
of  the  rising  sun.  She  wishes  her  red  children  to 
be  happy  and  contented.  She  would  like  them  to  adopt 
the  habits  of  the  whites,  to  till  the  land,  and  raise  food, 
and  store  it  up  against  time  of  want.  But  the  Queen, 
though  she  may  think  it  good  for  you  to  adopt  civilized 
habits,  has  no  idea  of  compelling  you  to  do  so.  This 
she  leaves  to  your  choice,  and  you  need  not  live  like 
the  white  man  unless  you  can  be  persuaded  to  do  so 
of  your  own  free  will.  Your  Great  Mother,  therefore, 
will  lay  aside  for  you  lots  of  land,  to  be  used  by  you 
and  your  children  forever.  She  will  not  allow  the 
white  man  to  intrude  upon  these  lots.  She  will  make 
rules  to  keep  them  for  you,  so  that  as  long  as  the  sun 
shall  shine  there  shall  be  no  Indian  who  has  not  a  place 
that  he  can  call  his  home,  where  he  can  go  and  pitch 
his  camp,  or,  if  he  chooses,  build  his  house  and  till 
his  land." 

The  Indians  were  satisfied  with  the  Governor's  words, 
and  willingly  signed  the  treaty. 


TKEATIES  WITH  THE  INDIANS       187 

Those  who  gathered  at  the  Qu'Appelle  lakes  to  sign 
the  Qu'Appelle  treaty  were  not  pleased  because  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company  got  the  money  when  the  Com- 
pany sold  their  right  to  Eupert's  Land  to  the  Cana- 
dian Government.  The  chiefs  kept  saying  in  their 
speeches  that  something  was  in  their  way.  One,  named 
The  Gambler,  said,  "  When  one  Indian  takes  anything 
from  another  we  call  it  stealing,  and  when  we  see  the 
present  we  say,  '  Pay  us.'    It  is  the  Company  I  mean." 

"  What  did  the  Company  steal  from  you  ?"  asked  the 
Governor. 

"  The  earth,  trees,  grass,  stones,  all  that  which  I  see 
with  mine  eyes." 

The  Governor  explained  that  these  things  were  made 
by  the  Great  Spirit,  and  were  not  only  for  Indians  but 
for  all  men.  The  Gambler  spoke  again  several  times, 
always  of  the  Company  and  something  which  was 
troubling  him,  but  the  Governor  could  not  understand 
what  it  was  until  a  chief  named  Pisqua  (meaning  "  the 
plain")  made  their  meaning  clear  by  simply  pointing 
to  a  Hudson's  Bay  Company  officer  and  saying,  "  You 
told  me  you  had  sold  your  land  for  £300,000.  We  want 
that  money." 

Then  the  white  men  understood,  and  the  Governor 
said  to  the  Indians:  "Many  years  ago  the  Queen's 
father's  father  gave  the  Company  the  right  to  trade 
in  that  country,  from  the  frozen  ocean  to  the  United 
States  boundary  and  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific. 
The  Company  grew  strong  and  wanted  no  one  to  trade 
in  the  country  but  themselves.  The  Queen's  people 
said,  '  No,  the  land  is  not  yours.  The  Queen's  father's 
father  gave  you  the  right  to  trade;  it  is  time  those 


188     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

rights  should  stop.'  .  .  .  The  Queen  would  not 
act  unjustly  to  the  Company.  She  would  not  take 
rights  away  from  them  any  more  than  from  you;  and 
to  settle  the  question,  she  took  all  the  land  into  her  own 
hands  and  gave  the  Company  a  sum  of  money  in  place 
of  the  rights  which  she  had  taken  from  them." 

By  this  explanation  The  Gambler's  objections  were 
so  far  removed  that  he  replied:  "  I  have  made  up  about 
no  other  article.  I  suppose,  indeed,  I  would  make  the 
thing  very  little  and  very  small.  When  I  get  back  I 
will  think  it  over."  After  days  of  consideration  on  the 
part  of  the  Indians,  and  much  more  talking,  the  treaty 
was  signed. 

At  another  time,  when  a  most  important  treaty  was 
to  be  signed  at  Fort  Carlton  and  Fort  Pitt,  by  which 
about  120,000  square  miles  of  fertile  land  was  to 
be  ceded  to  the  Government,  one  of  the  missionaries 
most  dear  to  the  red  men,  Rev.  George  McDougall, 
was  commissioned  to  go  among  the  Indians  and  explain 
the  meaning  of  the  treaty,  and  learn  what  they  thought 
of  the  coming  change.  He  visited  nearly  4,000  Indians. 
Many  of  these  he  found  already  in  favor  of  the  treaty, 
and  all  were  glad  that  liquor  was  to  be  prohibited. 
They  wisely  said,  "  When  we  see  it  we  want  to  drink 
it,  and  it  destroys  us ;  when  we  do  not  see  it  we  do  not 
think  about  it."  They  wanted  him  to  ask  for  laws  to 
protect  the  buffalo,  and  for  laws  to  stop  the  putting  out 
of  poison  to  kill  the  animals. 

One  of  the  Assiniboine  chiefs  said  to  the  missionary, 
"  My  heart  is  full  of  gratitude.  Foolish  men  have  told 
us  that  the  Great  Chief  would  send  his  young  men  to 
the  country  until  they  outnumbered  us,  and  that  then 


TREATIES  WITH  THE  INDIANS       189 

he  would  laugh  at  us;  but  this  letter  assures  us  that 
the  Great  Chief  will  act  justly  towards  us."  Another 
showed  his  faith  in  the  missionary  by  saying,  "  If  I  had 
heard  these  words  spoken  by  the  Great  Queen  I  could 
not  have  believed  them  with  more  implicit  faith  than 
I  do  now." 

A  Cree  chief,  Big  Bear,  of  whom  you  shall  hear 
again,  was  not  so  favorable  to  the  treaty.  He  said  to 
the  missionary,  "  We  want  none  of  the  Queen's  pres- 
ents ;  when  we  set  a  fox-trap  we  scatter  pieces  of  meat 
all  round,  but  when  the  fox  gets  into  the  trap  we  knock 
him  on  the  head ;  we  want  no  bait.  Let  your  chiefs 
come  like  men  and  talk  to  us."  Big  Bear  loved  the 
wild  life,  and  dreaded  the  time  when  he  would  have 
to  live  as  the  white  man  lives. 

Once  when  a  white  man  asked  one  of  Big  Bear's 
Indians  for  some  land,  the  brave  sprang  to  his  feet 
and,  pointing  to  the  east,  said,  "  Do  you  hear  the  Great 
White  Man  [meaning  the  Government]  coming  ?  I  do, 
and  I  hear  the  tramp  of  the  multitude  behind  him. 
When  he  comes  you  can  drop  in  behind  him  and  take 
up  all  the  land  claims  you  want;  but,  until  then,  I 
caution  you  to  put  up  no  land  stakes  in  our  country." 

The  Indians  were  not  thinking  of  themselves  only, 
but  of  their  children,  and  when  they  met  to  sign  the 
treaty  they  wished  to  be  very  sure  that  the  terms  would 
hold  good  for  all  the  Indians  to  come  after.  Some 
began  their  speeches  with  the  words,  "  We  want  to  think 
of  our  children."  A  noted  Cree  chief,  Poundmaker, 
in  speaking  of  Indian  children  for  all  the  years  to 
come,  said,  "  I  wish  you  to  treat  them  in  like  manner 
as  they  advance  in  civilization,"  and  ended  his  speech 

13 


190     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

with  the  words,  "  This  is  all  I  have  to  say  now.  If  I 
have  not  said  anything  in  the  right  manner  I  wish 
to  be  excused.  This  is  the  voice  of  the  people."  After- 
wards he  asked  for  further  explanations,  because  he 
could  not  support  himself  as  the  white  man,  and  did 
not  know  how  to  build  a  house  or  cultivate  the  land. 
He  was  quite  satisfied  when  told  that  he  might  still 
live  as  he  had  lived  before. 

When  the  treaty  was  signed  at  Fort  Pitt,  We-kas-koo- 
kee-say-yin,  or  Sweet  Grass,  made  a  very  beautiful 
speech,  at  the  close  of  which  he  said :  "  When  I  hold 
your  hand  I  feel  as  if  the  Great  Father  were  looking 
on  us  both  as  brothers.  I  am  thankful.  May  this  earth 
never  see  the  white  man's  blood  spilt  on  it.  I  thank 
God  that  we  stand  together.  I  am  thankful  that  I  can 
raise  my  head  and  see  the  white  man  and  red  man 
stand  together  as  long  as  the  sun  shines.  When  I  hold 
your  hands  and  touch  your  heart  as  I  do  now  [here  he 
took  the  Governor's  hand  and  touched  his  heart]  let 
us  be  as  one.  Use  your  utmost  to  help  me  and  help 
my  children,  so  that  they  may  prosper." 

After  the  medals  and  flags  had  been  presented,  and 
the  band  had  played  "  God  Save  the  Queen,"  the  chiefs 
went  to  the  Governor  to  say  good-bye.  Among  them 
was  Big  Bear.  He  said  his  Indians  were  away  hunt- 
ing on  the  plains,  and  he  was  to  speak  for  them,  but 
could  not  sign  the  treaty  in  their  absence.  Sweet  Grass 
said  to  him,  "  Say,  Yes,  and  take  my  hand  "  [meaning 
the  Governor] .  Big  Bear  replied,  "  Stop,  my  friend. 
I  never  saw  the  Governor  before.  When  I  heard  he  was 
to  come  I  said,  '  I  will  request  him  to  save  me  from 


TEEATIES  WITH  THE  INDIANS       191 

what  I  dread  most — hanging;'  it  was  not  given  us  to 
have  a  rope  about  our  necks." 

The  Governor  said  he  could  not  promise  that,  for, 
according  to  the  treaty,  Indians  were  governed  by  the 
laws  of  the  country,  and  so  if  an  Indian  committed 
murder  he  must  be  hanged.  But  Big  Bear  had  a 
great  horror  of  that  white  man's  law,  and  again  objected 
to  the  treaty  unless  the  Governor  would  change  that 
law.  However,  when  the  Governor  was  leaving,  he  re- 
mained sitting  until  the  others  had  gone,  and  then  rose, 
took  his  hand,  saying  to  him,  "  I  am  not  an  unduti- 
ful  child;  I  do  not  throw  back  your  hand,  but  as  my 
people  are  not  here  I  do  not  sign.  I  will  tell  them 
of  what  I  have  heard,  and  next  year  will  come." 

The  following  year  a  treaty  was  made  with  the 
Blackfoot  tribe,  living  near  the  mountains.  The 
speeches  made  by  the  chiefs  at  that  meeting  showed 
that  the  red  men  were  well  satisfied  with  British  rule. 

It  was  Button  Chief  who  said,  "  The  Great  Mother 
sent  the  Police  to  put  an  end  to  traffic  in  fire-water.  I 
can  sleep  now  safely.  Before  the  arrival  of  the  Police, 
when  I  laid  my  head  down  at  night,  every  sound 
frightened  me ;  now  I  can  sleep  and  not  be  afraid." 

Eagle  Tail  addressed  the  Governor  as  "  Great  Father 
from  our  Great  Mother,"  and  said  to  him,  "  The  advice 
and  help  I  received  from  the  Police  I  shall  never  forget 
as  long  as  the  moon  brightens  the  night,  as  long  as 
water  runs  and  grass  grows  in  spring;  and  I  expect 
to  get  the  same  from  our  Great  Mother." 

Crowfoot  said,  "  If  the  Police  had  not  come  to  our 
country,  where  would  we  all  be  now?  Bad  men  and 
whiskey  were  killing  us  so  fast,  and  very  few  indeed 


192     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

of  us  would  have  been  left  to-day.  The  Police  have 
protected  us  as  the  feathers  of  the  bird  protect  it 
from  the  frosts  of  "winter.  I  wish  them  all  good, 
and  trust  that  all  our  hearts  will  increase  in  goodness 
from  this  time  forward.     I  am  satisfied.     I  will  sign." 

After  signing  the  treaty  the  Indians  fought  a  sham 
battle  on  horseback  for  the  entertainment  of  their 
guests.  It  was  wild  sport  to  the  white  men.  The 
Indians  sent  the  bullets  whizzing  about  so  close  that 
they  were  glad  indeed  when  it  was  over  and  the  red 
men  were  asleep  in  their  wigwams. 

3STo  treaties  could  be  made  with  the  animals.  Some 
moved  farther  north  where  the  country  was  still  "  No 
Man's  Land."  Some  were  killed  by  the  white  man's 
guns  or  caught  in  his  traps.  The  animals  and  Indians 
no  longer  owned  the  country.  It  now  was  the  white 
man's  land. 


<    5 

H    - 


CHAPTER  XIX. 
The  Saskatchewan  Rebellion. 

The  most  unfortunate  story  in  all  the  history  of  the 
Canadian  West  is  of  the  sad  events  of  the  spring 
and  summer  of  1885.  There  was  actual  fighting  in  the 
new  country  then,  and  many  a  Canadian  volunteer  lost 
his  life  far  from  home  and  friends.  The  cause  of  all 
this  trouble  began  a  few  years  earlier.  It  happened  that 
after  the  Province  of  Manitoba  was  formed,  a  large 
number  of  half-breeds  who  had  been  living  there  moved 
farther  west.  Some  left  Red  River  because  they  could 
sell  their  farms  to  those  who  were  coming  from  the  East, 
but  many  others  moved  because  they  liked  to  live  out 
in  the  wilds,  far  from  civilization,  where  they  could 
hunt  when  they  did  not  care  to  work  the  land.  With 
their  families  and  their  few  possessions  they  had  started 
off  in  Red  River  carts.  Sometimes  a  procession  of  sixty 
or  seventy  of  these  carts  went  bumping  and  creaking 
over  the  prairies  to  the  new  homes. 

Many  of  the  half-breeds  went  north  to  the  forks  of 
the  Saskatchewan,  the  river  La  Verendrye's  sons  had 
discovered  over  a  hundred  years  before.  There  they 
took  up  their  long,  narrow  farms,  about  as  wide  as  a 
garden,  but  stretching  back  over  the  prairie  for  a  mile 
or  more.  Their  homes  were  placed  so  near  together 
that  they  could  visit  every  night  and  have  the  gay  times 
they  so  much  enjoyed,  even  in  the  winter,  for  there  was 

193 


194     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

no  long,  cold  tramp  home  with  the  danger  of  having  nose 
and  ears  frozen  on  the  way.  Each  man  kept  a  canoe 
at  his  door  on  the  river-bank,  for  to  a  half-breed  fishing 
was  a  very  pleasant  way  of  securing  his  daily  food.  As 
each  one  had  a  little  of  the  river  front,  it  was  not  neces- 
sary for  anyone  to  dig  a  well.  So  they  were  very  happy 
on  their  long,  narrow  farms,  mere  "  ribbons  of  land  " 
beside  the  Saskatchewan. 

The  half-breeds  were  not  alone.  A  little  beyond  them 
were  Indian  reserves.  Near  them  white  men  soon  came 
and  formed  settlements.  Battleford,  when  the  half- 
breeds  first  went  to  that  part,  was  only  a  trading-post, 
but  it  soon  grew  to  be  an  important  centre  for  the  new- 
comers from  the  East.  Many  of  the  white  men  were 
reckless  hunters,  who  shot  down  hundreds  of  buffaloes 
and  frightened  the  herds,  and  both  Indians  and  half- 
breeds  began  to  fear  a  time  when  they  would  have  no 
pemmican. 

The  half-breeds  had  a  still  greater  grievance.  The 
Government  had  not  yet  given  them  title-deeds  to  their 
farms,  and  so  they  had  no  way  of  proving  that  the  land 
they  had  settled  upon  was  their  own.  However,  they 
did  not  worry  over  this,  and  matters  might  have  gone 
on  smoothly  for  some  time  had  not  the  Canadian  Gov- 
ernment sent  surveyors  out  to  divide  that  fertile  prairie 
into  townships  and  square  lots,  as  they  had  done  in  the 
Red  River  settlement  fifteen  years  before.  One  pleasant 
summer  found  them  as  far  as  the  Saskatchewan,  survey- 
ing the  long,  narrow  farms  of  the  half-breeds.  It  was 
most  confusing  to  a  half-breed  to  find  that  part  of  his 
farm  ran  across  part  of  his  neighbor's,  and  that  his 
neighbor's  ran  across:   one  end  of  his.     Besides  this, 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  REBELLION    195 

according  to  the  surveys,  they  could  not  all  have  part  of 
the  river,  nor  could  their  houses  form  a  row  on  the  bank. 
Worst  of  all,  they  had  no  title-deeds,  and  they  feared 
others  would  come  and  claim  these  square  farms  that 
had  been  staked  off  on  top  of  their  own.  Some  thought 
it  was  for  others  the  surveyors  had  measured  them  off, 
and  that  they  would  be  left  homeless.  It  was  much  the 
same  trouble  as  had  come  to  the  Red  River  in  1869. 

The  half-breeds  had  no  members  in  the  Dominion 
Parliament  to  plead  their  cause,  but  they  sent  petitions 
to  the  Government  asking  for  title-deeds  to  their  land 
such  as  had  been  given  to  their  people  who  had  remained 
in  Manitoba.  The  Government,  however,  was  busy 
with  other  matters,  and  the  half-breeds  in  the  far  North- 
West  were  left  to  wait.  Then  they  decided  to  send  for 
Louis  Riel.  He  was  teaching  school  in  the  United 
States,  but  his  time  of  banishment  from  Canada  was 
up,  and  he  went  to  them  at  once,  proud  that  they  should 
want  him. 

Riel,  with  his  ability  and  education,  had  an  oppor- 
tunity to  do  much  for  these  people,  but  he  was  too  vain 
and  selfish  to  become  a  hero.  By  thinking  of  himself 
more  than  of  the  cause  of  his  people  he  made  some  great 
mistakes.  Not  content  to  work  for  the  title-deeds  alone, 
he  wished  to  drive  the  white  men  out  of  the  North- West 
and  take  down  the  British  flag.  As  soon  as  he  reached 
Saskatchewan  he  made  himself  the  leader  of  his  people, 
and  began  urging  them  to  rebel,  just  as  he  had  done  at 
Red  River  in  '69.  He  left  his  Church  and  would  not 
be  guided  by  the  good  priests.  His  talk  was  most  alarm- 
ing. He  said  to  one  man,  who  was  trying  to  quiet  the 
half-breeds,  "You  don't  know  what  we  are  after.     It 


196     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

is  blood,  blood;  we  want  blood."  He  made  the  same 
wild  remark  to  a  priest,  who  afterwards  said  of  him, 
"  He  is  not  crazy,  this  Riel,  but  he  is  wicked." 

By  spring  (1885)  matters  became  serious.  Riel  had 
made  his  headquarters  at  Batoche,  and  was  gathering 
the  half-breeds  together.  He  was  also  trying  to  excite 
the  Indians,  who  were  living  quietly  on  their  reserves, 
and  to  induce  them  to  take  up  arms.  This  was  one  of 
the  worst  things  Riel  could  have  been  guilty  of,  for  he 
knew,  if  once  aroused  to  war,  the  Indians,  no  matter 
how  gentle  and  peaceful  they  had  been,  would  burst 
forth  with  all  the  strength  and  cruelty  of  their  savage 
natures.  He  knew,  too,  how  terrible  it  would  be  should 
they  sing  their  war-songs,  dance  their  war-dances,  and 
some  dark  night  stealthily  spring  upon  the  little  settle- 
ments with  their  blood-curdling  battle-cries.  To  oppose 
such  an  outbreak  there  were  only  the  small  bands  of 
settlers  and  a  few  hundred  Mounted  Police. 

Not  far  away  from  Batoche  was  the  little  settlement 
of  Duck  Lake.  It  consisted  of  only  a  few  log  houses, 
but  provisions  and  ammunition  were  stored  there.  To 
secure  these  supplies  a  party  was  sent  out  from  Fort 
Carlton,  a  Mounted  Police  post.  But  Dumont,  Riel's 
helper,  and  a  force  of  half-breeds  were  there  before 
them.  They  hurried  back  for  help,  but  even  then  were 
far  outnumbered  by  the  half-breeds,  who  fired  on  them 
from  behind  bushes  and  trees.  When  twelve  of  their 
number  were  killed  the  loyalists  were  obliged  to  retreat. 

News  of  this  defeat  aroused  Canada  to  the  danger  in 
the  North-West.  Canadian  volunteers  responded  loyally 
to  the  call  to  arms,  and  soon  a  large  force  under  General 
Middleton  was  on  the  way  to  the  North- West.    The  rail- 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  REBELLION    197 

way  was  not  yet  finished.  There  were  great  gaps  in 
the  track  where  the  soldiers  had  to  travel,  on  horseback 
or  on  foot,  through  the  snow  and  melting  ice  of  March. 
Especially  hard  was  the  journey  round  the  north  shore 
of  Lake  Superior,  where  cold,  bleak  winds  blow  at  that 
season.  To  make  matters  worse,  the  hind  shoes  had 
been  taken  off  the  horses,  so  that  if  thev  kicked  in  the 
cars  they  could  not  hurt  each  other,  and  now,  when 
these  were  badly  needed,  the  men  had  no  way  of  put- 
ting them  on  again. 

Meanwhile  Riel  was  busy.  He  cut  the  telegraph  wires 
that  entered  Batoche,  so  that  the  white  people  could  not 
telegraph  for  help,  and  sent  runners  to  the  Indians  to 
tell  them  to  take  up  arms  and  seize  the  provisions  and 
ammunition  at  the  forts.  To  make  sure  that  thev  would 
listen,  he  took  advantage  of  an  eclipse  of  the  sun,  which 
he  knew  would  occur  in  March.  He  told  the  Indians 
that  at  a  certain  time  on  a  certain  day  the  sun  would 
darken  as  a  sign  of  his  power  and  a  signal  for  them  to 
rise.  The  Indians  had  never  studied  astronomy,  and 
knew  nothing  of  the  cause  of  the  eclipse,  so  they  were 
amazed  when  the  sun  darkened  at  the  very  time  Riel 
said  it  would,  and  some  thought  the  Great  Spirit  was 
working  with  him. 

Many  of  the  Indians,  however,  paid  no  attention  to 
Riel's  messages  or  the  darkening  of  the  sun.  Some  even 
left  their  reserves  to  get  away  from  all  the  talk  of  war. 
But  others,  who  could  not  help  listening,  heard  of  the 
Duck  Lake  fight.  Among  these  was  Big  Bear.  It  is 
true  he  had  recently  signed  the  treaty,  and  now  lived  on 
a  rich  reserve  and  wore  the  Queen's  medal,  but  he  was 
an  Indian,  and  could  not  stand  too  much  talk  of  war 


198     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

and  bloodshed.  Besides,  Riel  had  told  him  to  fight,  and 
the  sun  had  darkened  to  show  Riel's  power.  It  seemed 
to  Big  Bear  that  even  the  Great  Spirit  was  calling  him 
to  arms,  so  he  gathered  his  braves  together  and  declared 
he  would  fight  for  Riel. 
■f^ot  far  from  his  reserve,  on  the  shores  of  Frog  Lake, 
was  a  little  settlement  of  white  people.  During  the 
Good  Friday  service  Big  Bear's  warriors  appeared  out- 
side the  church  and  disturbed  the  worshippers.  After 
service  they  followed  the  people,  shooting  down  some 
and  taking  others  prisoners.  The  priests  were  shot 
while  trying  to  reason  with  the  Indians  and  save  the 
women  and  children.  A  few  of  the  women  were  after- 
wards bought  from  the  Indians  by  the  half-breeds,  who 
gave  up  their  horses  for  them.  Fortunately  for  the 
remaining  prisoners,  some  of  the  Wood  Crees  from 
farther  north,  who  did  not  want  war,  were  there  and 
protected  them  from  harmj 

This  was  a  terrible  change  for  the  little  settlement. 
The  cold,  dreary  day  had  begun  in  peace  and  quietness. 
A  few  hours  later  the  dead  and  dying  were  lying  about 
upon  the  snow,  and  the  living,  some  of  whom  were  only 
children,  were  prisoners  in  the  hands  of  the  Indians, 
while  their  homes  were  ransacked  by  the  dusky  savages. 
Later  the  Indians  had  a  grand  feast,  at  which  they  ate 
all  the  food  they  could  find.  After  their  feast  they 
threw  the  bodies  of  the  dead  into  the  cellars  and  burned 
the  houses.  \  Then  the  massacre  of  Frog  Lake  was  over, 
and  only  ashes  were  left  where  shortly  before  had  been 
the  happy  homes  of  the  settlersj 

Taking  his  prisoners  with  him,  Big  Bear  then  hurried 
down  the  river  to  Fort  Pitt,  which  was  guarded  by  only 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  REBELLION    199 

twenty-three  Mounted  Police,  commanded  by  Francis 
Dickens,  a  son  of  the  great  novelist.  These  men, 
fearing  an  attack,  had  built  two  flat-bottomed  boats, 
or  scows,  so  that  they  could  float  down  the  river  to 
Battleford  as  soon  as  the  ice  broke  up.  Three  scouts 
were  out  trying  to  learn  where  the  Indians  were,  when 
suddenly  Big  Bear's  warriors  surrounded  the  fort.  Big 
Bear  sent  Inspector  Dickens  a  summons  to  surrender. 
The  Inspector  refused.  All  doors  were  barricaded,  and 
every  man  was  in  his  place.  Behind  the  fort  on  the 
hill  two  hundred  and  fifty  armed  and  mounted  Indians 
took  up  their  position.  They  danced  their  war-dance 
in  full  sight  of  the  fort,  and  some  of  the  braves  stole 
among  the  bushes  ready  to  shoot  any  white  man  who 
ventured  in  or  out.  In  trying  to  get  back,  one  of  the 
scouts  was  killed  and  the  other  two  were  wounded. 

At  last  the  officer  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  went 
out  to  talk  with  the  Indians,  for  he  thought  he  could 
find  out  what  they  meant  to  do.  He  was  taken  prisoner, 
but  managed  to  send  word  back  to  Dickens  to  get  away 
as  quickly  as  possible,  for  Big  Bear  meant  mischief  and 
could  easily  wipe  out  the  little  band.  Dickens  decided 
to  abandon  the  post  at  once  and  make  his  way  down 
to  Battleford  in  the  scows.  As  the  river  was  swollen 
with  the  spring  freshets  and  filled  with  floating  ice, 
progress  was  slow.  Snow  and  sleet  fell  all  the  first 
day.  Then  it  grew  colder,  and  the  men's  wet  clothes 
were  soon  frozen  stiff.  Not  until  they  had  spent 
five  miserable  days  on  the  river  did  they  reach  Battle- 
ford. There  they  were  joyfully  received  by  anxious 
friends  who  had  feared  they  might  never  see  them  again, 
and  a  grand  dinner  was  given  in  their  honor. 


200     WHEKE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

By  this  time  all  settlers  near  the  Saskatchewan  were 
greatly  alarmed,  especially  as  telegraph  wires  were  down 
and  they  could  not  learn  how  near  help  was.  But  the 
troops  were  coming  as  fast  as  weather  and  roads  would 
permit.  The  gaps  in  the  railway  were  not  the  only 
cause  of  delay.  They  had  many  miles  to  travel  north 
of  the  railway,  at  a  season  when  the  frost  was  coming 
out  of  the  ground  and  the  roads  were  covered  with  sticky 
half-frozen  mud  or  slush,  and  the  streams  to  be  crossed 
were  rough  and  high.  However,  the  farmers  placed 
their  waggons  at  the  disposal  of  the  troops,  and  they 
pushed  on  as  rapidly  as  possible. 

The  army  was  divided  into  three  sections.  One  sec- 
tion General  Middleton  led  to  Batoche,  Eiel's  head- 
quarters ;  another,  under  Colonel  Otter,  went  to  Battle- 
ford  ;  and  the  third,  under  General  Strange,  followed 
Big  Bear. 

At  the  Saskatchewan  River  General  Middleton 
divided  his  troops  and  had  part  march  on  one  side  of 
the  river  and  part  on  the  other,  so  that  they  might  attack 
Batoche  from  both  sides.  One  rickety  scow  in  the  river 
carried  the  supplies.  It  happened  that  they  met  the 
enemy  before  they  reached  Batoche.  One  morning, 
when  near  Fish  Creek,  they  started  as  usual.  The  camp 
was  all  astir  before  daylight,  and  they  were  on  the  march 
before  half-past  six,  with  some  sixteen  scouts  ahead. 
After  advancing  for  about  four  miles,  they  came  to  a 
house  with  broken  window-panes  and  grain  lying  about 
as  if  horses  had  just  been  fed.  Soon  after  the  scouts 
reported  that  they  had  seen  at  least  a  dozen  camp-fires 
and  a  trail  leading  from  them.  The  captain  of  the 
scouts  was  ordered  to  follow  up  the  trail.     He  and  his 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN"  KEBELLIOJST    201 

men  had  been  gone  but  a  few  minutes  when  shots  were 
heard.  Then  a  volley  was  fired  at  the  advance  guard, 
but  fortunately  it  flew  high.  The  guard  at  once  charged 
in  the  direction  from  which  the  shots  had  come.  At 
this  thirty  or  forty  half-breeds,  who  had  been  in  the 
shelter  of  a  bluff,  darted  into  a  ravine  where  their  com- 
rades were,  and  there,  hidden  from  sight,  opened  a 
deadly  fire  upon  the  soldiers. 

Major  Boulton,  who  commanded  the  advance  guard, 
instantly  ordered  his  men  to  dismount,  lie  on  the  ground 
and  fire.  He  hoped  thus  to  give  them  the  least  dan- 
gerous position,  and  to  keep  the  enemy  in  the  ravine 
until  the  main  body  of  troops  could  be  brought  up. 
"  Fire  away  and  lie  close ;  never  mind  if  you  don't  see 
anything,"  he  shouted.  Bravely  the  men  kept  up  their 
fire,  though  one  after  another  was  struck  by  the  bullets 
of  the  enemy  they  could  not  see.  Major  Boulton  after- 
wards related  a  snatch  of  conversation  heard  as  a 
wounded  soldier  crawled  back,  which  gives  an  idea 
of  the  position  they  were  in :  "  Say,  Chummy,  are  you 
hit?"  "Yes."  "Where  are  they,  anyway?  I  can't 
see  them.  This  is  new  to  me ;  I  was  never  at  this  kind 
of  thing  before." 

The  enemy  were  succeeding  so  well  that  one  man 
dared  to  come  out  of  the  ravine  and  begin  a  war-dance. 
He  never  finished  it,  and  no  one  followed  his  example. 

When  the  advance  guard  let  their  horses  loose,  that 
they  might  save  themselves  from  the  bullets,  the  horses 
galloped  back  as  if  hoping  to  hurry  the  others  on  to  the 
aid  of  their  masters.  The  main  body  of  troops  came 
up,  and,  after  several  hours  of  firing,  the  "hornet's 
nest."  as  the  soldiers  called  that  ravine  and  bluff,  was 


202     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

cleared  of  the  enemy,  who  retreated  farther  and  farther 
away  until  at  last  firing  ceased.  As  oars  had  to  be  hewn 
out  of  trees  before  the  soldiers  on  the  opposite  side  of 
the  river  could  cross  in  the  scow,  the  fighting  was  over 
before  the  last  of  the  troops  reached  the  spot. 

After  the  battle  it  was  found  that  eight  of  the  volun- 
teers were  dead  and  forty-four  were  wounded.  The  next 
day  the  dead  were  wrapped  in  their  blankets  and  buried 
on  the  lonely  banks  of  the  Saskatchewan,  hundreds 
of  miles  from  home.  Stones  were  gathered  to  form  a 
cairn,  and  over  it  a  cross  was  placed.  Waggons  were 
then  fitted  up  as  comfortably  as  possible,  and  the 
wounded  were  sent  forty  miles  up  the  river  to  Saskatoon, 
where  they  could  have  better  care. 

After  this  serious  experience  General  Middleton 
decided  to  await  reinforcements  before  moving  on  to 
Batoche. 

/  Cut  Knife  Ckeek. 

On  the  day  of  the  Fish  Creek  engagement,  Colonel 
Otter's  troops  were  nearing  Battleford,  where  by  this 
time  many  settlers  had  gathered  for  safety  and  were 
anxiously  awaiting  the  arrival  of  the  soldiers.  The 
cause  of  their  alarm  was  a  great  band  of  Indians  under 
the  Cree  chief,  Poundmaker,  who  had  taken  up  a  strong 
position  behind  a  ravine  at  Cut  Knife  Creek,  not  many 
miles  from  Battleford.  Poundmaker,  as  you  know,  had 
made  a  very  nice  speech  when  he  signed  the  treaty,  and 
had  always  been,  not  only  friendly  to  the  white  men,  but 
in  favor  of  peace,  and  loyal  to  the  Government.  But 
Riel's  talk  and  Riel's  messages  were  too  much  for  some 
of  his  braves,  and  when  Riel  told  them  that  he  would 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  KEBELLION    203 

drive  away  the  whites  and  keep  the  country  for  the 
Indians  and  half-breeds,  they  began  to  think  of  the  days 
before  the  white  men  came,  when  herds  of  buffaloes  had 
roamed  everywhere  on  the  plains.  They  knew  the  white 
men  would  teach  them  to  farm  on  the  reserves,  but 
Poundmaker's  people  were  not  successful  farmers,  and 
besides,  they  did  not  want  such  a  dull  life.  What  they 
did  want  was  always  to  have  buffaloes  to  hunt.  But 
how  could  they  have  them  when  the  white  men  were 
farming  all  over  the  prairie  hunting-grounds?  The 
more  they  thought  of  these  things,  and  the  more  they 
listened  to  Kiel,  the  less  friendly  they  felt  towards  the 
white  people.  So  they  found  a  stronghold  and,  to  the 
great  alarm  of  the  inhabitants  of  Battleford,  camped 
there  ready  to  fight. 

Poundmaker  never  let  them  make  an  attack,  but  some 
of  his  Indians  stole  about  the  outskirts  of  Battleford 
doing  wicked  things.  They  stole  cattle,  burned  some 
buildings  and  shot  down  several  of  the  white  men. 
The  very  first  thing  Colonel  Otter's  scouts  saw  as 
they  approached  Battleford  was  some  of  these  bad 
Indians  setting  fire  to  one  of  the  best  houses.  The 
scouts  fired,  but  the  Indians  jumped  on  their  ponies 
and  got  away.  No  wonder  the  troops  found  the  people 
greatly  excited  over  these  outrages  and  relieved  at  the 
arrival  of  a  military  force. 

After  resting  a  few  days,  Colonel  Otter  prepared 
to  march  against  Poundmaker,  hoping  thus  to  put 
a  stop  to  further  trouble  at  Battleford  and  to  prevent 
the  chief  from  being  tempted  to  join  Big  Bear.  About 
three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  of  May  1st,  the  expedi- 
tion set  out.     At  seven  they  halted  for  supper,  then 


204     WHEKE   THE  BUFFALO  KOAMED 

started  again  when  the  moon  rose,  some  hours  later. 
As  they  were  riding  in  heavy  waggons,  they  could  not 
travel  quickly,  and  it  was  early  morning  when  they 
came  in  sight  of  Poundmaker's  camp.  The  chief  had 
chosen  his  position  wisely.  The  only  approach  for  the 
soldiers  was  between  two  ravines,  and  behind  was  the 
valley  of  the  Cut  Knife  Creek.  Cautiously  they 
advanced  towards  the  camp.  All  the  Indians  were 
still  asleep  save  one,  who  was  looking  after  the  ponies. 
He  gave  the  alarm,  and  almost  instantly  the  Indians 
were  ready  to  defend  themselves.  They  fought  bravely 
to  protect  their  women  and  children  and  their  ponies 
and  cattle.  They  outnumbered  the  white  men,  and  it 
was  found  impossible  to  drive  them  from  their  posi- 
tion. By  noon  Colonel  Otter,  having  shown  them  by  his 
fearless  attack  what  brave  soldiers  had  come  to  oppose 
Riel,  decided  to  retire  and  thus  prevent  unnecessary 
loss  of  life.  Poundmaker,  also  considerate  of  the  lives 
of  the  white  men,  allowed  them  to  return  to  Battleford 
without  following  them  up  with  his  warriors  to  shoot 
them  down. 

Batoche. 

A  week  after  the  fight  at  Cut  Knife  Creek,  General 
Middleton,  having  been  joined  by  troops  under  Colonel 
Williams  with  the  little  steamer  Northcote,  which  had 
been  turned  into  a  gunboat,  moved  on  to  Batoche, 
Kiel's  headquarters.  On  the  9th  of  May  he  reached 
there.  The  troops  were  met  by  a  deadly  fire  from 
concealed  rifle-pits,  which  had  been  dug  all  about  the 
village,  but  the  little  gunboat  soon  checked  the  fire 
from  these.     Though  no  attack  was  made,  firing  went 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  KEBELLION    205 

on  until  night,  when  it  ceased  altogether  and  the  tired 
soldiers  had  supper  in  peace  behind  a  barricade  of 
waggons.  All  that  night  a  careful  watch  was  kept,  at 
least  two-thirds  of  the  men  being  awake  and  on  the 
lookout.  They  feared  the  enemy  might  attack  them 
just  before  dawn,  when  it  would  be  very  hard  for  them 
to  defend  themselves  in  their  crowded  camp.  Before 
daylight  came  the  teamsters  were  aroused  and  ordered 
to  stand  by  their  horses  to  prevent  a  stampede  in  case 
the  camp  should  be  attacked. 

No  attack  was  made,  however,  and  the  next  day 
being  Sunday,  service  was  held  in  the  camp,  though 
firing  still  went  on.  On  Monday  bullets  were  still 
flying,  but  the  soldiers  seemed  no  nearer  to  victory. 
While  the  General  was  completing  his  toilet  in  the 
camp  behind  the  waggons,  with  his  little  looking-glass 
propped  up  on  a  waggon-wheel,  a  bullet  struck  the 
waggon,  but  he  went  on  as  if  nothing  had  happened. 

By  this  time  Biel  was  becoming  anxious.  He  wrote 
a  letter  to  General  Middleton,  then,  opening  the  trap- 
door of  the  cellar  where  he  kept  his  prisoners,  he  gave 
the  letter  to  a  Mr.  Astley  to  take  to  the  General.  But 
he  did  not  let  him  start  until  he  had  promised  to 
come  back  to  the  prison  cellar.  Mr.  Astley  rode  out 
with  a  white  flag,  and  the  General,  on  seeing  him,  gave 
orders  to  cease  firing,  and  went  to  meet  him.  The 
letter  said  that  if  the  troops  killed  the  women  and 
children  by  their  firing,  Kiel  would  murder  his  prison- 
ers. This  was  partly  an  excuse,  as  what  Kiel  most 
wanted  Mr.  Astley  to  find  out  was,  under  what  con- 
ditions General  Middleton  would  accept  his  surrender. 

The  General  wrote  in  reply  that  if  Kiel  would  put 
14 


206      WHEEE   THE   BUFFALO   KOAMED 

the  women  and  children  in  one  place,  and  let  him 
know  where  they  were,  no  shot  would  be  fired  in  that 
direction.  He  also  told  Mr.  Astlej  that  a  surrender 
must  be  unconditional,  and  that  Eiel  would  be  pro- 
tected until  handed  over  to  the  Government. 

After  this  firing  went  on  as  before.  Now,  so  much 
skirmishing  with  no  real  fighting  was  discouraging  the 
soldiers.  Their  comrades  were  being  shot  down  every 
day.  The  enemy,  too,  they  knew  were  losing,  for  they 
saw  them  burying  their  dead  in  the  churchyard.  Yet,  in 
spite  of  the  loss  of  life,  the  troops  were  accomplish- 
ing nothing,  and  as  the  General  did  not  make  an  attack 
and  put  an  end  to  it  all,  they  feared  he  had  no  con- 
fidence in  them. 

However,  the  General  arranged  for  a  decided  move- 
ment on  the  following  day;  but  as  some  of  his  orders 
were  misunderstood,  it  did  not  take  place,  and  the 
Grenadiers  and  the  men  under  Lieutenant-Colonel 
Williams,  about  260  in  all,  were  sent  out  to  skirmish 
as  before.  But,  unknown  to  the  General,  they  had 
greater  plans.  The  order  to  advance  was  given.  They 
first  made  a  rush  for  the  rifle-pits,  and  drove  the  enemy 
away  from  them  and  back  to  the  village.  Then,  as 
they  paused  to  take  breath,  Colonel  Williams  said, 
"  Now,  lads,  I  am  senior  officer  here,  and  I  will  lead  you, 
and  we  will  finish  up  this  business  at  once.  Will  you 
follow  me  ?"  "  We  will !  we  will !"  was  the  response. 
Then  with  pistol  in  one  hand  and  cap  in  the  other, 
Colonel  Williams,  closely  followed  by  his  men,  and 
under  a  sharp  fire,  made  straight  for  the  village,  never 
stopping  till  he  found  shelter  under  the  wall  of  one  of 
the  houses. 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  REBELLION    207 

The  firing  was  soon  heard  in  camp.  There  nothing 
was  in  readiness  for  an  assault.  The  cavalry  horses 
were  unsaddled  and  the  artillery  horses  were  unhitched. 
Most  of  the  soldiers  were  taking  an  after-dinner  rest, 
and  the  General  was  just  having  luncheon,  when  the 
firing  and  loud  cheering  were  first  heard  coming  from 
the  front.  The  General  at  once  said  to  a  colonel  who 
was  lunching  with  him :  "  What  is  it  ?  What  is  it  ?  Go 
and  see." 

The  colonel  ran  over  to  the  entrenchment  and 
listened.  The  shouts,  he  could  tell,  were  not  those  of 
men  who  were  being  defeated,  and  besides,  they  were 
evidently  nearing  Batoche,  so  he  went  back  and  told 
the  General  that  he  thought  their  men  were  "  into 
them  with  the  bayonets." 

"  They  will  all  be  killed !  Tell  them  to  bring  me 
my  horse.  Get  the  90th  out  at  once,  and  bring  them 
down;  we  must  support  them,"  the  General  exclaimed, 
little  guessing  what  a  brilliant  attack  Colonel  Wil- 
liams was  leading. 

The  horse  was  brought.  General  Middleton  mounted 
and  galloped  towards  the  front.  Soon  the  artillery 
was  galloping  after  him.  Major  Boulton's  scouts  were 
ordered  out,  but  the  rest  of  the  force  did  not  wait  for 
orders,  and  but  few  of  them  took  time  to  saddle  their 
horses.  They  simply  seized  their  rifles  and  ran  to  help 
their  comrades.  After  that  no  one  waited  for  orders. 
The  General  himself,  seeing  he  could  do  nothing,  said: 
"  Let  them  go — you  can't  stop  them."  In  a  very  short 
time  Batoche  was  won  and  the  enemy  driven  several 
miles  beyond  the  village. 

The  weary  prisoners  were  then  let  out  of  the  dark, 


208     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

damp  cellar  where  they  had  been  kept.  The  women 
and  children,  found  huddled  together  in  a  sheltered 
spot  behind  a  bluff,  were  also  cared  for.  Riel  had 
made  his  escape,  but  after  a  few  days  gave  himself 
up  and  was  taken  prisoner  to  await  his  trial.  General 
Middleton  then  moved  on  to  join  Colonel  Otter  at 
Battleford. 

Now,  after  the  fight  at  Fish  Creek,  Riel  had  sent 
Poundmaker  word  that  he,  and  not  the  British  soldiers, 
had  won  that  battle,  and  that  he  now  wanted  the  chief 
at  Batoche.  Poundmaker  then  left  his  ravine,  but  he 
never  joined  Riel,  nor  did  he  make  any  attempt  to 
attack  the  white  men.  He  did  nothing  worse  than  to 
take  a  few  prisoners.  It  happened  that,  after  leaving 
Cut  Knife  Creek,  some  of  Poundmaker's  Indians 
came  upon  a  train  of  waggons  loaded  with  supplies. 
The  teamsters,  though  they  knew  they  would  have 
little  chance  against  so  many  armed  Indians,  drove 
their  oxen  round  in  a  circle,  that  the  waggons  might 
form  a  wall  behind  which  to  take  shelter.  Some  of 
the  braves  rode  up  with  a  message  saying  that  if  they 
surrendered  their  lives  would  be  spared.  This  they 
did.  The  Indians  at  once  crowded  about  them,  ran- 
sacking the  waggons  and  taking  whatever  they  pleased. 
Then  the  teamsters  were  compelled  to  drive  their 
waggons  to  Poundmaker's  camp.  As  they  approached, 
the  squaws  and  papooses  poured  out  of  the  tepees, 
cheering  at  the  sight,  and  forming  a  jeering,  howling 
crowd  on  each  side  as  the  frightened  teamsters  were 
hurried  along.  However,  the  prisoners  were  reas- 
sured of  their  safety  by  Poundmaker,  who  shook  hands 
with  each   and  told  them  that   their  lives  would  be 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  REBELLION    209 

spared,  adding  that  he  knew  there  was  a  Great  Spirit 
above,  and  so  he  would  not  allow  them  to  be  injured 
without  cause. 

Soon  after  the  Indians  broke  camp,  and  the  prison- 
ers had  a  chance  to  watch  what  would  certainly  astonish 
white  people  who  live  on  that  very  spot  to-day.  In 
one  of  the  newspapers  of  that  year  it  was  described 
in  this  way: 

"Tepee-poles  were  thrown  down  in  a  twinkling  by  the 
squaws,  who,  assisted  by  young  boys  and  girls,  rapidly  packed 
everything  away  in  carts  and  waggons  all  ready  for  the  start. 
The  men  lounged  round,  whiffing  tobacco  from  long-stemmed 
pipes,  or  attended  to  the  trappings  of  their  horses,  while 
youngsters,  scarcely  able  to  crawl  about,  drove  in  the  cattle. 
Finally  a  start  was  made,  and  the  disorganized  mob  moved 
eastward  towards  Riel's  headquarters.  Twenty-five  or  thirty 
scouts  rode  about  a  mile  ahead.  Instead  of  travelling  along 
in  a  line,  the  Indians  spread  out,  leaving  a  trail  behind  them 
over  two  miles  wide.  First  came  about  three  hundred  and 
sixty  war-painted  braves,  mounted  on  wiry  ponies,  or  on  the 
more  powerful  animals  stolen  in  the  early  raids.  Next  came 
Red  River  carts,  waggons,  and  every  other  queer  kind  of  con- 
veyance ever  made.  Each  was  loaded  with  plunder  or  tepee 
poles,  while  perched  on  top  were  old  men  with  bows  and 
arrows.  Behind  followed  a  motley  mass  of  waggons  and  carts 
surrounded  by  lowing  cattle  and  little  boys  on  foot.  Other 
Indian  lads,  mounted  on  young  colts,  kept  up  to  the  moving 
outfit.  About  half  a  mile  behind  came  other  herds  of  cattle, 
and  behind  them  another  herd  of  horses.  Young  girls  and 
squaws  were  mounted.  Several  of  the  families  rode  along  on 
oxen.  In  this  manner  the  followers  of  Poundmaker  covered 
three  miles  an  hour  with  ease." 

However,  it  was  not  long  before  Poundmaker,  wish- 
ing to  make  terms  with  the  white  men,  sent  the  fol- 
lowing letter  to  General  Middleton. 


210     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

"  Sir, — I  am  camped  with  my  people  at  the  east  end  of 
Eagle  Hills,  where  I  am  reached  by  the  news  of  the  surrender 
of  Riel.  No  letter  came  with  the  news,  so  I  cannot  tell  how 
far  it  may  be  true.  I  send  some  of  my  men  to  you  to  learn 
the  truth  and  terms  of  peace,  and  hope  you  will  deal  kindly 
with  us.  I  and  my  people  wish  you  to  send  us  the  terms  in 
writing,  so  that  we  may  be  under  no  misunderstanding,  from 
which  so  much  trouble  arises.  We  have  twenty-one  prisoners, 
whom  we  have  tried  to  treat  well  in  every  respect.  With 
greeting. 

His 
"(Signed)     POUNDMAKER."     X 

Mark. 

The  General  replied  that  he  would  not  make  terms 
with  him,  but  he  would  meet  him  and  his  councillors 
at  Battleford  on  a  certain  day.  The  meeting  was  one 
of  the  most  remarkable  which  ever  took  place  in  the 
West,  and  was  long  remembered  by  the  Indians  as  one 
of  their  greatest  pow-wows.  Seated  about  in  a  great 
semi-circle  were  the  Indian  braves,  decorated  with 
war-paint,  some  wearing  kid  gloves,  others  in  women's 
hats,  but  all  picturesque  and  very  dignified.  Before 
them  was  the  greatest  force  of  soldiers  they  were  ever 
to  see. 

The  General,  through  an  interpreter,  told  them  to 
say  what  they  had  to  say  in  as  few  words  as  possible. 
But  one  cannot  make  an  Indian  talk  like  a  white  man. 
They  could  not  help  saying,  "As  long  as  the  sun 
shines,"  "As  long  as  the  grass  grows,"  or  referring  to 
the  rivers,  the  mountains,  and  many  times  to  the  Great 
Spirit. 

Many  of  the  braves  spoke.  Each  wished  to  begin 
by  shaking  hands  with  the  General,  but  he  steadily 
refused,  saying  he  would  not  do  so  until  he  knew  they 


14 
< 

O 


o 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  REBELLION    211 

were  not  bad  Indians.  Poundmaker,  in  his  speech, 
declared  he  had  been  good  to  his  prisoners  and  had 
released  them,  that  he  done  his  best  to  keep  his  braves 
quiet,  and  would  never  have  fought  had  he  not  been 
first  attacked.  At  one  time  a  squaw  began  to  speak, 
and  all  the  Indians  were  astonished  when  the  General 
said  that  at  such  meetings  he  never  listened  to  women. 
They  reminded  him  that  the  Queen  was  a  woman.  He 
explained  that  she  spoke  only  through  her  councillors. 
Not  wishing  a  man  to  speak  for  her,  the  squaw  retired, 
and  what  she  had  to  say  that  day  the  white  men  never 
knew. 

The  General  made  a  long  address,  and  at  the  close 
told  the  Indians  that  he  had  received  orders  from  the 
Government  to  detain  as  prisoners  Poundmaker  and 
four  of  the  leading  chiefs.  He  then  demanded  that  the 
Indians  who  had  killed  the  white  men  at  Battleford 
should  come  forward.  The  first  to  do  so  was  Wa-wa-nitch. 
He  sat  down  with  his  legs  crossed  and,  putting  his 
hands  about  the  General's  feet,  confessed  that  he  had 
killed  Mr.  Tremont.  Another,  named  Ikta,  confessed 
that  he  too  had  shot  a  white  man.  These  two  Indians 
were  also  taken  prisoners.  Wa-na-nitch  then  made 
signs  to  Poundmaker  which  meant,  "  I  am  going  to 
be  hanged,  but  I  am  a  brave  Indian  and  I  don't  care." 

After  this  meeting  General  Middleton  moved  on  in 
pursuit  of  Big  Bear,  who  was  travelling  north.  Mean- 
while, the  force  under  General  Strange,  which  con- 
sisted of  a  brigade  formed  at  Calgary,  including 
Mounted  Police,  scouts,  and  regiments  from  Montreal 
and  Winnipeg,  had  marched  from  Calgary  to  Edmon- 
ton and  then  northward.     General  Strange  and  Major 


212     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

Steele,  by  forced  marches,  overtook  Big  Bear  at  French- 
man's Butte,  where  a  hot  skirmish  took  place.  The 
Indians  retreated  toward  the  north,  but  scouts  followed 
them  up,  and  at  last  secured  the  release  of  the  prison- 
ers. A  few  days  after,  Big  Bear  allowed  himself  to 
be  taken  by  the  Mounted  Police. 

During  the  weeks  and  months  in  which  the  prisoners 
had  been  forced  to  travel  with  Big  Bear's  band,  the 
Indians  had  done  them  no  injury.  They  were  all  safe 
and  sound,  though  very  weary.  How  grateful  they 
must  have  been  to  those  soldiers  who,  to  bring  them 
relief,  had  journeyed  for  days  over  impassable  roads 
and  through  thickets,  swamps  and  trackless  woods,  often 
lying  down  to  rest  at  night  wet  and  cold  and  hungry, 
and  rising  before  daylight  to  continue  their  dreary 
march. 

The  rebellion  was  now  over,  and  a  little  later  the 
trial  of  the  prisoners  took  place.  Riel  was  found 
guilty  of  treason  and  hanged  at  Regina  in  the  autumn. 
His  friends  buried  his  body  in  the  graveyard  of  St. 
Boniface.  Big  Bear  was  sent  to  prison  for  a  time, 
but  some  of  his  braves,  more  guilty  than  himself  in 
the  Frog  Lake  massacre,  were  hanged.  Just  nine 
years  before  Big  Bear  had  begged  that  hanging  might 
be  done  away  with.  Was  he  looking  far  into  the  future 
that  bright  day  at  Fort  Pitt,  and  did  he  see  the  fate 
of  his  own  men  when  he  said,  "  Save  me  from  what  I 
dread  most — hanging!" 

Poundmaker  was  sentenced  to  three  years'  imprison- 
ment. In  self-defence  he  made  this  touching  speech 
to  the  judge :  "  Everything  I  could  do  was  done  to 
stop  bloodshed.     Had  I  wanted  war  I  should  not  be 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  REBELLION    21 


o 


here  now;  I  should  be  on  the  prairie.  You  did  not 
catch  me.  I  gave  myself  up.  You  have  got  me  because 
I  wanted  justice." 

When,  upon  entering  the  prison,  the  chief  learned 
that  his  hair  must  be  cut,  he  was  so  deeply  grieved 
that  they  took  pity  upon  him  and  allowed  him  to  keep 
his  long  dark  locks,  without  which  he  felt  that  he  could 
never  be  a  dignified  chief  again.  Through  the  influence 
of  a  Canadian  colonel  who  understood  Poundmaker 
and  considered  he  had  not  been  fairly  treated,  he  was 
released  before  his  term  was  up. 

By  this  rebellion  the  attention  of  the  Canadian 
Government  was,  at  last,  drawn  to  the  North- West. 
As  a  result,  the  title-deeds  the  half-breeds  had  wanted 
were  granted  to  all  settlers,  and  the  North- West  Terri- 
tories were  allowed  to  send  members  to  the  Dominion 
Parliament.  For  safety,  the  number  of  Mounted 
Police  was  increased  to  one  thousand.  So  faithfully 
have  the  promises  to  the  red  men  and  the  settlers  been 
kept  that  ever  since  this  unhappy  outbreak  the  great 
North-West  has  been  a  land  of  peace. 

Many  poems  have  been  written  on  the  grief  and 
anxiety  of  the  mothers,  wives  and  daughters  of  the 
soldiers  who  fought  in  the  campaign  of  1885.  Stuart 
Livingston  gives  a  true  picture  in  the  following  stanzas 
from  his  poem,  "  The  Volunteers  of  '85" : — 

"Wide  are  the  plains  to  the  north  and  the  westward; 

Drear  are  the  skies  to  the  west  and  the  north — 
Little  they  cared  as  they  snatched  up  their  rifles, 

And  shoulder  to  shoulder  marched  gallantly  forth. 
Cold  are  the  plains  to  the  north  and  the  westward, 

Stretching  out  far  to  the  grey  of  the  sky — 


214     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

Little  they  cared  as  they  marched  from  the  barrack-room, 
Willing  and  ready,  if  need  be,  to  die. 


"  Many  a  woman  gazed  down  at  them  longingly, 

Scanning  each  rank  for  her  boy  as  it  passed; 
Striving  through  tears  just  to  catch  a  last  glimpse  of  him, 

Knowing  that  glimpse  might,  for  aye,  be  the  last. 
Many  a  maiden's  cheek  paled  as  she  looked  at  them, 

Seeing  the  lover  from  whom  she  must  part; 
Trying  to  smile  and  be  brave  for  the  sake  of  him, 

Stifling  the  dread  that  was  breaking  her  heart." 


Pauline    Johnson,    the    Indian    poet,    tells    how    an 
Indian  woman  felt  when  her  brave  took  up  arms: 

"  My  forest  brave,  my  redskin  love,  farewell, 
Here  is  your  knife — I  thought  'twas  sheathed  for  aye; 
No  roaming  bison  calls  for  it  to-day; 
No  tide  of  prairie  cattle  will  it  maim. 
The  plains  are  bare;  it  seeks  a  nobler  game, 
'Twill  drink  the  life  blood  of  a  soldier  host. 

"  Still  their  new  rule  and  council  is  well  meant, 
They  but  forget  we  Indians  owned  the  land 
From  ocean  to  ocean,  that  they  stand 
Upon  a  soil  that  centuries  agone 
Was  our  sole  kingdom,  and  our  right  alone. 
They  never  think  how  they  would  feel  to-day 
If  some  great  nation  came  from  far  away 
Wresting  their  country  from  their  hapless  braves — 
Giving  what  they  gave  us,  but  wars  and  graves." 

In  the  following  stanzas,  from  a  poem  entitled 
"  The  Rose  of  a  Nation's  Thanks,"  another  of  our 
Canadian  poets,  the  gifted  Isabella  Valancy  Crawford, 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  REBELLION    215 

voiced  the  joy  that  thrilled  all  hearts  when  the  brave 
soldier  lads  returned  to  their  homes: 

"A  welcome?    There  is  not  a  babe  at  the  breast  won't  spring 

at  the  roll  of  the  drum 
That  heralds  them  home — the  keen,  long  cry  in  the  air  of 

'They  come!     They  come!' 
And  what  of  it  all  if  ye  bade  them  wade  knee-deep  in  a 

wave  of  wine, 
And  tossed  tall  torches,  and  arched  the  town  in  garlands 

of  maple  and  pine? 
All  dust  in  the  wind  of  a  woman's  cry  as  she  snatches  from 

the  ranks 
Her  boy  who  bears  on  his  bold  young  breast  the  Rose  of  a 

Nation's  Thanks! 

"A  welcome?    There's  a  doubt  if  the  lads  would  stand  like 

stone  in  their  steady  line 
When  a  babe  held  high  on  a  dear  wife's  hand,  or  the  stars 

that  swim  and  shine 
In  a  sweetheart's  eyes,  or  a  mother's  smile,  flashed  far  in 

the  welded  crowd, 
Or  a  father's  proud  voice,  half-sob  and  half-cheer,  cried  on 

a  son  aloud. 
O  the  billows  of  waiting  hearts  that  swelled  would  sweep 

from  the  martial  ranks 
The  gallant  boys  who  bear  on  their  breasts  the  Rose  of  a 

Nation's  Thanks!" 


When  the  rebellion  was  over  the  Indians  in  their 
tepee  homes  mourned  for  the  dead  in  their  own  way. 
To  the  white  men  who  had  died  on  the  battle-field 
sincere  tribute  was  paid  throughout  Canada,  and 
handsome  monuments  were  erected  to  their  memory. 
One  particularly  sad  death  occurred  when  the  fight- 
ing was  over.     Colonel  Williams,  who  led  the  attack 


216     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

at  Batoche,  died  suddenly  from  a  fever  brought  on 
by  the  hardships  of  the  campaign.  His  body  was  sent 
home  in  a  plain  board  coffin,  but  it  had  the  noblest 
of  coverings,  for  it  was  wrapped  in  the  folds  of  the  flag 
under  which  he  had  fought. 

Shortly  before  his  illness,  when  following  Big  Bear, 
Colonel  Williams  picked  up  a  little  puppy  at  a  de- 
serted Indian  village,  and  placed  the  tiny  creature 
in  an  Indian  birchbark  basket,  intending  to  take  it 
home  to  his  little  boy.  "  Little  Bear,"  as  the  pup  was 
called,  was  cared  for  by  the  Colonel's  comrades,  and 
sent  home  to  the  son  as  a  last  gift  from  his  father. 

While  honoring  those  who,  on  the  far-away  Sas- 
katchewan, fought  for  their  country  and  their  flag, 
it  should  not  be  forgotten  that  the  greatest  heroes  are 
not  always  those  who  fight.  One  of  the  bravest  acts 
of  the  rebellion  was  the  preventing  of  a  battle.  It 
came  about  in  this  way.  Troops  had  marched  through 
the  File  Hill  reserve.  The  File  Hill  Indians  were 
frightened  at  seeing  them  so  near,  especially  as  they 
had  heard  that  Poundmaker,  who  had  always  been  a 
good  friend  to  the  white  men,  had  been  attacked. 
They  feared  that  they  might  all  be  driven  away  by 
these  new  soldiers  who  were  marching  everywhere 
through  the  country.  After  talking  it  over  among 
themselves,  the  File  Hill  chiefs  decided  to  be  ready 
in  case  they  were  attacked,  so,  taking  their  arms,  they 
moved  out  to  a  ravine  and  dug  rifle-pits. 

Thinking  these  armed  and  painted  red  men,  who  had 
left  their  reserve  and  taken  up  a  strong  position,  meant 
mischief,  some  soldiers  wanted  to  march  against  them 
at  once  and  have  the  honor  of  winning  a  great  victory. 


o 

A 

h4 
W 
> 

CO 

A 

i— i 

W 
W 
(*! 

a 


P< 


bo 

'5 

Cm 

o 

1m 


THE  SASKATCHEWAN  KEBELLION    217 

But  their  colonel  refused  to  lead  them  out.  Because 
of  this  he  was  thought  to  be  a  coward.  But  he  chose 
to  show  his  bravery  in  another  way.  He  arranged 
for  a  meeting  with  the  File  Hill  chiefs,  and  on  the 
appointed  night,  leaving  his  pistol  and  sword  behind 
him,  he  rode  out  unarmed,  and  accompanied  only  by 
an  interpreter.  Hidden  all  about  in  the  grass  were 
the  Indian  warriors,  watching  the  white  chief,  ready 
to  fire  if  the  slightest  movement  aroused  their  sus- 
picions. Without  hesitation,  the  colonel  went  among 
the  Indians  and  explained  to  them  that  no  tribes  liv- 
ing quietly  on  their  reserves  would  be  attacked,  and 
if  they  would  only  return  what  they  had  taken  and  go 
home,  they  would  never  be  disturbed.  In  this  way 
he  brought  back  their  faith  in  the  white  man  and  the 
Canadian  Government,  and  saved  loss  of  life  on  both 
sides.  Surely  this  was  a  nobler  deed  than  to  fight 
those  loyal  though  misguided  friends  of  the  British. 


CHAPTER  XX. 
A  Journey  through  the  North- West  To-day. 

A  trip  through  the  Canadian  North-West  to-day 
will  show  the  change  which  has  taken  place  in  the 
country  since  the  days  the  Indians  and  the  wild  animals 
had  that  land  to  themselves.  Now  the  people  travel 
across  the  country  by  fast  trains  instead  of  taking  the 
journey  in  the  old  slow  way  with  prairie  schooners, 
Red  River  carts,  or  pack-horses. 

The  Canadian  Pacific  Railway  was  completed  in 
1885.  At  the  little  station  of  Craigellackie,  beside  the 
Eagle  River,  the  two  parts  of  the  railway,  one  of  which 
had  been  built  from  the  east  and  the  other  from  the 
west,  were  to  be  joined  together.  On  a  November  day 
a  large  crowd  gathered  there  to  see  Donald  Smith  (now 
Lord  Strathcona)  drive  the  golden  spike.  There  he 
stood,  sledge  in  hand,  while  beside  him  were  Sandford 
Fleming  (now  Sir  Sandford  Fleming),  the  chief  sur- 
veyor, and  William  Van  Home  (now  Sir  William  Van 
Home),  the  general  manager  of  the  railway,  and 
crowding  about  them  were  the  engineers  and  workmen. 

None  had  a  better  right  to  be  there  on  that  eventful 
day  than  those  skilled  workmen.  Too  much  praise 
could  not  be  given  them  for  their  success  in  so  difficult 
an  undertaking.  The  tunnels  they  cut  through  the 
rock,  the  trestlework  bridges  they  built  over  the  deep 
ravines,  and  the  snow-sheds  they  erected  to  protect  the 

218 


THROUGH   THE  NORTH-WEST         219 

track  from  the  masses  of  snow  and  ice  that  slid  down 
the  mountain  sides,  sound  their  praises  better  than 
words  could  do. 

It  is  no  wonder,  then,  that  when  the  golden  spike 
had  been  driven  in,  and  the  echo  of  the  last  blow  had 
died  away,  William  Van  Home,  when  called  upon  for 
a  speech,  could  only  remark:  "All  I  have  got  to  say 
is  that  all  has  been  well  done  in  every  way." 

In  a  few  minutes  the  conductor  shouted,  "All  aboard 
for  the  Pacific !"  and  away  went  the  white  man's  train, 
to  the  amazement  of  the  Indians  and  the  curiosity  of 
the  mountain  sheep  far  up  on  the  mountain  side. 

The  old  days  are  gone.  You  set  out  upon  your 
journey  across  the  continent  with  no  fear  that  the  poor 
buffaloes  will  stop  your  train,  as  they  once  did  farther 
south.  Before  the  0.  P.  R.  was  completed  the  last 
herd  of  them  was  shot  down.  The  following  year  hunt- 
ers went  out  as  usual,  but  came  home  empty  handed. 
There  were  no  more  buffaloes  on  the  plains.  Great 
was  the  disappointment  of  the  Indians.  Though  they 
had  long  known  that  their  story  of  these  great  animals 
coming  from  under  a  lake  was  only  a  pretty  bit  of 
fiction,  they  still  thought  that  as  their  buffaloes  had 
been  with  them  through  the  past  they  would  be  with 
them  always. 

Before  you  reach  Manitoba  you  can  see  some  of  the 
products  of  the  country  you  are  going  to  visit.  At  Port 
William  are  the  great  grain  elevators  that  hold  the 
grain  that  comes  from  the  West;  the  grain  that  Lord 
Selkirk  dreamed  of  in  the  days,  less  than  a  hundred 
years  ago,  when  men  laughed  at  his  visions  and  said 
wheat  could  not  be  grown  at  Red  River.     What  would 


220      WHERE   THE   BUFFALO  ROAMED 

they  think  to-day  if  they  could  see  wheatfields  a  thou- 
sand miles  farther  back  ?  The  great  land  which  was 
once  the  buffaloes'  prairie  playground  is  now  called  the 
granary  of  the  world.  So  large  are  the  harvests  that 
every  summer  train-loads  of  young  men  go  from  eastern 
Canada  to  work  in  the  wheatfields  of  the  West.  When 
the  grain  is  threshed,  waggon  load  after  waggon  load 
is  taken  to  the  elevators  at  every  station.  It  is  then 
loaded  on  the  trains  and  taken  farther  east.  Much  of 
it  is  loaded  on  the  steamers  at  the  Lake  Superior  ports 
and  carried  down  the  lakes.  Some  goes  to  Chicago, 
Duluth  and  Detroit,  and  large  quantities  to  Montreal, 
where  it  is  sent  across  the  ocean  to  be  made  into  bread 
in  the  Old  Land. 

On  all  sides,  as  you  journey,  you  hear  of  the  growth 
and  prosperity  of  the  West;  but  the  old  days,  too,  are 
in  your  mind,  and  as  you  near  Winnipeg  you  cannot 
forget  the  first  white  men  who  travelled  there  and  the 
weary  days  it  took  them  to  make  their  way  in  the  bark 
canoes.  And  when  you  catch  sight  of  the  towers  and 
steeples  of  the  city  churches,  or  walk  down  the  broad 
streets,  you  think  of  Jean  Verendrye's  log  hut,  and  of 
the  little  Fort  Garry  of  the  days  of  the  Selkirk  settlers. 
But,  more  than  all,  you  remember  the  Indians  who 
moved  their  wigwams  away  to  make  room  for  the  white 
men. 

You  need  not  go  far  from  the  station  to  learn  what 
an  important  city  Winnipeg  is  now,  for  a  walk  down 
Main  Street  will  show  you  that  in  business  prosperity 
it  is  in  advance  of  many  an  older  city.  Later  you  see 
the  fine  church  which  now  stands  on  the  spot  Lord 
Selkirk  chose  for  the  colonists'  first  little  church. 


THEOUGH  THE  NORTH-WEST         221 

What  surprises  you  most  is  the  number  of  different 
languages  you  hear.  When  you  go  out  on  the  street 
in  the  morning  you  may  hear  almost  every  European 
language.  But  a  visit  to  the  immigration  office  will 
explain  this.  In  some  years  over  one  hundred  thousand 
go  through  that  office,  and  they  come  from  all  over  the 
world.  Among  them  are  English,  Scotch  and  Irish, 
Americans,  Germans  and  Poles,  Icelanders,  Finns  and 
Russians.  They  have  come  to  claim  the  one  hundred 
and  sixty  acres  of  the  buffaloes'  prairie  playground 
which  the  Government  gives  to  settlers  for  a  homestead. 

After  visiting  such  a  busy  modern  office  you  feel  like 
seeing  some  remains  of  earlier  and  more  romantic 
times.  Of  the  few  still  left,  one  of  the  most  interesting 
is  the  old  Fort  Garry  gate.  When  you  have  looked  at 
it  and  indulged  in  a  few  dreams  of  its  past,  you  cross 
the  river  to  St.  Boniface.  Here  a  new  cathedral  stands 
in  the  place  of  the  old  one  with  the  "turrets  twain," 
and  a  beautiful  chime  of  bells  now  rings  out  across  the 
river.     The  bells  that  in  the  old  days  called 

"  To  the  boatman  on  the  river, 
To  the  hunter  on  the  plain," 

are  among  them,  though  since  you  last  heard  of  them 

they  have  had  some  hard  experiences.     When  the  first 

cathedral  was  burned  they  fell  to  the  ground.     It  is 

said  that  the  pieces  were  searched  out  from  the  ashes 

and  sent  to  Rome  to  be  re-moulded.      The  boat  that 

brought  them  back  went  down  in  Hudson  Bay.     The 

chimes,  however,  were  recovered  from  the  bottom  of  the 

bay  and  taken  safely  to  St.  Boniface,  where,  with  the 

new  ones,  they  still  call  to  the  boatman ;  but  the  hunter 
15 


222     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

of  to-day  is  far  beyond  the  sound  of  their  "  vesper 
ringing." 

Besides  the  cathedral,  there  are  schools,  a  college, 
a  university,  and  a  hospital  in  St.  Boniface. 

To  visit  the  homes  of  those  who  have  not  been  long 
in  the  North-West,  you  take  the  train  again  and  travel 
far  beyond  Winnipeg.  At  one  little  shack  out  on  the 
plains  you  see  a  young  man  who  has  not  yet  been  three 
years  in  the  country.  During  his  first  year  in  the 
North- West  he  worked  for  a  farmer;  in  the  second 
he  took  up  a  homestead  of  one  hundred  and  sixty 
acres.  Though  he  had  never  farmed  before,  he  built 
a  tiny  house  and  began  to  plough  his  prairie  land. 
He  tells  you  how  long  and  how  cold  and  lonely  was  the 
first  winter  in  that  little  shack.  It  was  lonelier  than 
the  winters  of  the  fur-traders,  for  he  did  not  see  the 
Indians  coming  in  the  spring  with  furs.  But  the  first 
harvest,  the  harvest  that  was  all  his  own,  repaid  him  a 
hundred-fold  for  his  hardships  and  his  lonely  winter. 
On  his  big  farm  he  is  now  as  happy  as  a  king,  and  can 
truly  say 

"  I  am  monarch  of  all  I  survey; 

My  right  there  is  none  to  dispute." 

Do  you  wonder  that  the  men  of  the  West  love  their 
country,  and  that  others  are  always  coming  ?  The  Poles 
say  it  is  better  than  Poland,  the  Finlanders  say  it  is 
better  than  Finland,  and  the  Icelanders  that  it  is  better 
than  Iceland.  Even  those  from  good  old  England  and 
from  bonnie  Scotland  declare  that  they  have  never  been 
happier  than  in  their  new  homes  in  the  Canadian  West. 


THROUGH  THE  NORTH-WEST         223 

As  you  travel  on  you  pass  through  many  busy  towns, 
and  on  all  sides  you  hear  of  what  the  railway  has  done 
for  them.  Some  of  these  places,  you  are  told,  con- 
sisted of  but  a  few  tents  before  it  was  built.  You 
stop  at  Regina,  the  spot  which  was  once  marked  by 
only  a  pile  of  bones.  Now  it  is  a  capital,  not  of  a  terri- 
tory, but  of  a  province.  It  became  the  capital  of  a 
province  in  September,  1905,  when  out  of  the  North- 
West  Territories  were  formed  the  provinces  of  Alberta 
and  Saskatchewan.  Regina  was  made  the  capital  of 
Saskatchewan,  and  Edmonton,  which  you  will  visit 
later,  the  capital  of  Alberta.  During  your  visit  you 
are  told  that  had  you  been  in  Regina  when  the  first 
birthday  of  Saskatchewan  was  celebrated,  you  would 
have  seen  the  streets  decorated  with  flags,  bunting  and 
arches  built  of  sheaves  of  wheat  and  oats,  and  you 
would  have  seen  the  mottoes,  "  World's  Granary," 
"  Saskatchewan,"  "  North-West  Forever,"  "  God  Save 
the  King."  You  would  also  have  heard  the  people 
singing : 

"  Saskatchewan,  Saskatchewan, 
Saskatchewan  forever; 
God  save  the  West,  and  Heaven  bless 
Saskatchewan  forever." 

Then,  after  the  Lieutenant-Governor  was  sworn  in, 
the  people  of  the  new  province  were  addressed  by  Earl 
Grey,  the  Governor-General  of  the  Dominion,  who  read 
a  telegram  from  His  Majesty  the  King  congratulating 
his  subjects  in  Saskatchewan  on  that  memorable  day. 

Upon  leaving  the  busy  young  capital  you  take  the 


224     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

train  for  Edmonton,  which  you  find  so  large  a  place 
that  you  are  not  surprised  to  hear  that  on  the  31st 
of  September,  1905,  when  it  was  all  in  holiday  array 
for  the  birthday  of  the  Province  of  Alberta,  thousands 
of  men  and  women  gathered  for  the  celebration,  and 
two  thousand  school  children  marched  through  the 
streets.  But  it  must  have  seemed  like  a  dream  to  those 
who  had  stood  on  that  spot  twenty-five  years  before, 
when  the  red  men  camped  by  the  river  while  trading  at 
the  fort.  Not  long  ago  this  town  was  looked  upon  as 
the  "  jumping-ofl*  place  "  of  the  North-West.  This  was 
because  it  was  filled  with  the  new  life  of  the  white 
men  while  yet  on  the  very  verge  of  the  old  life  of  the 
Indian.  In  the  town  one  saw  elevators,  mills,  stores, 
and  fine  homes  surrounded  by  gardens,  but  one  could 
leave  those  behind  and,  by  simply  walking  north  out  of 
town,  enter  "  No  Man's  Land,"  where  one  must  travel 
by  canoe  or  dog-sleigh,  and  where,  save  for  the  Indians, 
few  but  trappers  and  missionaries  ventured.  But  now 
white  men  are  pushing  on  beyond  Edmonton.  Since 
they  have  learned  how  far  north  they  can  raise  wheat, 
one  no  longer  sees  from  the  windows  of  Edmonton  the 
wilderness  of  "  No  Man's  Land."  There  is  no  "  jump- 
ing-off  place  "  now. 

As  you  near  the  Rockies,  after  leaving  Edmonton, 
the  wheat-belt  is  left  behind  and  herds  of  horses  and 
cattle  are  seen  roaming  over  the  land,  living  the  free 
life  that  the  buffaloes  delighted  in  a  few  years  before. 
The  snow  that  falls  there  is  soon  thawed  by  the  warm 
Chinook  winds,  and  horses  and  cattle  can  run  wild 
winter  and  summer.  These  warm  winds  take  their 
name  because  thev  blow  from  the  home  of  the  Chinook 


A   RED   RIVER   CART. 

This  quaint  turn-out  formed  part  of  the  procession  at  the  celebration,  at 

Edmonton,  September  ist,  1905,  of  the  inauguration  of  Alberta 

as  a  Province  of  the  Dominion. 


_■& ~  ,*si 


TROOPERS   OF  THE   R.  N.-W.  MOUNTED   POEICE. 


THROUGH  THE  NORTH-WEST         225 

Indians,  on  a  branch  of  the  lower  Columbia  River.  For 
the  horses  and  cattle  in  that  land  of  the  Chinook  winds 
the  freedom  does  not  last  a  lifetime,  however,  as  it  did 
with  the  buffaloes  before  them.  All  too  soon  a  day 
comes  when  they  are  "  rounded  up  "  for  the  last  time. 
Then  for  them  life  in  the  beautiful  wilds  of  Alberta 
is  over.  The  cattle,  like  the  wheat,  are  shipped  away 
to  feed  the  world.  The  horses  are  put  to  work,  some 
in  other  lands,  and  never  again  do  they  see  the  Alberta 
ranches  where  all  through  their  colt  days  they  raced 
and  jumped  and  kicked  up  their  heels  to  their  hearts' 
content. 

One  difference  between  the  ranching  lands  and  the 
wheat-belt  is  that  in  the  wheat  districts  the  cattle  are 
fenced  in  and  wheat  grows  on  the  prairie  with  no  fences 
about  it,  while  in  the  ranching  lands  the  wheat  is  fenced 
in,  and  cattle  are  free  to  roam  everywhere  else,  There 
are  no  fences  to  separate  the  cattle  of  the  different 
ranches.  They  stray  off  and  run  together  on  the  wide 
plains,  but  each  animal  is  supposed  to  be  branded  with 
the  mark  of  the  ranch  to  which  it  belongs.  It  is  con- 
sidered the  greatest  sin  for  a  man  to  put  his  brand 
on  an  animal  which  does  not  belong  to  him. 

Do  you  wonder  that  the  cowboy's  life  is  a  busy  one, 
and  that  the  "  round-up  "  is  not  all  fun,  when  the  cattle 
must  be  gathered  together,  sorted  out  from  among  the 
others,  and  the  calves  branded  ?  Usually  the  cowboys 
each  take  several  horses  with  them  when  they  start  out 
to  find  the  cattle  and  have  the  spring  "  round  up,"  for 
they  have  no  idea  how  far  they  must  ride  or  what  may 
happen  before  it  is  finished.  First  they  get  the  stray- 
ing herds  into  a  bunch.     Then  they  ride  round  the 


226     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

bunch  and  run  out  the  cattle  that  belong  to  other  herds. 
You  may  be  sure  that  all  the  skill  of  pony  and  cowboy 
is  needed  for  this  work.  Next  they  push  in  among  the 
cattle  on  their  well-trained  ponies,  and  by  the  cleverest 
riding  pick  out  the  cows  and  calves,  get  them  outside 
the  "  round  up,"  and  quietly  drive  them  to  a  branding 
corral.  The  cowboy  then  throws  a  rope.  The  pony 
stands  firm.  A  calf  is  caught  by  the  hind  leg,  and 
someone  who  has  been  waiting  for  that  moment  has 
branded  it  before  it  realizes  what  is  happening. 

If  you  watch  a  "  round  up "  you  will  notice  how 
quietly  the  cowboys  do  everything.  You  will  not  be 
allowed  to  go  with  them  unless  you  are  quiet,  too. 
They  know  that  if  the  cattle  should  be  startled  by  a 
noise  there  might  be  a  stampede,  and  that  is  what  they 
dread  more  than  anything  else.  Sometimes,  just  before 
a  storm,  the  cattle  become  restless,  and  the  cowboys 
sing  to  soothe  them,  but  in  spite  of  all  they  can  do  a 
stampede  will  sometimes  occur.  When  once  the  fright- 
ened cattle  start  and  are  thundering  over  the  plains, 
the  cowboy  gallops  beside  the  leaders,  and  tries  to  press 
them  in  so  as  to  gradually  turn  them,  and  get  them 
running  in  a  circle.  Should  he  succeed,  the  cattle  will 
slacken  their  pace  and  finally  stop ;  but  if  by  any  chance 
he  gets  ahead  of  the  herd  while  they  are  running,  he 
and  his  pony  are  in  terrible  danger  of  being  trampled 
to  death. 

The  following  stanzas  are  taken  from  a  cowboy's 
description  of  a  night  stampede,  written  by  Isabella 
Valancy  Crawford: 


THROUGH  THE  NORTH-WEST         227 

"  Drowsily  list'nm"  I  rode  round  the  herd, 

When  all  uv  a  sudden  the  mustang  baulked, 

An'  shied  with  a  snort.    I  never  knowed 
Thet  tough  leetle  critter  tew  show  a  scare 

In  storm  or  dark;  but  he  jest  scrouched  down, 
With  his  nostrils  snuffin'  the  damp,  cool  air. 

"  But  thar  wa'nt  a  stir  tew  horn  or  hoof; 

The  herd,  like  a  great  black  mist,  lay  spread, 
While  here  an'  thar  a  grazin'  bull 

Loomed  up  like  a  mighty  '  thunder  head.' 


"  But  'twa'n't  no  coyote  nor  prowlin'  beast, 

Nor  rattle  a-wrigglin  thru  the  grass, 
Nor  a  lurkin'  redskin — twa'nt  my  way 

In  a  game  like  thet  tew  sing  out,  '  I  pass!' 
But  I  knowed  when  I  glimpsed  the  rollin'  whites, 

The  sparks  frum  the  black  uv  the  mustang's  eye, 
Thar  wus  sumthin'  waltzin'  up  thet  way 

That  would  send  them  critters  off  on  the  fly. 

•  ••••••as* 

"The  air  wus  bustin' — but  silent  as  death; 
An'  lookin'  up,  in  a  second  I  see'd 
The  sort  uv  sky  thet  alius  looks  down 

On  the  rush  an'  the  roar  uv  a  night  stampede. 

Then  the  herd  start: 

"  The  herd  wus  up, — not  one  at  a  time, 

Thet  ain't  the  style  in  a  midnight  run — 
They  wus  up  an'  off  like  es  all  thair  minds 
Wus  rolled  in  the  hide  uv  only  one. 

In  vain  he  tries  to  turn  them: 

"  An'  struck  his  side  with  my  fist  an'  foot, 
'Twus  jest  like  hiUin'  a  rushin'  stone, 
An'  he  thundered  ahead — I  couldn't  boss 
The  critter  a  mossel,  I'm  free  tew  own." 


228     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

At  last  he  succeeds: 

"  He  gev  a  snort,  an'  I  see  him  swerve — 

I  follered  his  shoulder  clus  an'  tight; 
Another  swerve,  an'  the  herd  begun 

Tew  swing  around.     Shouts  I,    '  All  right! 
Ye've  fetched  'em  now!'" 

As  you  pass  through  the  ranching  country  you  can- 
not help  thinking  of  the  pictures  you  have  seen  of  great 
herds  of  buffaloes.  Just  how  the  buffaloes  disappeared 
you  know,  but  you  would  like  to  learn  how  the  cattle 
came  to  take  their  places.  While  resting  at  the  town 
of  Macleod,  you  ask  an  old  man  if  he  can  tell  you  the 
story  of  the  first  little  calves  that  spent  the  winter  out- 
of-doors  at  the  foot-hills. 

He  declares  he  knows  all  about  it,  and  so  vou  hear 
this  story: 

"  Before  the  days  of  the  rancher  the  Mounted  Police 
pushed  their  way  out  through  southern  Alberta  to  keep 
order  among  the  red  men.  Their  first  stopping-place 
was  called  Fort  Macleod,  and  was  the  beginning  of 
the  town  you  are  now  resting  in.  When  the  Mounted 
Police  went  there  first,  the  only  cattle  in  that  country 
were  a  few  oxen  and  cows  which  they  had  taken  along 
for  their  own  use.  About  that  time  (1876)  a  man 
crossed  the  border  from  the  United  States,  driving 
twenty-five  head  of  cattle,  some  of  them  only  calves. 
He  took  them  to  Fort  Macleod  and  sold  them  there. 
Now,  the  new  owner  was  busy  looking  after  the  Indians, 
and  had  no  time  to  think  of  his  small  herd  of  cattle, 
so  they  were  left  to  stray  off  wherever  they  chose. 
When  spring  came  he  had  more  time,  and  went  to 
gather   them   in.     He    expected   most  of   them   would 


THROUGH   THE  NORTH-WEST         229 

have  died  from  cold  or  been  killed  by  the  bears,  but 
this  was  not  the  case.  Twenty-five  cattle  had  been 
turned  loose,  and  twenty-five  cattle  came  in  safe  and 
well.  This  is  said  to  be  the  first  '  round  up  '  in  the 
North-West.  After  that,  the  news  that  cattle  could 
live  out-of-doors  all  winter  in  Alberta  spread  through 
the  East,  and  soon  ranching  was  booming  in  Alberta." 

Years  before  this,  horses  ran  wild  on  the  plains  and 
lived  out  all  winter.  If  those  horses  could  talk  and 
give  us  their  life  history,  what  a  story  it  would  be ! 
They  would  tell  how  they  were  brought  to  America 
by  the  Spaniards,  who  long  ago  settled  far  to  the  south 
of  Canada ;  how  some  broke  away  or  were  deserted  by 
their  masters,  and  then  wandered  north.  It  was  a  wild, 
free  life,  and  how  happy  they  must  have  been.  But 
in  time  the  Indians  found  them.  Now,  the  Indians 
knew  how  to  make  use  of  horses.  They  had  seen 
Spaniards  riding  and  driving  them,  so  they  captured 
these  horses  and  broke  them  in  for  use. 

By  the  time  the  white  man  reached  the  Canadian 
West  the  horses  in  that  country  were  not  so  large  and 
sleek  as  their  ancestors,  the  Spanish  beauties,  that  had 
crossed  the  ocean.  Through  scarcity  of  food,  hard  usage 
and  cold  winters,  they  had  become  small  and  shaggy, 
so  they  were  called  Indian  ponies,  or  mustangs.  They 
are  now  better  known  as  bronchos.  Their  wild  life  had 
made  them  strong  and  hardy,  and  they  have  always 
been  valuable  helpers  in  the  work  of  the  West.  The 
Mounted  Policeman's  "  Little  Bummer,"  mentioned  in 
a  previous  chapter,  was  one  of  these  ponies. 

In  the  year  1900  these  sturdy  North- West  ponies, 
or  bronchos,  and  their  clever  riders  were  made  famous 


230     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

i; 

the  world  over.  The  year  before  this,  war  had  broken 
out  between  Great  Britain  and  the  Boer  Republics  of 
South  Africa.  Early  in  the  year  (1900)  Lord  Strath- 
cona  equipped  a  cavalry  regiment  recruited  from 
British  Columbia,  the  North- West  and  Manitoba,  and 
known  as  the  "  Strathcona  Horse."  The  trusty  horses 
were  well  trained,  and  the  men  chosen  were  skilled  in 
riding  and  shooting.  It  was  from  the  little  station  of 
Macleod  that  many  started  on  that  eventful  journey. 
The  rough  life  of  the  West,  and  the  dangers  in  round- 
ing up  cattle  and  checking  stampedes,  had  well  fitted 
them  for  the  war.  The  help  which  both  riders  and 
ponies  gave  in  South  Africa  brought  their  native  land 
before  the  notice  of  the  whole  world,  and  the  Mother- 
land learned  to  value,  as  never  before,  the  country  that 
once  had  been  "  No  Man's  Land." 

It  was  with  sorrow  as  well  as  joy  that  they  were 
welcomed  home.  At  that  time  all  the  British  Empire 
was  in  mourning  for  the  soldiers  who  had  died  in  South 
Africa  and  for  Queen  Victoria,  who  passed  away  before 
the  war  was  over.  For  over  sixty  years  the  good  Queen 
had  watched  over  the  country,  beloved  by  red  men  and 
white  men  alike.  None  mourned  her  death  more  deeply 
than  did  her  children  of  the  West.  An  Indian  chief 
expressed  the  feelings  of  all  when,  in  speaking  to  his 
people,  he  said :  "  Our  Great  Mother  is  dead,  and  our 
hearts  are  broken.  But  it  pleased  her  to  know  that 
when  she  could  no  longer  be  our  mother  her  son  would 
take  her  place.  This  comforts  us.  He  will  be  our 
father,  and  it  is  well.  But  still  we  grieve  always  for 
our  Great  Mother." 

Now  you  start  west  again.     After  passing  Calgary, 


THROUGH  THE  NORTH-WEST         231 

an  important  city  in  Alberta,  you  come  to  Banff, 
picturesquely  situated,  where  the  famous  springs  are. 
Here  you  will  have  time  for  a  short  rest  and  after- 
wards a  visit  to  the  buffalo  corral  to  see  another 
remnant  of  the  once  great  herds.  After  leaving  Banff 
the  train  climbs  slowly  up  the  mountains,  while  on  each 
side  you  see  a  fairyland  of  fleecy  clouds  and  snowy 
mountain  peaks.  Nothing  could  be  more  beautiful  than 
sunset  among  the  mountains,  when  their  snowy  caps 
are  aglow  with  crimson,  purple  and  gold. 

At  last  you  reach  the  "  Great  Divide,"  where  you  see 
a  little  brook  become  two  tiny  streams,  one  flowing  east 
and  the  other  west,  You  have  all  read  the  story  of  a 
drop  of  water,  and  will  remember  that  it  tells  you  that 
"what  all  the  waterdrops  are  struggling  for  is  to  get 
back  to  the  sea,  for  the  sea  is  the  heaven  of  the  water- 
drops."  These  drops  in  the  streamlets  are  starting 
from  that  height  of  land  on  the  long  journey  to  the  sea. 
The  drops  in  the  stream  that  flow  east  are  making  their 
way  to  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  and  those  in  the  stream  that 
flow  west  will  find  their  heaven  in  the  Pacific. 

Beyond  the  "  Great  Divide  "  you  come  to  the  Kick- 
ing Horse  Pass,  which  through  an  accident  became  the 
highway  of  the  West.  It  happened  that  when  an  ex- 
ploring party  were  in  the  mountains,  searching  for  a 
place  where  a  track  could  be  built,  a  pack-horse,  tired 
of  its  heavy  load  and  the  hard  climbing,  gave  the  leader 
of  the  party  a  terrific  blow  with  his  heels.  Thinking 
him  dead,  the  men  had  a  grave  dug  in  a  narrow  canyon. 
But  as  the  man  was  being  carried  to  the  grave  he  became 
conscious.  Gradually  he  recovered.  When  better,  he 
went  to  see  the  spot  where  he  was  to  have  been  buried, 


232     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

and  found  that  the  canyon  in  which  the  grave  had  been 
dug  was  a  defile  in  the  mountains,  so  narrow  in  places 
that  a  stone  could  be  thrown  across.  Following  this  pass 
was  like  going  through  a  gate  in  a  high  wall,  but  there 
was  room  in  the  gateway  for  a  track  to  be  laid,  and  it 
was  the  route  afterwards  chosen  for  the  railway.  The 
tired  horse  whose  kick  led  to  the  discovery  of  the  pass 
was  honored  at  last,  for  Kicking  Horse  is  the  name 
by  which  the  pass  in  the  mountains  has  been  known 
ever  since. 

But  it  would  be  a  great  mistake  to  give  this  name 
to  the  pack-horses.  They  are  not  all  kicking  horses. 
Indeed,  they  are  the  most  faithful  helpers  man 
could  have.  Without  their  aid  the  great  West 
could  never  have  been  explored  and  settled  as  it  has 
been.  In  one  thing  the  new  country  has  failed.  Horses 
have  never  been  given  the  credit  due  to  them  for  their 
services,  nor  are  they  always  cared  for  as  they  should 
be.  It  is  only  fair  to  the  horses,  that  when  you  hear 
the  name  Kicking  Horse  Pass  you  should  think  of  the 
heavy  packs  and  the  hard  climbing  that  so  exasperated 
one  horse  as  to  lead  him  to  use  his  heels  in  protest. 
You  should  hope  with  all  your  heart  that  while  monu- 
ments are  being  erected  in  honor  of  human  heroes, 
someone  will  build,  to  the  memory  of  the  horses  that 
have  toiled  and  died  for  the  Canadian  West,  a  drink- 
ing fountain  on  some  hot  dusty  road  where  to-day 
thirsty  horses  pass  with  heavy  loads. 

Soon  Kicking  Horse  Pass  is  far  behind.  For  a  time 
you  follow  the  banks  of  the  Thompson  River,  and  then 
the  course  of  the  Fraser,  with  its  treacherous  rocks  and 
rapids.     As  you  glide  along  in  the  train,  you  think  of 


THROUGH  THE  NORTH-WEST         233 

the  days  when  Simon  Fraser,  with  his  bark  canoe,  fol- 
lowed that  river  to  the  sea,  and  even  across  the  whirl- 
pool, of  which  a  recent  writer  says :  "  The  rocks  close 
in,  but  the  Fraser  River,  grim  and  white,  goes  through, 
swearing  horribly."  But  the  river  does  not  ."  swear  " 
all  the  way  to  the  Pacific.  Near  the  end  of  its  course 
it  grows  wide  and  calm.  Peace  settles  over  the  land- 
scape before  you  breathe  the  salt  sea  air  and  catch  a 
glimpse  of  the  smoke  of  Vancouver. 

It  is  here  that  you  see  the  great  dream  of  the  early 
explorers  come  true.  In  the  harbor  is  a  ship  just  in 
from  China.  Men  now  have  a  passage  to  the  Western 
Sea,  but  by  land  instead  of  water,  and  goods  can  be  sent 
across  the  continent  and  on  to  India  and  China.  Van- 
couver is  famous  as  the  connecting  link.  How  you 
wish  Radisson,  Verendrye  and  poor  Henry  Hudson 
could  see  the  famous  railway,  the  ocean  port,  and  that 
great  ship. 

The  number  of  saw-mills  you  see  near  Vancouver 
tells  you  that  the  wild  animals  no  longer  have  all  the 
dense  woods  for  their  hiding  places.  Every  year  they 
are  moving  farther  back  from  the  white  man  and  his 
axe.  If  you  go  up  the  river  and  visit  one  of  the  lum- 
bering camps  where  some  of  the  logs  come  from,  you 
will  see  how  beautiful  it  is  in  the  forest  among  the  great 
trees  which  have  been  growing  there  for  hundreds  and 
hundreds  of  years.  Many  of  the  trees  have  trunks,  nine, 
ten,  and  even  twelve  feet  thick,  and  tower  two  and  three 
hundred  feet  in  the  air.  You  wonder  how  men,  who 
look  so  tiny  beside  the  great  trees,  can  ever  cut  them 
down.  But  you  will  soon  see  how  they  do  it,  for  two  men 
are  beginning  to  chop  down  a  big  tree.    First  they  make 


234     WHERE  THE  BUFFALO  EOAMED 

cuts  on  opposite  sides  of  the  tree,  and  each  inserts  a 
plank  to  stand  upon.  Then  they  begin  to  swing  their 
axes.  First  one  makes  a  stroke  and  then  the  other,  and 
far  through  the  forest  the  echoes  carry  the  sound  of 
their  blows.  When  the  woodmen  have  made  a  large 
enough  notch  in  the  trunk,  they  rest  for  a  few  minutes, 
then  take  their  cross-cut  saws  and  saw  through  from 
one  side  to  within  a  few  inches  of  the  great  notch  they 
made  on  the  other.  The  last  thing,  if  the  tree  is  a  very 
large  one,  is  to  drive  a  wedge  into  the  cut  made  by  the 
saw.  Slowly  the  great  trunk  sways  a  moment  or  two, 
then  falls  with  a  crash  that  echoes  through  the  dark 
woods  till  all  the  trees  in  the  wood,  if  they  could  hear, 
would  know  that  one  of  their  comrades,  which  had 
grown  there  for  hundreds  and  hundreds  of  years,  was 
lying  on  the  ground  and  dead  to  the  forest.  As  you 
watch  it  all,  you  wonder  how  many  old  bears  are  back 
in  the  shade,  peering  among  the  tree  trunks  looking  for 
a  safe  place  to  take  their  cubs  down  to  the  river  to  fish, 
and  you  think  of  the  baby  moose  and  deer  that  are 
taught  to  run  for  their  lives  when  they  hear  the  axe  of 
the  woodmen  or  the  gun  of  the  hunter. 

In  many  places  the  logs  are  carried  down  to  the 
streams  by  stout  little  engines  that  run  up  and  down 
the  hillsides.  The  streams  help  the  lumbermen  by 
floating  the  logs  down  to  the  rivers.  At  times  so  many  go 
down  that  when  the  water  lowers  in  the  summer  some 
are  left  high  and  dry  on  the  banks ;  but  the  lumbermen 
know  that  with  the  floods  of  the  following  spring  they 
will  be  carried  down  to  the  large  river.  Where  the 
streams  and  smaller  rivers  empty  into  the  large  river 
the  logs   are  caught  by  a  boom  chained   across  from 


THKOUGH  THE  NOKTH-WEST         235 

shore  to  shore.  Erom  here  they  are  taken  in  rafts  to 
the  mills  farther  down  the  river. 

Instead  of  the  picturesque  wigwams  which  Mackenzie 
saw  along  the  rivers,  and  the  basket-work  traps  the 
Indians  used  for  catching  the  fish,  one  sees  in  many 
places  the  big  canning  factories.  The  fish  which  go 
into  these  factories  come  out  in  bright-colored  tins  all 
ready  for  the  shop  windows.  Besides  the  tinned 
salmon,  whole  fish  which  have  been  frozen  and  packed 
in  refrigerator  cars  now  go  to  different  parts  of  the 
world.  The  fish  of  British  Columbia  are  as  noted  as 
her  forests.  In  no  other  country  are  the  rivers  so  full 
of  them. 

Mining  has  been  carried  on  ever  since  the  days  of 
'58,  but  the  difficulties  of  carrying  across  the  moun- 
tains the  provisions  and  machinery  needed  in  working 
the  mines  prevented  for  years  successful  mining  at  any 
great  distance  back.  But  now  that  branches  of  the 
railway  are  stretching  up  into  the  different  river  valleys, 
rich  mining  districts  are  being  opened  up.  In  the  heart 
of  the  Kootenay  district  you  hear  so  much  about  gold 
nuggets  and  gold-dust  that  you  know  there  can  be  no 
doubt  of  the  great  wealth  of  the  British  Columbia 
mines. 

The  precious  minerals  are  not  all  in  the  Kootenay 
district.  Farther  north  many  valuable  mines  are  being 
worked,  and  when  you  cross  over  to  Vancouver  Island 
you  will  see  the  change  which  has  taken  place  there 
since  the  early  days.  Nanaimo  is  a  busy  city  which 
the  coal  mines  have  made  rich  and  prosperous,  and 
many  other  valuable  mines  have  been  discovered.  Where 
James  Douglas  built  the  little  Hudson's  Bay  fort  of 


236     WHERE   THE  BUFFALO  KOAMED 

Victoria  there  now  stands  the  city  of  Victoria,  one  of 
the  most  beautiful  in  Canada. 

Now,  before  your  journey  is  over,  you  must  visit 
Dawson,  the  young  city  in  the  far  north,  situated  where 
the  Klondike  river  flows  into  the  great  Yukon.  To 
reach  there  you  must  take  a  boat  for  Skagway  and  sail 
north  along  a  part  of  the  coast  which  Cook  passed  when 
he  was  trying  to  find  a  north-east  passage.  At  Skag- 
way you  take  the  train  to  White  Horse,  and  as  you  go 
winding  along  you  catch  a  glimpse  of  the  Dead  Horse 
trail,  which  men  followed  to  the  gold-fields  before  the 
days  of  the  railway.  The  poor  horses  had  a  wretched 
time,  and  so  many  died  along  the  trail  that  it  was  called 
the  Dead  Horse  Trail.  From  White  Horse  you  sail 
down  the  Yukon  River  to  Dawson. 

Though  tired  from  your  journey,  you  may  find  it 
hard  to  sleep  there  the  first  night,  for  you  are  not  used 
to  bright  sunshine  when  bedtime  comes.  But  the  people 
of  Dawson  and  the  miners  are  glad  indeed  to  have  the 
long  summer  days  after  their  dark  winter,  when  the 
sun  sets  before  school  is  out.  Before  Dawson  had  elec- 
tric lights,  the  children  who  attended  school  in  the 
winter  needed  lanterns  to  light  them  home.  When  walk- 
ing about  Dawson  next  morning  you  can  scarcely  believe 
that  the  streets  of  the  town  were  once  a  muskeg — that 
is,  soft,  springy  black  earth — and  that  if  you  had  tried 
to  cross  that  spot  in  the  summer  you  would  probably 
have  lost  your  shoes  and  been  almost  eaten  alive  by  the 
mosquitos.  The  place  has  been  drained  since  those  days, 
and  now  the  mosquitos  are  not  so  numerous  and  the 
streets  will  not  pull  off  your  boots. 

There  was  no  Dawson  when,  in  1896,  gold  was  dis- 
covered along  the  river  banks  in  the  lonely  Klondike 


THROUGH  THE  NORTH-WEST  237 

district.  But  the  world  soon  heard  the  news,  and 
thousands  started  for  the  north.  They  went  as  far  as 
they  could  by  boat,  and  struggled  along  the  rest  of  the 
way,  some  with  pack-horses  and  some  without  them. 
It  was  then  that  Dawson  sprang  up.  Like  New  West- 
minster, in  the  early  days  of  British  Columbia,  Dawson 
at  first  consisted  of  huts  and  canvas  tents,  where  tired 
people  built  little  fires  to  cook  their  meals — that  is,  if 
they  were  fortunate  enough  to  have  any  food  to  cook. 
Those  who  had  no  frying-pans  put  their  bacon  on  the 
end  of  a  stick  and  held  it  over  the  fire,  just  as  they 
have  done  in  other  mining  towns.  But,  unlike  New 
Westminster,  hungry  dogs  howled  about  the  tents  and 
huts  of  this  far  northern  town.  Everyone  had  his 
dogs,  for  they  are  the  beasts  of  burden  there  in  the 
winter  when  the  snow  is  deep.  They  haul  the  wood, 
carry  the  mail,  the  food,  and  even  the  gold-dust.  Now 
the  huts  and  tents  of  Dawson  have  changed  to  houses, 
and  instead  of  the  flickering  lights  of  the  camp-fires 
you  see  the  clear  electric  lights  of  the  Dawson  of  to-day. 
Though  the  Klondike  is  rich  in  gold,  all  do  not  find 
the  precious  metal,  and  even  the  most  successful  must 
always  endure  great  hardships.  Robert  W.  Service,  in 
his  "  Songs  of  a  Sourdough,"  describes  the  struggles 
of  the  Klondike  miner: 

"  I  wanted  the  gold,  and  I  sought  it; 

I  scrabbled  and  mucked  like  a  slave. 
Was  it  famine  or  scurvy — I  fought  it; 

I  hurled  my  youth  into  a  grave. 
I  wanted  the  gold,  and  I  got  it — 

Came  out  with  a  fortune  last  fall — 
Yet  somehow  life's  not  what  I  thought  it, 

And  somehow  the  gold  isn't  all." 


238      WHERE   THE   BUFFALO  ROAMED 

Sad  stories  are  told  of  miners  who  failed  to  find  the 
precious  gold-dust,  and  who  lost  all  they  possessed  in 
the  useless  search,  ending  their  lives  in  misery.  But 
no  tale  of  a  journey  which  failed,  even  though 

"  Sometimes  it  leads  to  an  Arctic  trail,  and  the  snows  where 
your  torn  feet  freeze, 
And  you  whittle  away  the  useless  clay,  and  crawl  on  your 
hands  and  knees," 

will  discourage  those  who  follow,  for  the  true  miner 
will  always  say,  with  our  Yukon  poet: 

"There's  gold,  and  it's  haunting  and  haunting; 

It's  luring  me  on  as  of  old; 
Yet  it  isn't  the  gold  that  I'm  wanting, 

So  much  as  just  finding  the  gold. 
It's  the  great,  big,  broad  land  'way  up  yonder, 

It's  the  forests  where  silence  has  lease; 
It's  the  beauty  that  thrills  me  with  wonder, 

It's  the  stillness  that  fills  me  with  peace." 

But  many  there  are  who  care  nothing  for  the  beauty 
of  the  "big,  broad  land."  In  a  country  so  far  away, 
where  men  both  good  and  bad  have  gathered,  and  where 
some  carry  their  stores  of  gold-dust  along  lonely  trails, 
one  might  expect  to  find  thieves  and  murderers.  But 
the  Klondike  is  a  law-abiding  district,  and  there  is  no 
more  crime  in  Dawson  than  in  any  other  Canadian 
city.  You  know  the  reason.  The  Union  Jack  floats 
over  the  country,  and  His  Majesty's  Mounted  Police 
keep  guard. 

While  you  admire  the  young  city  of  the  north,  you 
also  sympathize  with  the  wild  animals  that  all  these 


THROUGH   THE   NORTH-WEST         239 

years  have  been  moving  back  for  the  white  man,  and 
then,  when  at  last  they  are  almost  within  the  Arctic 
circle,  the  white  man  came  even  there  to  build  a  city 
and  sell  his  guns  and  traps.  But,  even  since  Dawson 
was  built,  the  far  north  is  the  safest  place  for  the 
animals.  With  the  exception  of  the  Klondike,  little 
sign  of  the  white  man  is  seen  there  outside  of  the  Hud- 
son's Bay  Company  posts  and  the  missions.  Perhaps 
the  animals  are  growing  used  to  the  climate  and  wear- 
ing thicker  coats  than  in  the  days  when  it  was  safe  to 
make  their  homes  in  warmer  parts  of  the  great  West. 

When  sailing  along  the  coast  on  your  return  from 
the  north,  you  come  near  to  the  old  site  of  what  was 
once  the  mission  village  of  Metlahkatlah.  You  are  told 
that  a  new  city  is  being  built  there,  and  that  it  is  to 
be  the  terminus  of  another  railway  across  the  continent. 
This  railway,  the  Grand  Trunk  Pacific,  passes  through 
Edmonton  and  crosses  the  mountains  at  the  Yellow 
Head  Pass.  The  terminus  on  the  Pacific  is  called 
Prince  Rupert,  after  the  first  governor  of  the  Hud- 
son's Bay  Company. 

How  different  it  is  now  on  the  coast  from  the  days 
of  Mackenzie  and  Cook  and  Vancouver,  and  how  you 
miss  the  walrus  and  the  pretty  sea-otter.  During  your 
travels  you  have  seen  but  little  of  any  wild  animals. 
The  poor  things  must  be  very  wild  now,  and  those  that 
have  not  gone  to  the  north  remain  in  hiding  far  from 
the  settled  parts.  You  know  they  have  good  reason  for 
their  timidity  wben  you  see  the  number  of  moose  heads 
used  to  decorate  the  halls  of  the  white  man's  houses. 
These   are  trophies  that   arouse  the   ambition  of  the 


240     WHEBE  THE  BUFFALO  ROAMED 

huntsman  and  send  him  off  after  more  of  these  poor 
creatures ;  though,  unlike  the  Indian,  he  has  no  need  to 
hunt  them  for  his  food.  You  can  only  hope  that  as  the 
huntsmen  become  more  numerous,  the  wild  animals  will 
grow  keener  of  sight  and  scent  and  hearing. 

You  have  not  seen  beaver  dams  nor  beaver  lodges 
in  your  journey.  This  is  because  the  poor  beavers  are 
having  a  hard  time  nowadays.  Unless  they  are  far 
beyond  the  civilized  parts  of  the  country,  they  scarcely 
dare  to  dam  a  stream  or  build  a  house,  but  hide  in 
miserable  holes  in  the  river  bank.  Experience  has 
taught  them  that  the  aristocratic  beaver,  who  will  have 
his  moss-carpeted  house  in  spite  of  circumstances,  is 
not  likely  to  be  left  in  possession  long.  But  the  white 
man  still  talks  of  the  marvelous  work  the  beavers  do 
with  their  sharp  teeth  and  trowel-like  tails,  and  he  holds 
them  up  as  an  example  of  industry  to  all  small  boys. 
The  question  is,  will  he  be  fair  enough  to  these  same 
beavers  to  see  that  they  always  will  have  some  spot 
where  they  can  live  without  fear  of  guns  or  traps,  and 
will  he  ever  cause  these  wonderful  little  animals  to  dis- 
appear as  he  did  the  beautiful  sea-otters  ?  There  is  this 
on  the  beaver's  side,  they  had  their  homes  in  the  Cana- 
dian West  long  before  the  white  man  ever  heard  of  such 
a  land.  They  were  the  pioneer  builders  of  the  country, 
an  honor  which  does  not  fall  to  the  white  man.  Surely 
they  have  earned  the  right  to  protection. 

With  the  exception  of  stories  told  at  the  Hudson's 
Bay  Company  trading-posts,  which  have  moved  farther 
north  with  the  animals,  you  have  heard  throughout 
your  journey  but  little  of  the  Indians  and  the  wild 
creatures  that  once  had  the  land  to  themselves.     But 


THROUGH  THE  NORTH-WEST         241 

you  have  heard  the  most  glowing  accounts  of  the  riches 
and  value  of  the  West.  The  white  man  has  told  you 
of  millions  and  millions  of  bushels  of  wheat — wheat 
which  is  better  than  any  that  can  be  raised  in  other 
parts  of  the  world.  He  has  told  you  of  thousands  and 
thousands  of  cattle,  and  millions  and  millions  of  dollars' 
worth  of  gold  and  silver  and  coal.  Then  you  have 
heard  how  many  more  acres  of  land  are  tilled  this  year 
than  last,  how  much  more  wheat  is  raised,  and  how 
much  more  timber  is  being  exported.  The  people  have 
quoted  figures  until  no  one  who  hears  could  have  the 
slightest  doubt  of  the  progress  of  the  West.  You  could 
not  begin  to  remember  it  all.  It  made  you  tired  and 
dizzy  to  listen,  so  for  a  little  rest  before  you  start  for 
home  you  go  to  visit  an  Indian  reserve. 

There  are  fewer  Indians  now  than  there  were 
when  the  reserves  were  first  formed.  Those  that  are 
left  do  not  look  as  their  ancestors  used  to  look.  They 
are  as  different  from  the  red  men  you  read  of  before  as 
the  buffaloes  in  the  corrals  are  from  the  buffaloes  of 
those  days.  Perhaps  it  is  because  they  are  wearing 
white  man's  clothes,  for  the  clothes  of  the  white  man  are 
not  nearly  as  picturesque  as  the  blankets  and  feathers 
and  pretty  furs  which  the  Indians  wore  in  "  No  Man's 
Land."  But,  in  spite  of  the  clothes,  they  are  still 
Indians,  and  they  give  you  an  Indian  welcome.  After 
you  have  shaken  hands  with  them  all,  you  have  a  chat 
with  the  old  chief.  He,  too,  talks  about  the  country; 
but  his  talk  does  not  make  you  dizzy.  He  does  not 
tell  you  of  bushels  of  wheat  and  bags  of  gold-dust,  but 
he  speaks  of  the  good  old  days  and  the  buffalo  hunts 


242     WHEKE   THE   BUFFALO   ROAMED 

of  the  past.  When,  at  last,  you  mention  the  change 
which  has  taken  place  in  the  West,  he  says:' 

"  Yes,  white  man  has  the  country  now.  It  was  a 
great  country  when  the  Indians  had  it.  If  the  white 
man  is  good  it  will  always  be  a  great  country." 

The  old  chief  has  voiced  one  of  the  finest  of  hopes. 
All  the  fish  and  lumber  and  wheat  and  gold  and  silver 
in  the  world  cannot  alone  bring  glory  to  the  West.  The 
real  greatness  of  the  country  depends  upon  the  character 
of  the  people. 

When  your  visit  is  over,  and  you  take  the  train  for 
home,  you  think  of  your  talk  with  the  chief.  You 
think,  too,  of  the  old  days  of  the  "  No  Man's  Land " 
that  is  now  at  an  end,  when  Indians  worked  not  for 
themselves  but  for  their  tribes.  You  know  that  they 
never  left  their  camp-fires  without  first  stamping  out 
every  spark  lest  it  might  burn  the  forest  or  the  prairie 
grass,  and  frighten  away  the  wild  animals  so  that  other 
Indians  could  get  no  game. 

Those  who  now  have  the  land  in  their  keeping  can- 
not do  better  than  to  follow  the  red  man's  example  in 
this  one  thing.  Just  as  the  Indians  stamped  out  the 
sparks  of  their  fires,  so  the  white  men  should  make  sure 
that  no  act  of  theirs  can  bring  sorrow  or  misfortune  to 
others,  or  loss  to  their  land.  If  they  would  be  worthy 
successors  to  such  men  as  the  early  explorers,  they  must 
put  the  welfare  of  their  country  before  their  own  inter- 
ests. Only  so  long  as  her  people  are  loyal  to  the  good 
old  Union  Jack,  and  true  to  the  highest  aims  of  life, 
will  the  Canadian  West  be  a  great  and  glorious  part 
of  the  Empire  that  girdles  the  globe. 


arsh,   Edith  L. 
5620  Where  the   buffalo  ranted 

M37 
190E 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


L